1626LM 5.0B User Provisioning Guide Ed02
Transcript of 1626LM 5.0B User Provisioning Guide Ed02
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM1626 Light Manager | Release 5.0BUser Provisioning Guide
3AL-75164-AAAA
ISSUE 2
OCTOBER 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Solely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
�ot to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2007 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
Solely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Contents
About this document
Purpose ......................................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv
Intended audience ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv
Supported systems .................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv
How to use this document .................................................................................................................................................... xxvixxvi
Related documentation ........................................................................................................................................................ xxviiixxviii
Related training ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxviiixxviii
Technical support .................................................................................................................................................................. xxviiixxviii
How to order ........................................................................................................................................................................... xxviiixxviii
Quality policy ............................................................................................................................................................................ xxixxxix
Safety messages ....................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxxix
How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxxix
1 Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Quick Presentation
Introducing Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM ................................................................................................................................. 1-21-2
Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LMManagement
Introducing Alcatel-Lucent LM Management ................................................................................................................. 1-31-3
About the Online Help
Online Help Scope ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-41-4
2 Before You Start With 1626 LM Management
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
iii
Understanding the 1626 LMManagement
Quick Overview of 1626 LM Management ..................................................................................................................... 2-22-2
Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements ............................................................................................................................ 2-32-3
Software Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-32-3
Management Start Up Procedures
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-42-4
Installing the Craft Terminal Application .......................................................................................................................... 2-52-5
Uninstalling the Craft Terminal Application .................................................................................................................... 2-62-6
3 Operation Graphical User Interface
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13-1
Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUI
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-23-2
The Equipment ViewWindow .............................................................................................................................................. 3-33-3
The Subrack ViewWindow ................................................................................................................................................... 3-53-5
The Board ViewWindow ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-73-7
The Transmission ViewWindow ....................................................................................................................................... 3-153-15
The Equipment OverviewWindow .................................................................................................................................. 3-183-18
Describing the Permanent Displayed Areas
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-203-20
The Title Bar ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-203-20
The Menu Bar ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-203-20
Alarm Severity Indicators .................................................................................................................................................... 3-263-26
Operation Domain Alarm Indicators ................................................................................................................................ 3-283-28
Management Status Indicators ............................................................................................................................................ 3-293-29
Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point Input Windows
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-313-31
Search for Termination Point Input Window ................................................................................................................. 3-323-32
Using the Search for Termination Point Input Window ............................................................................................ 3-323-32
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
4 1626 LM Management Start Up
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14-1
Starting Up with 1626 LMManagement
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-24-2
Starting the Craft Terminal Application ............................................................................................................................. 4-34-3
Starting the 1626 LM Supervision ....................................................................................................................................... 4-44-4
Starting the 1626 LM GUI ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-54-5
Managing the Access State
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-64-6
Access State Icon Status .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-74-7
Setting the Access State to the Craft Terminal Application ........................................................................................ 4-84-8
Setting the Access State to the 1353 �M .......................................................................................................................... 4-94-9
5 Software Download Management
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15-1
Downloading a Software Package ....................................................................................................................................... 5-25-2
Activating a Software Package ............................................................................................................................................. 5-45-4
Displaying Software Package Information ....................................................................................................................... 5-55-5
6 Communication Configuration
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16-1
Communication and Routing Management Parameters
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-26-2
Common �etwork Concepts .................................................................................................................................................. 6-36-3
Local Area Addressing Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 6-46-4
Time Synchronization Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 6-66-6
Ethernet Interface Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 6-76-7
IP Static Routes Parameters ................................................................................................................................................... 6-96-9
LAPD Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-106-10
IP Tunnel Parameter ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-116-11
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
v
Managing Communication and Routing
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-126-12
Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters ......................................................................................... 6-136-13
Setting Up the �etwork Manager Address Associated to the 1626 LM .............................................................. 6-146-14
Identifying a �etwork Element as a �TP Server ......................................................................................................... 6-156-15
Disabling A�TP from the 1626 LM ................................................................................................................................. 6-166-16
Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 �M values .................................................................................. 6-176-17
Configuring the Ethernet Interface ................................................................................................................................... 6-186-18
Configuring IP Static Routes ............................................................................................................................................... 6-196-19
Configuring LAPD ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-216-21
Managing OSI over IP ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-236-23
7 Database Backup and Restore
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17-1
When to Backup and Restore ?
When to Backup? ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-27-2
When to Restore? ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-27-2
Managing the MIB
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-37-3
Backing Up the MIB ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-47-4
Restoring the MIB ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-57-5
Deleting the MIB ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-77-7
8 Racks and Subracks Management
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18-1
Displaying Hardware Views
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-28-2
Displaying the General Overview of the 1626 LM Hardware .................................................................................. 8-38-3
Displaying the Rack View ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-48-4
Displaying the Subrack View ................................................................................................................................................ 8-58-5
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Displaying the Board View .................................................................................................................................................... 8-68-6
Managing Racks
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-78-7
Declaring a Rack ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-88-8
Setting a Rack In Service ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-108-10
Setting a Rack Out Of Service ............................................................................................................................................ 8-118-11
Undeclaring/Removing a Rack .......................................................................................................................................... 8-128-12
Managing Subracks
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-138-13
Declaring a Subrack ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-148-14
Setting a Subrack In Service ............................................................................................................................................... 8-158-15
Setting a Subrack Out Of Service ...................................................................................................................................... 8-168-16
Undeclaring/Removing a Subrack .................................................................................................................................... 8-178-17
9 Board and SFP/XFP Module Management
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19-1
About Board Provisioning and Configuration
About the Provisioning Process ............................................................................................................................................ 9-49-4
About ETHC Configurations ................................................................................................................................................. 9-59-5
About TRBD1191 Board ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-119-11
Declaring/Undeclaring Boards
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-129-12
TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features .............................................................................................................. 9-139-13
Declaring OCPU Protection Boards ................................................................................................................................. 9-199-19
Declaring Control and Service Boards ............................................................................................................................ 9-209-20
Declaring TRBD Boards ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-229-22
Declaring TRBC boards ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-269-26
Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards .............................................................................................................................. 9-299-29
Declaring BMDX Boards ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-319-31
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
vii
Declaring OMDX Boards ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-339-33
Declaring CMDX Boards ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-359-35
Declaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board ........................................................................................... 9-369-36
Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards ......................................................................................................................... 9-389-38
Declaring BOFAAmplifier Boards ................................................................................................................................... 9-409-40
Declaring Ethernet Boards ................................................................................................................................................... 9-429-42
Declaring TDMX 1180 boards ........................................................................................................................................... 9-449-44
Declaring OADC boards ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-469-46
Declaring WMA�1100 Boards .......................................................................................................................................... 9-479-47
Declaring WMA� 3x74 Boards ........................................................................................................................................ 9-499-49
Undeclaring/Removing Boards .......................................................................................................................................... 9-519-51
Board Configuration Parameters
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-539-53
Board Generic Configuration Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 9-539-53
Board Specific Configuration Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 9-559-55
Laser Power Configuration Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 9-629-62
TRBx Shutdown Criteria ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-649-64
LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 9-659-65
LOFA11xxAPSD Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 9-689-68
TDMX and WMA� Configuration Parameters ........................................................................................................... 9-699-69
Configuring Boards
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-739-73
Configuring ETHCWorking Mode .................................................................................................................................. 9-749-74
Managing ETHC Cross Connections ............................................................................................................................... 9-759-75
Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation .................................................................................. 9-779-77
Configuring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power ...................................................................................................... 9-789-78
Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power ............................................................................................................... 9-799-79
Configuring WMA� Laser Power .................................................................................................................................... 9-809-80
Configuring TRBx Frequency ............................................................................................................................................ 9-819-81
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters ............................................................................................................... 9-829-82
Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria ............................................................................................................................. 9-839-83
Configuring 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet Mapping .......................................................................................................... 9-849-84
Configuring LOFA11xxAPSD .......................................................................................................................................... 9-859-85
Configuring Contradirectionality ...................................................................................................................................... 9-869-86
Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board ................................................................................. 9-879-87
Configuring ALCTWorking Mode ................................................................................................................................... 9-889-88
Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism .......................................................................... 9-909-90
Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile ............................................................................................................................. 9-919-91
Configuring TDMX 1180 Output Power ........................................................................................................................ 9-929-92
Configuring WMA� Provisioning Parameters ............................................................................................................ 9-939-93
Configuring WMA� 1100 Equalization Parameter .................................................................................................... 9-949-94
Configuring Channels on WMA� 3x74 boards ........................................................................................................... 9-959-95
Setting Boards In/Out of Service
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-969-96
Setting a Board In Service .................................................................................................................................................... 9-979-97
Setting a Board Out of Service ........................................................................................................................................... 9-989-98
Managing SFP/XFPModules
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-999-99
About SFP/XFPModules and Board Compatibility ................................................................................................ 9-1009-100
Declaring a SFP/XFPModule .......................................................................................................................................... 9-1019-101
Setting a SFP/XFPModule In Service .......................................................................................................................... 9-1029-102
Setting a SFP/XFPModule Out of Service ................................................................................................................. 9-1039-103
Undeclaring/Removing SFP/XFPModules ................................................................................................................ 9-1049-104
Displaying SFP/XFPModule Payload .......................................................................................................................... 9-1059-105
Changing an SFP or an XFP ............................................................................................................................................. 9-1069-106
Activating Firmware
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-1079-107
Firmware Activation Displayed Information .............................................................................................................. 9-1079-107
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
ix
Activating Firmware ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-1089-108
Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board Laser
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-1099-109
Laser Control Parameters ................................................................................................................................................... 9-1099-109
Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser ......................................................................................... 9-1119-111
Managing External Points
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-1139-113
About External Points ......................................................................................................................................................... 9-1139-113
External Points Parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 9-1159-115
Displaying all External Points .......................................................................................................................................... 9-1169-116
Managing External Input Points ...................................................................................................................................... 9-1179-117
Managing External Output Points ................................................................................................................................... 9-1189-118
Filtering External Input Points ......................................................................................................................................... 9-1199-119
Filtering External Output Points ...................................................................................................................................... 9-1209-120
Managing LOFAUpgrade with EMPM1000
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-1219-121
Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without OMSP ............................ 9-1229-122
Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with OMSP .................................. 9-1249-124
Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM ............................................................................................. 9-1269-126
10 R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-110-1
About R-OADM and TR-OADM
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-210-2
R-OADM and TR-OADMMain characteristics .......................................................................................................... 10-310-3
Boards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM �odes .............................................................................................. 10-510-5
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks .......................................................................................................... 10-710-7
R/TR-OADM �etwork Procedures/WMA�3x74 Based
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-910-9
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Creating a Transmission Path ........................................................................................................................................... 10-1010-10
Deleting a Transmission Path ........................................................................................................................................... 10-1310-13
R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMA�3x74 Based
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1610-16
Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections .................................................................................. 10-1710-17
Blocking a Channel Connection ...................................................................................................................................... 10-1910-19
Setting an Add & Drop Connection ............................................................................................................................... 10-2010-20
Setting an Express Connection ........................................................................................................................................ 10-2310-23
R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMA�1100 Based
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-2610-26
R-OADM/WMA�1100 Based Configuration Parameters .................................................................................... 10-2710-27
Configuring R-OADM with WMA�1100 Boards ................................................................................................... 10-2810-28
11 Transmission Management
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-111-1
About Transmission Management Entities
The Main Transmission Management Entities ............................................................................................................. 11-211-2
About RS-TTI and J0 Configuration
Introducing RS-TTI and J0 .................................................................................................................................................. 11-711-7
Configuring the RS-TTI/J0 .................................................................................................................................................. 11-911-9
About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) Configuration
Introducing Optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers) .................................................................................................... 11-1011-10
Configuring TTIs .................................................................................................................................................................. 11-1211-12
Managing Error Correction
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-1411-14
Enabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction) .......................................................................................................... 11-1511-15
Disabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction) ......................................................................................................... 11-1611-16
Modifying the BER (Bit Error Rate) Threshold ........................................................................................................ 11-1711-17
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
xi
12 Cross Connection Management
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-112-1
About Cross Connections
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-212-2
Cross Connection Types ....................................................................................................................................................... 12-312-3
Cross Connections Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 12-412-4
Managing Cross Connections
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-712-7
Displaying Cross Connections for a Subrack ................................................................................................................ 12-812-8
Displaying Cross Connections for a Board .................................................................................................................... 12-912-9
Creating Cross Connections .............................................................................................................................................. 12-1012-10
Modifying Cross Connections .......................................................................................................................................... 12-1112-11
Deleting Cross Connections .............................................................................................................................................. 12-1212-12
13 Connector and Cabling Management
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-113-1
Setting Connectors In Service ............................................................................................................................................ 13-213-2
Setting Connectors Out Of Service ................................................................................................................................... 13-313-3
Configuring the Cabling between 2 Connectors .......................................................................................................... 13-413-4
Deleting the Cabling between 2 Connectors ................................................................................................................. 13-513-5
Exporting the Cabling Configuration to an XML File ............................................................................................... 13-613-6
14 Loopback Tests
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-114-1
About Loopbacks
Introducing Loopbacks .......................................................................................................................................................... 14-214-2
Loopback Parameters in Display Mode .......................................................................................................................... 14-314-3
Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode ......................................................................................................................... 14-514-5
Managing loopbacks
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-614-6
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Displaying Existing Loopbacks ......................................................................................................................................... 14-714-7
Creating Loopbacks ................................................................................................................................................................ 14-814-8
Deleting Loopbacks ................................................................................................................................................................ 14-914-9
15 Protection Management
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-115-1
About 1626 LM Protection
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-215-2
Protection Principles .............................................................................................................................................................. 15-315-3
Recommended Board Location ....................................................................................................................................... 15-1015-10
The Protection Activation Process .................................................................................................................................. 15-1115-11
Managing Protection
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-1315-13
Protection Displayed Information ................................................................................................................................... 15-1415-14
Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection ...................................................................................... 15-1715-17
Controlling Protection ......................................................................................................................................................... 15-1815-18
16 Monitoring Procedures
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-116-1
Displaying Instantaneous Measurements ....................................................................................................................... 16-216-2
Displaying the Abnormal Condition List ........................................................................................................................ 16-616-6
Displaying Event Logs .......................................................................................................................................................... 16-716-7
Displaying the Channel margin .......................................................................................................................................... 16-816-8
Displaying Power Level per Channel Frequency ...................................................................................................... 16-1016-10
17 Performance Monitoring
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-117-1
About Performance Management
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-317-3
Performance Counters ........................................................................................................................................................... 17-417-4
Performance Monitoring Mechanism .............................................................................................................................. 17-717-7
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
xiii
Counter Thresholds ................................................................................................................................................................. 17-817-8
Possible Counter Threshold Values .................................................................................................................................. 17-917-9
Managing Counter Threshold Tables
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-1117-11
Displaying Counter Threshold Tables ........................................................................................................................... 17-1217-12
Modifying Counter Threshold Tables ............................................................................................................................ 17-1317-13
Managing Performance Monitoring
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-1417-14
Starting Performance Monitoring (PM) ........................................................................................................................ 17-1517-15
Resetting Counter Values ................................................................................................................................................... 17-1717-17
Refreshing Counter Values ................................................................................................................................................ 17-1817-18
Stopping Performance Monitoring ................................................................................................................................. 17-1917-19
Creating a Trail Monitor (TM) ......................................................................................................................................... 17-2017-20
Deleting a Trail Monitor (TM) ......................................................................................................................................... 17-2117-21
Consulting Performance Data
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-2217-22
Performance Current Data Displayed Information ................................................................................................... 17-2317-23
Performance History Data Displayed Information ................................................................................................... 17-2417-24
Consulting Performance Current Data .......................................................................................................................... 17-2517-25
Consulting Performance History Data .......................................................................................................................... 17-2617-26
Refreshing Current Counter Values ................................................................................................................................ 17-2717-27
Refreshing History Counter Values ................................................................................................................................ 17-2817-28
Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique Entry Point
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-2917-29
Understanding the PM OverviewWindow .................................................................................................................. 17-3017-30
Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM Overview Window ............................................................. 17-3117-31
18 System Information Collection and Exportation
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-118-1
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Remote Inventory Displayed Information ...................................................................................................................... 18-218-2
Uploading the System Remote Inventory ....................................................................................................................... 18-318-3
Capturing the System Components Remote Inventory Information .................................................................... 18-418-4
Exporting System Configuration to an XML File ....................................................................................................... 18-618-6
19 Alarm Management
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-119-1
About Alarms
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-319-3
Alarm Types .............................................................................................................................................................................. 19-419-4
Alarm Severity Indicators .................................................................................................................................................... 19-519-5
Operation Domain Alarm Indicators ................................................................................................................................ 19-719-7
Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles ....................................................................................................... 19-819-8
Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-1019-10
Displaying ASAP Detailed Information ....................................................................................................................... 19-1119-11
Creating an ASAP ................................................................................................................................................................. 19-1219-12
Modifying an ASAP ............................................................................................................................................................. 19-1419-14
Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity .................................................................................................................... 19-1619-16
Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities ........................................................................................................ 19-1819-18
De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities ......................................................................................................... 19-2019-20
Deleting ASAPs ..................................................................................................................................................................... 19-2219-22
Managing Alarm Threshold Tables
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-2319-23
Alarm Threshold Parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 19-2419-24
Displaying Board Alarm Threshold ............................................................................................................................... 19-2719-27
Creating Alarm Threshold Tables ................................................................................................................................... 19-2819-28
Assigning an Alarm Threshold to a Board ................................................................................................................... 19-3019-30
Modifying Alarm Threshold Tables ............................................................................................................................... 19-3119-31
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
xv
Deleting Alarm Threshold Tables ................................................................................................................................... 19-3319-33
Managing Auto Discovery Alarm
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-3419-34
Enabling/Disabling Auto Discovery Alarm ................................................................................................................. 19-3519-35
20 Equipment Alarms
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-120-1
AUP (Auxiliary Unit Problem) .......................................................................................................................................... 20-320-3
COCE (Configuration Or Customization Error) .......................................................................................................... 20-420-4
EQPT (Equipment Malfunction) ....................................................................................................................................... 20-520-5
HT (High Temperature) ......................................................................................................................................................... 20-620-6
HVCSP (Heating or ventilation or Cooling System Problem) ............................................................................... 20-720-7
IPD (Input Power Degraded) .............................................................................................................................................. 20-820-8
IPL (Input Power Loss) ......................................................................................................................................................... 20-920-9
LA� (LA�Alarm) ............................................................................................................................................................... 20-1020-10
OCCO (Optical Connector Cover Open) ..................................................................................................................... 20-1120-11
OPD (Output Power Degraded) ....................................................................................................................................... 20-1220-12
OPL (Output Power Loss) ................................................................................................................................................. 20-1320-13
PD (Performance Degraded) ............................................................................................................................................. 20-1420-14
PP (Power Problem) ............................................................................................................................................................. 20-1520-15
RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing) .................................................................................................................................. 20-1620-16
RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem) ................................................................................................................................... 20-1720-17
RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch) ................................................................................................................ 20-1820-18
RUU (Replaceable Unit Unknown) ............................................................................................................................... 20-1920-19
SCP (Serial Communication Problem) ......................................................................................................................... 20-2020-20
TD (Transmitter Degraded) ............................................................................................................................................... 20-2120-21
TF (Transmitter Failure) ..................................................................................................................................................... 20-2220-22
TOOR (Temperature Out Of Range) ............................................................................................................................. 20-2320-23
UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present) ..................................................................................................................... 20-2420-24
UDCL (User Data Channel Loss) ................................................................................................................................... 20-2520-25
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
VM (Version Mismatch) ..................................................................................................................................................... 20-2620-26
WD (Wavelength Deviation) ............................................................................................................................................ 20-2720-27
21 Transmission Alarms
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-121-1
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) ........................................................................................................................................... 21-221-2
CSF (Communication Subsystem Failure) .................................................................................................................... 21-321-3
LBER (Low Bit Error Rate) ................................................................................................................................................ 21-421-4
LOF (Loss Of Frame) ............................................................................................................................................................ 21-521-5
LOMF (Loss Of Multi-Frame) ........................................................................................................................................... 21-621-6
LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section) ................................................................................................................................. 21-721-7
LOS (Loss Of Signal) ............................................................................................................................................................ 21-821-8
LOSC (Loss Of Supervisory Channel) ............................................................................................................................ 21-921-9
LOSCF (Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame) ......................................................................................................... 21-1021-10
LOW (Loss Of Wavelength) ............................................................................................................................................. 21-1121-11
LTCER (Low Threshold Corrected Error) ................................................................................................................... 21-1221-12
otnTIM (Optical Transport �etwork Trace Identifier Mismatch) ....................................................................... 21-1321-13
SSF (Server Signal Failure) .............................................................................................................................................. 21-1421-14
SSF- i (Server Signal Failure - ingress) ........................................................................................................................ 21-1621-16
SSF- e (Server Signal Failure - egress) ......................................................................................................................... 21-1721-17
TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm) ................................................................................................................................... 21-1821-18
TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch) .................................................................................................................................... 21-1921-19
UAT (UnAvailable Time) ................................................................................................................................................... 21-2021-20
UE (Uncorrected Error) ...................................................................................................................................................... 21-2121-21
URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) ................................................................................................................... 21-2221-22
22 Processing Alarms
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 22-122-1
DB (Database Corrupted) ..................................................................................................................................................... 22-222-2
Glossary
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
xvii
Index
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
List of tables
3-1 Transmission Specific Graphical Conventions ............................................................................................ 3-16
3-2 Views Menu .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-20
3-3 Configuration Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 3-21
3-4 Configuration Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 3-23
3-5 Supervision Menu ................................................................................................................................................... 3-23
3-6 Download Menu ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3-7 Equipment Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3-8 Board menu ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3-9 Alarm Severity Levels ........................................................................................................................................... 3-26
3-10 Management Status Indicators ........................................................................................................................... 3-29
3-11 Search Criteria Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 3-33
4-1 Access State Icon Status ......................................................................................................................................... 4-7
6-1 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters ................................................................................................. 6-4
6-2 �TP Server �etwork Address Parameters ........................................................................................................ 6-6
6-3 Ethernet Interface Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 6-7
6-4 IP Routing Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 6-9
6-5 LAPD Parameters ................................................................................................................................................... 6-10
9-1 Transponder Models and Features .................................................................................................................... 9-13
9-2 Concentrator Models and Features ................................................................................................................... 9-16
9-3 Mux/Demux Models and Features .................................................................................................................... 9-17
9-4 OMDX Specificities ............................................................................................................................................... 9-17
9-5 TRBD4xxx MaximumAcceptable Input Power .......................................................................................... 9-22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
xix
9-6 TRBD4312 MaximumAcceptable Input Power .......................................................................................... 9-22
9-7 TRBD1x9z MaximumAcceptable Input Power .......................................................................................... 9-22
9-8 TRBD1xyz MaximumAcceptable Input Power .......................................................................................... 9-23
9-9 TRBC4xxx MaximumAcceptable Input Power .......................................................................................... 9-26
9-10 CMDX Band Parameter Table ............................................................................................................................ 9-54
9-11 Contradirectionality Parameters table ............................................................................................................. 9-54
9-12 TRBx Transmission Parameters Table ............................................................................................................ 9-55
9-13 LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table ............................................................................................................... 9-57
9-14 ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Parameter Table .......................................................................... 9-58
9-15 ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table ............................................................................................. 9-58
9-16 2*GE_FC Signal Type Transportation Parameters Table ......................................................................... 9-59
9-17 TDMX 1180 Port Profile Parameters Table .................................................................................................. 9-59
9-18 WMA� 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table .............................................................................................. 9-59
9-19 WMA� 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table .............................................................................................. 9-60
9-20 OSCU Channel Supervision Synchronization Parameter Table ............................................................ 9-62
9-21 TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table ...................................................... 9-62
9-22 WMA� 1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Table ................................................... 9-63
9-23 WMA� 3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Table .................................................................. 9-63
9-24 TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table .......................................................................................................................... 9-64
9-25 APTModes Table ................................................................................................................................................... 9-65
9-26 VOAModes Table .................................................................................................................................................. 9-66
9-27 APT/VOAParameters Table ............................................................................................................................... 9-67
9-28 APSD Parameters Table ........................................................................................................................................ 9-68
9-29 TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table ............................................................................................... 9-70
9-30 WMA� 3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters Table .......................................................................... 9-71
9-31 Firmware Activation Displayed Information .............................................................................................. 9-107
9-32 Laser Control Parameters Table ...................................................................................................................... 9-109
9-33 External Input Point Parameters Table .......................................................................................................... 9-115
9-34 External Output Point Parameters .................................................................................................................. 9-115
List of tables
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
10-1 R-OADM and TR-OADMMain Characteristics ........................................................................................ 10-3
10-2 R-OADM and TR-OADM Significant Boards ............................................................................................ 10-5
11-1 TP (Termination Points) ........................................................................................................................................ 11-5
11-2 RS-TTI/J0 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 11-8
11-3 TTI Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................... 11-11
12-1 Cross Connection Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 12-4
14-1 Loopback Parameters in Display Mode .......................................................................................................... 14-4
14-2 Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode ........................................................................................................ 14-5
15-1 Protection Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 15-14
16-1 Channel Margin States .......................................................................................................................................... 16-8
17-1 Performance Counters ........................................................................................................................................... 17-4
17-2 15 minutes Counter Thresholds ......................................................................................................................... 17-9
17-3 24 hours Counter Thresholds ........................................................................................................................... 17-10
17-4 Current Data Parameters .................................................................................................................................... 17-23
17-5 History Data Parameters .................................................................................................................................... 17-24
18-1 Remote Inventory Displayed Information ..................................................................................................... 18-2
19-1 Alarm Severity Levels ........................................................................................................................................... 19-5
19-2 SystemASAP ........................................................................................................................................................... 19-8
19-3 BMDXAlarm Thresholds ................................................................................................................................. 19-24
19-4 CMDXAlarm Thresholds ................................................................................................................................. 19-24
19-5 OMDXAlarm Thresholds ................................................................................................................................. 19-24
19-6 LOFAAlarm Thresholds .................................................................................................................................... 19-25
19-7 WMA�3174Alarm Thresholds ...................................................................................................................... 19-25
19-8 WMA�1100Alarm Thresholds ...................................................................................................................... 19-25
19-9 TDMXAlarm Thresholds .................................................................................................................................. 19-25
19-10 TRBD and TRBCAlarm Threshold .............................................................................................................. 19-26
List of tables
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
xxi
List of figures
2-1 1626 LMManagement Context ........................................................................................................................... 2-22-2
3-1 Example of an Equipment ViewWindow ........................................................................................................ 3-33-3
3-2 Example of a Subrack ViewWindow ................................................................................................................ 3-53-5
3-3 Example of an ESCT Board View ....................................................................................................................... 3-73-7
3-4 Example of a 2*GBE_FC Board View .............................................................................................................. 3-83-8
3-5 Example of a TRBD Board View ...................................................................................................................... 3-103-10
3-6 Example of an ETHC Board ViewWith SFP/XFPModules .................................................................. 3-113-11
3-7 Example of an OMDX Board View ................................................................................................................. 3-133-13
3-8 Example of a Transmission ViewWindow .................................................................................................... 3-153-15
3-9 Example of an Equipment OverviewWindow ............................................................................................. 3-183-18
3-10 Alarm Severity Indicators / �o Raised Alarms ............................................................................................ 3-263-26
3-11 Alarm Severity Indicators / Raised Alarms ................................................................................................... 3-263-26
3-12 Operation Domain Alarm Indicators ................................................................................................................ 3-283-28
9-1 ETHC Basic Concept ............................................................................................................................................... 9-59-5
9-2 Example of ETHC-TRBD1191 connection ..................................................................................................... 9-69-6
9-3 Illustration of an ETHC in Concentration Mode ............................................................................................ 9-89-8
9-4 Illustration of an ETHC in Add & Drop Mode ............................................................................................... 9-89-8
9-5 TRBD1191 Basic Concept ................................................................................................................................... 9-119-11
9-6 4 LOFA11xx Repeater Configuration .............................................................................................................. 9-389-38
11-1 OGPI Ports and Associated Boards .................................................................................................................. 11-311-3
11-2 OTS Ports and Associated Boards ..................................................................................................................... 11-411-4
14-1 Loopback and Continue User/Client Side ...................................................................................................... 14-214-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
xxiii
14-2 Loopback and Continue Line Side .................................................................................................................... 14-314-3
14-3 Loopback and Cut Line Side ............................................................................................................................... 14-314-3
15-1 OSC�P Principles ................................................................................................................................................... 15-315-3
15-2 OS�CPActivation .................................................................................................................................................. 15-415-4
15-3 Example of OMSP Implementation ................................................................................................................. 15-615-6
15-4 OMSP Switching cases ......................................................................................................................................... 15-715-7
17-1 CA/PM-AS Raise and Clear Logic ................................................................................................................... 17-817-8
19-1 Alarm Severity Indicators / �o Raised Alarms ............................................................................................ 19-519-5
19-2 Alarm Severity Indicators / Raised Alarms ................................................................................................... 19-519-5
19-3 Operation Domain Alarm Indicators ................................................................................................................ 19-719-7
List of figures
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
About this documentAbout this document
Purpose
This document:
• describes all the required information to enable the 1626 LM operator to manage the
day-to-day operations.
• reflects the contents of the 1626 LM online help.
This document specifically describes:
• the operation general context,
• the operation and maintenance GUI (Graphical User Interface),
• the operation parameters to be managed,
• the operation procedures to be performed,
• the equipment alarms and related corrective actions,
• the transmission alarms and related corrective actions.
Intended audience
This document is designed for 1626 LM operators who need to be assisted in
understanding or performing the 1626 LM management tasks.
Supported systems
This document covers the features of 1626 LM Release 5.0B.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
xxv
How to use this document
The User Provisioning Guide is divided into the following topics as described in the table
of contents:
Discovering Alcatel Lucent 1626 LM Contains a general description of the product
features and refers to all covered topics.
Before You Start with 1626 LM Management Describes the required hardware and
installation tasks to perform before to start the
1626 LM management.
Operation Graphical User Interface Introduces and describes the main features of
the operation and maintenance user interface.
1626 LM Management Startup Describes the operation starting procedures.
Software Download Management Describes software packages management
procedures.
Communication Configuration Describes parameters and procedures to set up
all the required addresses and network
identifiers.
Database Backup and Restore Describes MIB backup and restore
management procedures.
Rack and Subrack Management Describes the procedures to declare and
undeclare racks and subracks.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Describes required parameters and procedures
to declare and configure 1626 LM boards and
transceiver modules.
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration
Management
Describes configuration parameters and
procedures to set Tunable and/or
Reconfigurable OADM configuration.
Transmission Management Describes entities involved in transmission
management and specific transmission
parameters.
Cross Connection Management Describes:
• the boards involved in cross connections
and the main cross connection principles,
• the cross connection parameters and
procedures.
Connector and Cabling Management Describes connector and cabling declaration
and activation procedures.
Loopback Tests Explains the loopback principle and describes
the loopback parameters and procedures.
Protection Management Explains the protection principles and
describes protection parameters and
procedures.
About this document
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Monitoring Procedures Describes the monitoring procedures to
display instantaneous measurements, abnormal
condition list and event logs.
Performance Monitoring Describes:
• the performance counters and performance
monitoring mechanisms,
• the performance threshold management,
• the performance monitoring procedures.
System Information Collection and
Exportation
Describes:
• the procedures to display and to load
system inventory and firmware
• how to export system configuration
information to an xml file.
Alarm Management Explains:
• the various alarm indicators and severity
levels,
• the alarm severity profiles management
principles.
Describes alarm threshold table parameters
and operation procedures.
Equipment Alarms Describes equipment alarms and related
corrective actions.
Transmission Alarms Describes transmission alarms and related
corrective actions.
Processing Alarms Describes the alarm raised when data are
corrupted and the required actions to perform
for clearing this alarm.
About this document
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
xxvii
Related documentation
Alcatel-Lucent also provides the following documents to help you plan, install, and
operate your 1626 LM equipment and associated operating tools:
DOCUMENT TYPE PART NUMBER
1626LM R5.0B Performance Design
Specification8DG 170740039 DSZZA
1626LM R5.0B SPLM User Provisioning
Guide3AL 75164 BAAA
1626LM R5.0B Product Information and
Planning Guide3AL 75164 EAAA
1626LM R5.0B Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide3AL 75164 FAAA
1626LM R5.0B Safety Guide 3AL 75164 HAAA
1626LM R5.0B System Turn-Up Guide 3AL 75164 GAAA
1626LM R5.0B Installation Handbook 3AL 75164 KAAA
1626LM R5.0B O�DP Installation Guide 3AL 75164 LAAA
1626LM R5.0B O�DP Engineering and
Planning Tool User Guide3AL 75164 JAAA
1626LM R5.0B O�DP User Guide CDROM 3AL 75184 AAAA
1626LM R5.0B Customer Doc CD 3AL 75165 AAAA
Related training
Alcatel-Lucent University provides courses to train telecommunication technicians in
installation, operations, and maintenance personnel. Contact Alcatel-Lucent at
1-888-582-3688 to enroll in training classes.
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local customer support team. Reach them via the web
at http://alcatel-lucent.com/support or through the telephone number listed under the
Technical Assistance Center menu at https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do
(https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do) .
How to order
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, use the following website: https://support.lucent.com
(http://support.alcatel-lucent.com)
About this document
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Quality policy
We ensure that everything we do must be focused on becoming the trusted partner of our
customers by:
• Delivering high quality, secure and reliable products, services, software and solutions
the first time, every time, and on time - as promised.
• Continuously making improvements and looking for innovative ways to anticipate
and fully meet the highest expectations of our customers.
• Counting on all employees to be personally accountable for putting the customer first
and honoring the commitments we make.
This policy will be regularly reviewed, updated as necessary, applied and communicated
to all employees and persons working for or on behalf of Alcatel-Lucent, and made
available to interested parties and the public.
Safety messages
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
How to comment
You can send your feedback to your local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center at
https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do (https://support.lucent.com/portal/
olcsHome.do) . Your feedback will be forwarded to the appropriate documentation team
for evaluation and action, as appropriate. Be sure to cite the relevant information such as
product name, document title, document ID, release, issue number, date, page number,
etc. in your feedback.
About this document
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
xxix
1 1Discovering Alcatel-Lucent
1626 LM
Overview
Purpose
This chapter gives a brief description of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM features and lists the
operation domain you can access to manage your configuration.
Contents
Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Quick Presentation 1-2
Introducing Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM 1-2
Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LMManagement 1-3
Introducing Alcatel-Lucent LM Management 1-3
About the Online Help 1-4
Online Help Scope 1-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
1-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Quick Presentation
Introducing Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM
The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM (Light Manager) is a third-generation DWDM platform that
addresses long-haul to ultra long-haul terrestrial applications. The 1626 LM supports the
best of terrestrial technologies to provide the following unmatched performance at the
lower cost:
• a capacity of up to 96 channels at 10 and 40 Gbps in the extended C-band,
• spanning distances up to 4,500 km without electrical regeneration.
The 1626 LM can be used to upgrade existing links, resulting in cost-efficiency and better
performance for legacy platforms, and it can be used for new DWDM deployments,
providing the most competitive technology on the market. The system helps service
providers move traffic efficiently and reliably throughout the network, minimizing their
total cost of ownership
See Also
“Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Management” (p. 1-3)
Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Quick PresentationIntroducing Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Management
Introducing Alcatel-Lucent LM Management
The 1626 LM is managed through a friendly and intuitive Graphical User Interface.
Any operational support is provided by an online help facility which covers the following
chapters:
• Chapter 2, “Before You Start With 1626 LM Management”
• Chapter 3, “Operation Graphical User Interface”
• Chapter 4, “1626 LM Management Start Up”
• Chapter 5, “Software Download Management”
• Chapter 6, “Communication Configuration”
• Chapter 7, “Database Backup and Restore”
• Chapter 8, “Racks and Subracks Management”
• Chapter 9, “Board and SFP/XFPModule Management”
• Chapter 10, “R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management”
• Chapter 11, “Transmission Management”
• Chapter 12, “Cross Connection Management”
• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”
• Chapter 14, “Loopback Tests”
• Chapter 15, “Protection Management”
• Chapter 16, “Monitoring Procedures”
• Chapter 17, “Performance Monitoring”
• Chapter 18, “System Information Collection and Exportation”
• Chapter 19, “Alarm Management”
• Chapter 20, “Equipment Alarms”
• Chapter 21, “Transmission Alarms”
• Chapter 22, “Processing Alarms”
Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM ManagementIntroducing Alcatel-Lucent LM Management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
1-3
About the Online Help
Online Help Scope
Supported systems
This Online Help covers the features of 1626 LM Release 5.0B.
Online Help release
The release of this current Online Help is: V5.0B-4.
To access the Online Help contents
To access the Online Help contents, click on the following link:
Chapter 1, “Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM”
Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM About the Online HelpOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
2 2Before You Start With
1626 LM Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains how to perform the required actions to put in place the 1626 LM
management means.
Contents
Understanding the 1626 LMManagement 2-2
Quick Overview of 1626 LM Management 2-2
Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements 2-3
Software Requirements 2-3
Management Start Up Procedures 2-4
Installing the Craft Terminal Application 2-5
Uninstalling the Craft Terminal Application 2-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
2-1
Understanding the 1626 LM Management
Quick Overview of 1626 LM Management
The 1626 LM is managed through a Graphical User Interface which is hosted either
remotely by a 1353 �M platform or locally by a PC equipped with a 1320 CT (Craft
Terminal) application. The management protocol is Q3 and the default network is OSI.
When the 1626 LM is managed from a Craft terminal application, the communication
interface is an RS232 serial line.
Figure 2-1, “1626 LM Management Context” (p. 2-2) illustrates the 1626 LM
management context.
Figure 2-1 1626 LM Management Context
Before You Start With 1626 LM Management Understanding the 1626 LM ManagementQuick Overview of 1626 LM Management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
�ote:Because the Craft Terminal application runs exclusively on the hosting PC, the
two concepts are often merged and Craft Terminal usually means both the application
and the PC.
The following topics give useful information about:
• “Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements” (p. 2-3)
• “Software Requirements” (p. 2-3)
Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements
The Craft Terminal hardware consists in a PC which complies with the following
minimum requirements:
• CPU: Pentium II or higher,
• RAM: 256 Mbytes,
• Display: 15,4", 65536 colors, 1024x768,
• 1 CDROM drive,
• 3 buttons mouse or trackball,
• Serial cable.
Software Requirements
The Craft Terminal PC must run on Windows �T, 2000 or XP version and be installed
with the software delivered on theMaster setup CDROM.
Before You Start With 1626 LM Management Understanding the 1626 LM ManagementQuick Overview of 1626 LM Management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
2-3
Management Start Up Procedures
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the operation procedures to be performed to install and uninstall the
Craft Terminal applications.
Contents
Installing the Craft Terminal Application 2-5
Uninstalling the Craft Terminal Application 2-6
Before You Start With 1626 LM Management Management Start Up ProceduresOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Installing the Craft Terminal Application
Purpose
Use this procedure to install the Craft Terminal application in the following
circumstances:
• Craft Terminal application first installation,
• Craft Terminal application release change.
Before you begin
You must have the Master setup CDROM.
How to install the Craft Terminal application
To install the Craft Terminal application, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Insert the Master setup CDROM into the CDROM drive.
Result:The installation wizard starts
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If first installation, perform the following:
1. Click Next until the language selection window is displayed.
2. Select the language and click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Next until the WDM Master setup - IntallShield Wizard window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Tick the software components to install and click Next.
For first installation: Tick all the software components.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 For each software component installation:
1. Click Next.
2. Wait for the end of installation and click Finish.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Remove theMaster setup CDROM from the CDROM drive.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Before You Start With 1626 LM Management Management Start Up ProceduresInstalling the Craft Terminal Application
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
2-5
Uninstalling the Craft Terminal Application
Purpose
This procedure describes the step by step actions to perform when you want to uninstall
the Craft terminal application.
How to uninstall the Craft Terminal application
To uninstall the Craft Terminal application, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Windows task bar, click Start>Settings>Control Panel>Add/Remove
Programs.
Result:The Add/Remove Programs windows opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the program to remove and click Change/Remove.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Before You Start With 1626 LM Management Management Start Up ProceduresUninstalling the Craft Terminal Application
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
3 3Operation Graphical User
Interface
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the main windows of the 1626 LM GUI ( Graphical User
Interface). From these main screens, you can perform all the operation tasks to manage
the 1626 LM configuration.
Contents
Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUI 3-2
The Equipment View Window 3-3
The Subrack View Window 3-5
The Board View Window 3-7
The Transmission View Window 3-15
The Equipment Overview Window 3-18
Describing the Permanent Displayed Areas 3-20
The Title Bar 3-20
The Menu Bar 3-20
Alarm Severity Indicators 3-26
Operation Domain Alarm Indicators 3-28
Management Status Indicators 3-29
Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point Input Windows 3-31
Search for Termination Point Input Window 3-32
Using the Search for Termination Point Input Window 3-32
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-1
Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUI
Overview
Purpose
You manage the 1626 LM via a GUI (Graphical User Interface). Once you have
performed the complete startup procedure, the GUI displays the management entry
window of the 1626 LM you are connected to.
Contents
The Equipment View Window 3-3
The Subrack View Window 3-5
The Board View Window 3-7
The Transmission View Window 3-15
The Equipment Overview Window 3-18
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
The Equipment View Window
This is the entry window which gives access to the first level of the hardware structure:
the rack level.
Depending on your configuration, you may have a single rack configuration or a multi
rack configuration.
The empty spaces show the possible secondary racks to be provisioned.
The left rack is called the master rack. It contains at least one subrack.
To access to the subrack view, double click on its graphical representation.
You then access to the boards and empty slots graphical representations.
Figure 3-1 Example of an Equipment View Window
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Equipment View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-3
The displayed icons have the following meaning:
Icon Meaning
The component has raised at least one alarm.
The color is dependant on the higher alarm severity.
The component has no raised alarm.
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Equipment View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
The Subrack View Window
Figure 3-2, “Example of a Subrack View Window” (p. 3-5) gives an example of a subrack
view window of the 1626 LM.
This window displays the representation of the boards in the subrack.
The empty spaces show empty slots that you can select to declare a new board.
When you select a card, the border of its graphical representation is highligthed as shown
in Figure 3-2, “Example of a Subrack View Window” (p. 3-5).
Figure 3-2 Example of a Subrack View Window
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Subrack View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-5
The displayed icons have the following meaning:
Icon Meaning
The component has raised at least one alarm.
The color is dependant on the higher alarm severity.
The component is inserted but not declared.
The component has no raised alarm.
The component is in service.
To access to the board view window, double-click on the graphical representation of a
board.
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Subrack View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
The Board View Window
The board view window may have several aspects depending on the type of selected
boards. The following illustrations give some examples of what you can see when
displaying boards.
This window is quite empty because an ESCT board cannot have any SFP/XFP modules,
and is not involved in the transmission process.
Figure 3-3 Example of an ESCT Board View
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Board View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-7
You can however see:
• the Administrative state of the board. Its color depends on its current status which can
be In Service or Out of Service.
• the alarms that the board can raise.
Green color indicates that there is not any alarms. In case of raised alarms the related
alarm graphical representation will have the color corresponding to the configured
severity level.
This window shows the example of a 2*GE_FC board which has one declared SFP
module.
The empty spaces show empty SFP slots that you can select to declare new SFP modules.
When you select an SFP module, the border of its graphical representation is highligthed.
Figure 3-4 Example of a 2*GBE_FC Board View
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Board View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
The displayed icons have the following meaning:
Icon Meaning
The component has raised at least one alarm.
The color is dependant on the higher alarm severity.
The component has no raised alarm.
The component is in service.
You can see:
• the Administrative state of the board. Its color depends on its current status which can
be In Service or Out of Service.
• the alarms that the board can raise. Green color indicates that there is not any alarms.
In case of raised alarms the related alarm graphical representation will have the color
corresponding to the configured severity level.
To access to the transmission view window, double-click on the graphical representation
of a SFP module. The transmission view is then built from the selected SFP module.
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Board View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-9
This window shows an example of a TRBD board which has one port in service.
When you select an SFP module, the border of its graphical representation is highligthed.
You can see:
• the Administrative state of the board. Its color depends on its current status which can
be In Service or Out of Service.
• the alarms that the board can raise.
Green color indicates that there is not any alarms. In case of raised alarms the related
alarm graphical representation will have the color corresponding to the configured
severity level.
Figure 3-5 Example of a TRBD Board View
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Board View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
To access to the transmission view window, you double-click on the graphical
representation of the port. The transmission view is then built from the selected port.
This window shows an example of an ETHC board which has:
• one port in service on the mother board.
This port supports the concentration of the Ethernet flow streaming via the XFP
module.
• two SFP modules (over 9 possible) to interconnect with the client network.
The empty spaces show empty SFP slots that you can select to declare a new SFP or
XFP module.
When you select an SFP module, the border of its graphical representation is highligthed
Figure 3-6 Example of an ETHC Board View With SFP/XFP Modules
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Board View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-11
The displayed icons have the following meaning:
Icon Meaning
The component has raised at least one alarm.
The color is dependant on the higher alarm severity.
The component has no raised alarm.
The component is in service.
You can see:
• the Administrative state of the board. Its color depends on its current status which can
be In Service or Out of Service.
• the alarms that the board can raise.
Green color indicates that there is not any alarms. In case of raised alarms the related
alarm graphical representation will have the color corresponding to the configured
severity level.
To access to the transmission view window, you double-click on the graphical
representation of the port. The transmission view is then built from the selected port.
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Board View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-12 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
This window shows an example of 4 ports in service of an OMDX board.
Figure 3-7 Example of an OMDX Board View
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Board View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-13
You can see:
• the Administrative state of the board. Its color depends on its current status which can
be In Service or Out of Service.
• the alarms that the board can raise.
Green color indicates that there is not any alarms. In case of raised alarms the related
alarm graphical representation will have the color corresponding to the configured
severity level.
The presence of several graphical representations with the same alarm acronym
means that the alarm can be raised from several points of the board. Mouse focus on
an alarm graphic representation gives information on each point.
To access to the transmission view window, you double-click on the graphical
representation of the port. The transmission view is then built from the selected port.
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Board View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-14 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
The Transmission View Window
This window shows an example of a transmission view window built from the selected
port.
It is composed of blocks which represent the TP (Termination Points) involved in the
transmission process.
You can read the transmission view according two perspectives as explained in the
following:
If you consider... Then...
the left block as the
reference block• the sink signal flows from left to right until the Optical
Regeneration Point.
The icons mentioned at the top of the block refer to the sink
alarms that the block can raise.
• The source signal flows from the Optical Regeneration Point to
the left.
Figure 3-8 Example of a Transmission View Window
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Transmission View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-15
If you consider... Then...
the right block as the
reference block• The sink signal flows from right to left until the Optical
Regeneration Point.
The icons mentioned at the bottom of the block refer to the sink
alarms that the block can raise.
• The source signal flows from the Optical Regeneration to the
right.
In case of multiplexing blocks (OMS, ODU2 or RSTTP), you can double click to expand
the representation. In this context, the next TP appear. You then see the complete
transmission view beginning from the initial selected block.
The following table describes the transmission specific graphical conventions.
Table 3-1 Transmission Specific Graphical Conventions
Transmission Graphical
Representations
Description
TTP (Trail Termination Point)
CTP (Connection Termination Point)
TTP and CTP
TTP and CTP with:
• FEC enabled,
• Cross Connection.
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Transmission View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-16 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 3-1 Transmission Specific Graphical Conventions (continued)
Transmission Graphical
Representations
Description
TTP with Performance Monitoring enabled.
TTP with a loopback.
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Transmission View Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-17
The Equipment Overview Window
Figure 3-9, “Example of an Equipment Overview Window” (p. 3-18) gives an example of
an equipment overview window.
This window displays a tree diagram representation of your configuration.
Each box represents a specific component that you can expand or reduce by a double
click or a right click.
Figure 3-9 Example of an Equipment Overview Window
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Equipment Overview Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-18 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Right clicking a component box gives access to a contextual menu list that notably
enables to:
• expand or hide the tree representation,
• navigate to other views,
• access to the transmission view from a port level.
The displayed icons have the following meaning:
Icon Meaning
The component has raised at least one alarm.
The color is dependant on the higher alarm severity.
The component has no raised alarm.
Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Equipment Overview Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-19
Describing the Permanent Displayed Areas
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the areas which are always displayed and accessible from the 1626
LM GUI.
Contents
The Title Bar 3-20
The Menu Bar 3-20
Alarm Severity Indicators 3-26
Operation Domain Alarm Indicators 3-28
Management Status Indicators 3-29
The Title Bar
The title bar displays the name and the release number of the selected 1626 LM.
The Menu Bar
The menu bar is always displayed. From each of the menu items you can perform
management tasks described in the next tables:
• View menu
• Configuration menu
• Diagnosis menu
• Supervision menu
• Download menu
• Equipment menu
• Board Menu
Table 3-2 Views Menu
First Menu Item Submenu Description
Backward �one. Enables to return to the previous visited window.
Forward �one. Enables to re-access the next window from a visited
window.
Equipment �one. Displays the 1626 LM Equipment view.
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-20 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 3-2 Views Menu (continued)
First Menu Item Submenu Description
Equipment
Overview
�one. Display a graphical representation of the
configuration hierarchy.
External Points �one. Lists the external devices connected to the 1626
LM.
Transmission �one. Opens the TP Search window.
Enables to select TP according to search criteria.
Open Object �one. Displays the view of a selected managed entity.
Open in window �one. Displays the view of a selected managed entity in a
new window.
Close �one. Closes the Graphical User Interface.
Table 3-3 Configuration Menu
First Menu Item Submenu Description
Alarm Severity... �one. Opens the ASAP Management
window.
Lists the existing ASAP and enables
ASAP management.
Set Alarm Severities... �one. Opens the Set ASAP window.
Enables to assign ASAP to managed
entities.
NE Time... �one. Opens the NE Time window.
Enables to set the �E time with the
1353 �M time.
Performance Threshold
Tables...
Opens PM Threshold Table Select
window.
Enables to manage Performance
Monitoring Threshold tables.
Cross Connection Management... �one. Opens the Cross Connection
Management window.
Enables to list existing cross
connections and to perform cross
connection management commands.
Loopback Management... �one. Opens Signal Loopback
Management window.
Enables to list existing loopbacks
and to perform loopback
management commands.
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasThe Menu Bar
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-21
Table 3-3 Configuration Menu (continued)
First Menu Item Submenu Description
Comm/Routing Local
Configuration
Opens the Local Configuration
window.
Enables to manage the 1626 LM
network addresses.
OS
Configuration
Opens the OS Configuration
window.
Enables to manage the 1353 �M
network addresses.
NTP Server
Configuration
Opens the NTP Server
Configuration window.
Enables to manage the �TP server
network addresses.
Interface
Configuration >
LAPD
Configuration
Opens LAPD Configuration window.
Enables to set LAPD.
Interface
Configuration >
Ethernet
Configuration
Opens Ethernet Configuration
window.
Enables to set Ethernet addresses.
IP Configuration
> IP Static
Routing
Configuration
Opens IP Static Routing
Configuration window.
Enables to set specific route to reach
specific IP node.
Connectors/Cabling... �one. Opens Connectors Configuration
window.
Enables to activate the connectors
and to declare the cabling between
the different boards.
Transmission Update �one. Starts the update of the
Transmission model.
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasThe Menu Bar
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-22 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 3-4 Configuration Menu
First Menu Item Submenu Description
Alarms NE Alarms...
Object Alarms...
Subtree
Alarms...
Equipment
Alarms...
Transmission
Alarms...
External Points
Alarms...
Launch the ALMAP (AS) Alarm Surveillance
window.
Display the details of the raised alarms for each of
the selected managed entities.
Log Browsing Command Log
Alarm Log
Event log
Open the Event Log browsing application which
enables to retrieve commands, alarms and event
according to search criteria.
View Remote
Inventory...
Firmware
version...
Lists respectively the inventory or the firmware
version of a selected hardware component.
Abnormal Condition
List
�one. Lists the boards which are not working properly.
From a selected item of the list, you can display a
view which focus on the malfunction.
Table 3-5 Supervision Menu
First Menu Item Submenu Description
Access State OS
Requested
Enables to grant the access rights to the Craft
Terminal application (Requested) or to the 1353 �M
(OS).
Alarms Resynchronize
Allow Notifs
Inhibit Notifs
Enables to:
• resynchronize the alarm with the Craft Terminal
application,
• activate the alarm notification,
• inhibit the alarm notification.
Upload Remote
Inventory
�one. Starts the remote inventory upload.
Restart NE... �one. Reboots the 1626 LM.
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasThe Menu Bar
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-23
Table 3-6 Download Menu
First Menu Item Submenu Description
Init Download... �one. Opens a window which enables to select the
required software package to download on the 1626
LM.
Units Info... �one. Opens a window which enables to display the status
of a selected software package.
MIB Management... �one. Opens a window which enables to save and to
restore MIB.
MIB Configuration
Mode...
Online Sets the online MIB configuration.
Table 3-7 Equipment Menu
First Menu Item Submenu Description
Set... �one. Enables to declare the selected hardware
component.
Modify... �one. Enables to modify the declaration of a selected
hardware component.
Remove �one. Enables to undeclare a selected hardware
component.
Set in Service �one. Activates a selected hardware component for
operation.
Set out of Service �one. Deactivates a selected hardware component and
prevents most of operation tasks.
Remote Inventory Rack Level
Subrack Level
Board Level
Starts the remote inventory upload for the selected
hardware component.
Show Supporting
Equipment
�one. Highlights the unit which hosts the selected or
displayed hardware component.
Instantaneous
measurement on
Selected object Starts the instantaneous measurement on a selected
hardware component.
Table 3-8 Board menu
First Menu Item Submenu Description
Show Supporting
Equipment
�one. Highlights the unit which hosts the selected or
displayed board.
Optical Power level
Configuration
�one. Opens the laser output power configuration window.
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasThe Menu Bar
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 3-8 Board menu (continued)
First Menu Item Submenu Description
Modify Equipment
Configuration
�one. Opens board parameter configuration window.
Modify Specific
Equipment
Configuration
�one.
Manage ETHC
Connections
�one. Opens the matrix window displaying the cross
connections between the Client/User line and the
WDM lines.
Alarm Threshold
Configuration
�one. Opens the alarm threshold configuration window.
APT/MSV �one. Opens the amplifier laser output power
configuration window.
APSD Configuration �one. Opens the Automatic Power ShutDown
configuration window for amplifier boards.
�ote:Board menu appears only when a board is selected.
The described menu items are contextual to the type of the selected board.
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasThe Menu Bar
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-25
Alarm Severity Indicators
The 1626 LM tracks and reports faults. If a fault occurs, an alarm is generated.
You can identify very quickly if alarms have been reported with the alarm severity
indicators located at the top left of the GUI.
According to the severity level, Alarm indicators display different shapes and colors:
When there are no raised alarms, indicators are just rectangles, without any numbers as
illustrated the following figure.
When there are raised alarms, indicators display a circle with a figure for the number of
alarms corresponding to the severity level. The following figure gives an example of
alarm indicators displaying raised alarms.
Alarm severity levels are defined as mentioned in the following table.
Table 3-9 Alarm Severity Levels
Severity
Levels
Colors Description
CRITICAL (CRI) Red A service-affecting condition has occurred and immediate
corrective action is required.
MAJOR (MAJ) Orange A service-affecting condition has developed and urgent corrective
action is required.
MINOR (MIN) Yellow A non-service-affecting fault condition has occurred, and you need
to take corrective action to prevent a more serious fault (for
example, one affecting the service).
WARNING (WNG) Cyan Detection of a potential or impending service-affecting fault,
before any significant effects have been felt.
INDETERMINATE
(IND)
White The severity level cannot be determined.
Figure 3-10 Alarm Severity Indicators / No Raised Alarms
Figure 3-11 Alarm Severity Indicators / Raised Alarms
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasAlarm Severity Indicators
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-26 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
�ote: The five alarm severity indicators are greyed-out when the alarm notification
has been inhibited. The indicators keep the information they had just before the inhibit
action.
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasAlarm Severity Indicators
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-27
Operation Domain Alarm Indicators
To spot very quickly the operation domains which are impacted by alarms, you can use
the operation domain alarm indicators located at the top right of the GUI. With these
indicators, you know if alarms are related to:
• External Points
• Equipments
• Transmissions
According to the severity level, alarms domain indicators display different shapes and
colors:
• When there are no raised alarms, indicators are just rectangles, without any numbers.
• When there are raised alarms, indicators display a circle with a figure for the number
of alarms corresponding to the operation domain. The following figure gives an
example of operation domain alarm indicators displaying raised and no raised alarms.
The severity level conventions are the same as for alarm severity indicators.
Figure 3-12 Operation Domain Alarm Indicators
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasOperation Domain Alarm Indicators
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-28 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Management Status Indicators
To have a global view of the 1626 LM operational state, you can watch the management
status indicators located vertically on the right side of the GUI.
Management status indicators are defined as mentioned in Table 3-10, “Management
Status Indicators” (p. 3-29)
Table 3-10 Management Status Indicators
Indicator Icon Indicator
Name
Color Description
Supervision Green Supervised
Blue �ot supervised
Local Access Green Granted
Blue Denied
OS
Communication
Green Link Up
Red Link Down
Default
Configuration
Green �ot Active
Blue Active
OS Connection
State
Green �ot Connected
Blue Connected
Manager Level Green EML (Element Management Level)
Blue �ML (�etwork Management Level)
�etwork Time
Protocol
Brown Disabled
Green Enabled. �o �TP servers reachable.
Blue Enabled. Only one �TP server is
reachable.
Abnormal
Conditions
Green �one
Blue Yes
Database Green Database is consistent
Blue Database is corrupted. Database
restoration is required.
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasManagement Status Indicators
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-29
Table 3-10 Management Status Indicators (continued)
Indicator Icon Indicator
Name
Color Description
Line
Optimization
White �o line optimization process is
running.
Red APE (Automatic Power
Equalization) is running.
Transmission
Misalignment
Green Transmission aligned
Blue Transmission misaligned.
Transmission update required.
The Message Bar
The message bar is located at the bottom center of the GUI. It displays information
related to the managed entity pointed by the mouse. For example, you can see the
complete set of information related to a board location: r01sr01/board#01 (Rack#1,
Subrack#1, board in slot 1).
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasManagement Status Indicators
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-30 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Describing and Using the Search for TerminationPoint Input Windows
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes:
• the Search for Termination Point Input window that you will have the opportunity
to use in different contexts.
• the procedures to perform when using this window.
Contents
Search for Termination Point Input Window 3-32
Using the Search for Termination Point Input Window 3-32
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing and Using the Search for Termination PointInput Windows
Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-31
Search for Termination Point Input Window
With this window, you can search for TP (Termination Points) which characteristics
match with search criteria. These search criteria are grouped within the TP Search
Criteria area.
Selection and display areas are named:
• Equipment (top left side),
• Termination Points (top right side).
Using the Search for Termination Point Input Window
Purpose
Use this procedure to learn how to use the Search to Termination Point Input window
How to use the Search for Termination Point input window
From the Equipment area:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Expand or collapse the tree structure of your configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select a displayed entity.
Attention: Board History list box is inhibited.
From the TP Search Criteria area:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or several search criteria.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Search.
From the Termination Point area:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 See the displayed TP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If necessary, select relevant TP.
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing and Using the Search for Termination PointInput Windows
Search for Termination Point Input Window...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-32 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If necessary, use the following buttons to display specific information:
• Show Mon: to show monitored TP.
• Show PM: to show TP with started performance monitoring.
Attention: Show CC State is not applicable.
Search Criteria
The following table describes the search criteria you can use to search for TP.
Attention: search criteria availability are dependant on the context of use.
Table 3-11 Search Criteria Parameters
Search
Criteria
Description Possible Values
Class Lists all the TP types that you can select. List of TP types
Connection
State
This search criteria is not applicable. -
Alarm State Lists all the alarm severity levels that you can use:
• to select corresponding TP
• to search non alarmed TP.
• Non Alarmed
• Indeterminate
• Warning
• Minor
• Major
• Critical
Assign State This search criteria is not applicable. -
Perf Monitoring Enables to select:
• all TP whatever the performance monitoring is.
• TP with Performance Monitoring
• TP without Performance monitoring
• Ignore
• Any
• None
Monitoring
Objects
Enables to select all TP whether monitorable or not• Ignore
• Any
• None
Location This search criteria is not applicable. -
Name This search criteria is not applicable. -
ASAP value Enables to search TP having alarm severity profiles
assigned.
If used this search criteria inhibits all the other
profiles except Class.
List of alarm severity
profiles
Operation Graphical User Interface Describing and Using the Search for Termination PointInput Windows
Using the Search for Termination Point Input Window...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3-33
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 41626 LM Management
Start Up
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures to perform when you want to start up with 1626
LM management.
Starting up with 1626 LM management requires:
1. To start the Craft Terminal application,
2. To start the 1626 LM supervision,
3. To start the 1626 LM GUI (Graphical User Interface),
4. To manage the access state.
Contents
Starting Up with 1626 LMManagement 4-2
Starting the Craft Terminal Application 4-3
Starting the 1626 LM Supervision 4-4
Starting the 1626 LM GUI 4-5
Managing the Access State 4-6
Access State Icon Status 4-7
Setting the Access State to the Craft Terminal Application 4-8
Setting the Access State to the 1353 �M 4-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
4-1
Starting Up with 1626 LM Management
Overview
Purpose
This topic covers the following subjects:
• How to start the Craft terminal application,
• How to start the 1626 LM supervision,
• How to start the operation and maintenance GUI (Graphical User Interface).
Contents
Starting the Craft Terminal Application 4-3
Starting the 1626 LM Supervision 4-4
Starting the 1626 LM GUI 4-5
1626 LM Management Start Up Starting Up with 1626 LM ManagementOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Starting the Craft Terminal Application
Purpose
Use this procedure to start the Craft Terminal application.
Before you begin
• All the required software environment must be installed,
• The serial cable must be connected between the Craft Terminal PC and the 1626 LM.
How to start the Craft Terminal application
To start the Craft Terminal application, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Windows task bar, select Start>Alcatel>CTK vx.x.x>Alcatel 1320CT.
Result:The Alcatel Lower Layers Manager window is displayed.
A red triangle rotates indicating the initialization is on going.
If the red triangle stops and a cross displays, you must control the connection of theserial cable between the Craft Terminal and the 1626 LM.
If necessary reconnect the serial cable correctly.
The Network Element Synthesis window is displayed.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626 LM Management Start Up Starting Up with 1626 LM ManagementStarting the Craft Terminal Application
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
4-3
Starting the 1626 LM Supervision
Purpose
Use this procedure to start the 1626 LM supervision.
Before you begin
The Network Element Synthesis window is displayed.
How to start the 1626 LM supervision
To start the 1626 LM supervision, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Map tab, select the 1626 LM to supervise.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Supervision>Start.
Result:The supervision of the selected 1626 LM starts.
The 1626 LM icon changes.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626 LM Management Start Up Starting Up with 1626 LM ManagementStarting the 1626 LM Supervision
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Starting the 1626 LM GUI
Purpose
Use this procedure to start the 1626 LM GUI.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM supervision is started.
How to start the 1626 LM GUI
To start the 1626 LM GUI, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Map window, select the 1626 LM to manage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Supervision>Show Equipment.
Result:The login window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter your user name and password.
Important! The login entry is case-sensitive.
Result:The entry window of the 1626 LM GUI appears.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626 LM Management Start Up Starting Up with 1626 LM ManagementStarting the 1626 LM GUI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
4-5
Managing the Access State
Overview
Purpose
You can manage the 1626 LM remotely from a 1353 �M or locally from a PC equipped
with the Craft Terminal application.
Depending on whether you want to manage the 1626 LM remotely or locally, you must
set the Access State to specific status.
In normal operation, the 1353 �M is the default manager. If you want to grant
management rights to the Craft Terminal application, you must enable this change from
the 1353 �M.
Contents
Access State Icon Status 4-7
Setting the Access State to the Craft Terminal Application 4-8
Setting the Access State to the 1353 �M 4-9
1626 LM Management Start Up Managing the Access StateOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Access State Icon Status
Table 4-1, “Access State Icon Status” (p. 4-7)describes the different status of the Access
State icon.
Table 4-1 Access State Icon Status
Access State icon Status Description
Granted The Craft Terminal application has the required
rights to manage the 1626 LM.
Denied The 1353 �M manages the 1626 LM.
The Craft Terminal application cannot manage the
1626 LM, but can access it for read only.
Requested The Craft Terminal application is waiting for
management rights from the 1353 �M. In the
meantime, the 1353 �M continues to support:
• Alarm handling
• Performance processing on TP
• Local Access management
�ote: In any case, the 1353 �M continues to support:
• Alarm handling
• Performance processing on TP
• Local Access management
1626 LM Management Start Up Managing the Access StateAccess State Icon Status
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
4-7
Setting the Access State to the Craft Terminal Application
Purpose
Use this procedure to set the Access State to the Craft Terminal application.
Before you begin
• From the 1353 �M, you have assigned LCA status to the 1626 Access State.
• On the Craft Terminal application, the Access Status is Denied.
How to set the Access State to the Craft Terminal application
To set the Access State to the Craft Terminal application, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Supervision > Access State > Requested.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Yes.
Result:On the Craft Terminal application, the Access State changes from Denied to
Granted
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626 LM Management Start Up Managing the Access StateSetting the Access State to the Craft Terminal Application
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Setting the Access State to the 1353 NM
Purpose
Use this procedure to set the Access State to the 1353 �M.
Before you begin
On the Craft Terminal application, the Access State must be Granted.
How to set the Access State to the 1353 NM
To set the Access State to the 1353 �M, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Supervision > Access State > OS...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Yes.
Result:On the Craft Terminal application, the Access State changes from Granted to
Denied.
On the 1353 �M, the Access State changes from LCA to Denied.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626 LM Management Start Up Managing the Access StateSetting the Access State to the 1353 NM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
4-9
5 5Software Download
Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures to follow when you want to download and activate
a software package.
Contents
Downloading a Software Package 5-2
Activating a Software Package 5-4
Displaying Software Package Information 5-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
5-1
Downloading a Software Package
Purpose
Use this procedure to download a software package.
Before you begin
• You must know the name of the software package to be downloaded.
• You must know where the software package is stored.
• You must have backuped your configuration before starting a download.
How to download a software package
To download a software package, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Download>Init download...
Result:The Software download initiate window appears.
If stored locally, the software package list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If necessary, do the following:
1. In the Server filter field, enter the download server name.
2. In the Package filter field, enter the software package name to download.
3. Click Apply Filter(s).
Result:The available software package list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the list, select the software package to download.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If appropriate, tick Forced to force the download to start from the beginning.
COMME�T: This is specifically appropriate if you restart a download after a crash.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
Result:A confirmation dialog box appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click OK.
Result:The Software Download in Progress (SWDL) window appears.
A download progress bar displays the download percentage of completion.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If necessary, click Abort to stop the download.
Software Download Management Downloading a Software Package
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click Close to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Download Management Downloading a Software Package
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
5-3
Activating a Software Package
Use this procedure to activate a software package.
Before you begin
The required software package must be downloaded on the 1626 LM.
How to activate a software package
To activate a software package, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Download>Units info...
Result:The Software packages information window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the tab related to the software package to activate.
Result:The Current state must be Standby.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the corresponding list box, select Activate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK to finish.
Result:An error message is displayed to inform that the communication links are
interrupted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Close all the current 1626 LM windows.
Result:The 1626 LM performs an automatic reboot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 After 1626 LM reboot, do the following:
1. Restart the supervision.
2. Select Supervision>Show Equipment.
Result:The 1626 LM GUI starts.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Download Management Activating a Software Package
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Displaying Software Package Information
Purpose
Use this procedure to display software package information.
Before you begin
The software package must be downloaded on the 1626 LM.
How to display software package information
To display software package information, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Download>Units info...
Result:Tabs display information related to downloaded software packages
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the relevant tab and click Sw units Det.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click + or - to expand or collapse information details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Close to return to the list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Download Management Displaying Software Package Information
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
5-5
6 6Communication
Configuration
Overview
Purpose
Communication configuration consists in setting up all the necessary network addresses
and elements to enable the communication between the 1626 LM and the other network
elements. This chapter describes the procedures to perform when you want to declare the
required addresses and protocols to enable the 1626 LM to communicate with other
network elements or with network manager.
Contents
Communication and Routing Management Parameters 6-2
Common �etwork Concepts 6-3
Local Area Addressing Parameters 6-4
Time Synchronization Parameters 6-6
Ethernet Interface Parameters 6-7
IP Static Routes Parameters 6-9
LAPD Parameters 6-10
IP Tunnel Parameter 6-11
Managing Communication and Routing 6-12
Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters 6-13
Setting Up the �etwork Manager Address Associated to the 1626 LM 6-14
Identifying a �etwork Element as a �TP Server 6-15
Disabling A�TP from the 1626 LM 6-16
Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 �M values 6-17
Configuring the Ethernet Interface 6-18
Configuring IP Static Routes 6-19
Configuring LAPD 6-21
Managing OSI over IP 6-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
6-1
Communication and Routing ManagementParameters
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the communication and routing parameters that you will have to
manage at 1626 LM commissioning.
Contents
Common �etwork Concepts 6-3
Local Area Addressing Parameters 6-4
Time Synchronization Parameters 6-6
Ethernet Interface Parameters 6-7
IP Static Routes Parameters 6-9
LAPD Parameters 6-10
IP Tunnel Parameter 6-11
Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Common Network Concepts
OSI
1626 LM communication is driven by the OSI reference model (Open System
Interconnection).
OSI is a network architecture model which relies, from top to bottom, on the 7 following
layers:
• Layer 7: Application
• Layer 6: Presentation
• Layer 5: Session
• Layer 4: Transport
• Layer 3: �etwork
• Layer 2: Data
• Layer 1: Physical
Each layer hosts one or several functions that provides/receives services to/from other
functions hosted by the immediate layer above or below. Communication from one layer
to another is done through selectors.
Selectors
A selector is a string which identifies a communication interface between two layers of
the OSI model.
In a 1626 LM configuration context, you need to manage following selectors:
• Presentation selector (P Sel)
• Session selector (S Sel)
• Transport selector (T Sel)
• �etwork selector (� Sel)
Areas, Routing and System Type
At design stage, a network is divided into domains and sub-domains also called areas.
Areas hosts network elements. When a network element supports the routing function, it
is qualified as an IS (Intermediate System).
• When routing occurs between IS of the same area, they are called Level 1 IS.
• When routing occurs between IS of different areas, they are called Level 2 IS.
An IS may operate at level 1, level 2 or level 1 and level 2.
When an IS does not host the routing function, they are qualified as End Systems in the
sense that they can only send or receive data.
Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersCommon Network Concepts
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
6-3
NSAP and Synonymous Area Addresses
The �SAP (�etwork Service Access Point) address identifies a network element in a
given OSI area. A network element may have two different addresses depending on the
area it is viewed from. In this case the network element is assigned with multiple
synonymous area addresses.
In a 1626 LM configuration context, you need to complete the 3 following blocks:
• AFI (Authority and Format Identifier)
AFI specifies the type and the format of the network address. AFI possible values are
given in NSAP Address Section in Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area Addressing
Parameters” (p. 6-4).
• Non labelled block
A string made of a header and the network area (4 last digits).
The header is driven by the AFI.
The combination of AFI and header part is always the same for all network elements
of a given WDM area.
• System Id: according to the case, identifies a 1626 LM or a network manager (ie:
1353 �M).
• Nsel: identifies a user of a network service (layer 3).
Local Area Addressing Parameters
Good to Know
“Common �etwork Concepts” (p. 6-3)
Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-4) describes the local area
address parameters.
Table 6-1 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters
Parameters
Possible
Values Description
Local Address Section
P Sel 0002 Presentation Selector
S Selector 00 Session Selector
T Sel 00 Transport Selector
NSAP Address Section
Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersCommon Network Concepts
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 6-1 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters (continued)
Parameters
Possible
Values Description
AFI 39 Authority and Format Identifier value for ISO-DCC
format
�SAP address length must be 40 characters
47 Authority and Format Identifier value for
GOSIP-V2 format
�SAP address length must be 40 characters
49 Authority and Format Identifier value for local
format
16 <= �SAP address length <= 40 characters
Non labelled block Driven by
AFI
If AFI = 39 or 47, Length must be 24 characters
If AFI = 49, Length = 24 characters maximum
System Id Value made
of 12
hexadeci-
mal
characters
A unique identifier of a node in a network area. By
default, it is set to the node or network manager
MAC address. Depending on the context, can be:
• 1626 LM id
• Main network manager id
• Spare network manager id
Once set, the System Id is definitively assigned.
N Sel 1D
(Default)
Identifies a user of a network service (layer 3).
In this context, the default value identifies the
transport layer.
Synonymous Area Address Section
Optional. If completed, System Id and N Sel must be identical to mandatory �SAp address.
System Type Section
Intermediate system
level
L1
(Default)
The network element acts as a level 1 IS
(intermediate system).
It is strongly recommended to keep L1 default
value.
L2 The network element acts as a level 2 IS
(intermediate system).
End System The network element acts as an end system.
See Also
• “Common �etwork Concepts” (p. 6-3)
• “Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-13)
• “Setting Up the �etwork Manager Address Associated to the 1626 LM” (p. 6-14)
Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersLocal Area Addressing Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
6-5
Time Synchronization Parameters
�TP (�etwork Time Protocol) is used for date and time synchronization among network
elements. In an Alcatel-Lucent network it is A�TP (Alcatel �TP) which is implemented
for date and time synchronization.
When A�TP is enabled, you then need to identify what network element is the �TP
server to enable the 1626 LM to synchronize with. The �TP server can be a specific
network element or a network manager like the 1353 �M.
�ote: For high availability reasons, you may decide to have a redundant �TP server.
In this case, you will have a main �TP server and a spare �TP server.
If A�TP is not enabled, you can force the 1626 LM to take the date and time of the
network manager.
Table 6-2, “�TP Server �etwork Address Parameters” (p. 6-6) describes �TP server
network address parameters.
Table 6-2 NTP Server Network Address Parameters
Parameters
Possible
Values Description
NSAP Address Section
AFI 39 Authority and Format Identifier value for
ISO-DCC format
Length must be 40 characters
47 Authority and Format Identifier value for
GOSIP-V2 format
Length must be 40 characters
49 Authority and Format Identifier value for local
format
16 <= Length <= 40 characters
IDI Driven by
AFI
If AFI = 39 or 47, Length must be 24 characters
If AFI = 49, Length = 24 characters maximum
System Id Value made
of 12
hexadeci-
mal
characters
A unique identifier of a node in a network area. By
default, it is set to the node or network manager
MAC address. Depending on the context, can be:
• 1626 LM id
• Main network manager id
• Spare network manager id
Once set, the System Id is definitively assigned.
NSel 7B
(Default)
Identifies a user of a network service (layer 3).
In this context, the default value identifies the time
synchronization application.
Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersTime Synchronization Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
See Also
• “Identifying a �etwork Element as a �TP Server” (p. 6-15)
• “Disabling A�TP from the 1626 LM” (p. 6-16)
• “Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 �M values” (p. 6-17)
Ethernet Interface Parameters
In the 1626 LM context, the Ethernet interface is supported by the RJ45 connector n°2 of
the ESCT2000 board.
You need to configure this interface only if your 1626 LM has to connect with an
Ethernet network. Otherwise this task is not mandatory.
Table 6-3, “Ethernet Interface Parameters” (p. 6-7) describes Ethernet interface
parameters.
Table 6-3 Ethernet Interface Parameters
Parameters Possible
Values
Description
Ethernet Interface Section
Yes Enables an Ethernet port.
No Disables an Ethernet port.
MAC Address Section
Displays the MAC address of the Ethernet port of the ESCT2000 board.
Synonymous Section
Optional. If completed, must be identical to �SAP address.
Network Protocol Section
OSI (Default) Indicates the type of network supported by the Ethernet
port.
In case of an OSI network, Ethernet port is automatically
detected by an IS-IS (Intermediate System-to-
Intermediate System) router.
It is recommended to keep OSI as the default value.
IP
OSI and IP
OSI Section Section
L2 Only Yes The Ethernet port acts as a Level 2 IS-IS router only.
No The Ethernet port acts as a Level 1 and 2 IS-IS router.
L1 & L2 Default
Metric
1 to 63
Default: 12
A value which is assigned to a link between 2 adjacent
routers. In the 1626 LM context, all the links have the
same default metric.
In case of optimization, the rule is: the lowest Default
Metric, the highest bandwidth.
Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersTime Synchronization Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
6-7
Table 6-3 Ethernet Interface Parameters (continued)
Parameters Possible
Values
Description
L1 & L2 Priority 0 to 127
Default: 1
Allocates a priority to a router. The router which has the
highest priority becomes the designated router.
Allocate a low priority to avoid the Ethernet port to
become a designated router.
With value 0, you are sure that the Ethernet port will
never be a designated router.
IP Section Section
The configuration of this section is not mandatory if you do not need to rely on an IP network
to access the network manager.
You must configure IP addressing parameters if:
• You select IP or OSI and IP radio buttons in the Network Protocol section.
• you want to rely on an IP tunnel to reach the network manager via an IP subnetwork.
IP Address x.x.x.x
4 position
numerical
characters
x= 0 to 255
Unique address that identifies a sender or a receiver of
packets in an IP �etwork.
IP Mask x.x.x.x
4 position
numerical
characters
x= 0 to 255
The address used to divide the IP address into subnets.
IP Routing
Protocols
IS-IS Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System protocol
OSPF Open Shortest Path First protocol
(�ot applicable for this current release)
RIP Routing Information Protocol
(�ot applicable for this current release)
None -
Associated OSPF Section (�ot applicable for this current release)
See Also
“Configuring the Ethernet Interface” (p. 6-18)
Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersEthernet Interface Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
IP Static Routes Parameters
Good to Know
• Table 6-4, “IP Routing Parameters” (p. 6-9) describes the IP routing parameters.
• You need to complete these parameters only for IP Tunnel configuration in case of
OSI tranport over IP.
Table 6-4 IP Routing Parameters
Parameters Possible Values Description
Destination Section (Enabled if check box is ticked)
x.x.x.x
4 position
numerical
characters
x= 0 to 255
Unique address that identifies the network element that
the 1626 LM must reach via IP.
Destination Network Section (Enabled if check box is ticked)
IP Address x.x.x.x
4 position
numerical
characters
x= 0 to 255
Unique address that identifies the destination network.
IP Mask x.x.x.x
4 position
numerical
characters
x= 0 to 255
The address used to divide the destination network into
subnets.
Default
Gateway IP
Address
x.x.x.x
4 position
numerical
characters
x= 0 to 255
IPAddress of the equipment enabling the inter-LA�
communication.
Enabled if check box is checked.
CLNP Tunnel �ot applicable for this current release.
IP Point to Point
Interface Id
�ot applicable for this current release.
Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersIP Static Routes Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
6-9
See Also
“Configuring IP Static Routes” (p. 6-19)
LAPD Parameters
LAPD (Link Access Protocol - channel D) is a point-to-point protocol that can be
activated if you decide to transport the supervision via the optical fiber rather than the
TM� (Telecommunication Management �etwork).
As LAPD is a point-to-point protocol, each end-point has a specific role. If one end-point
is declared User, the other end-point is Network.
Table 6-5, “LAPD Parameters” (p. 6-10) describes LAPD parameters.
Table 6-5 LAPD Parameters
Parameters Possible
Values
Description
LAPD Creation (Point to Point creation under OTS)
OTS Instance List of OTS
blocks attached
to an OSCU
board.
Each item of the list corresponds to an OSCU port.
You can activate LAPD on 2 OSCU ports maximum.
LAPD Role Network The role of one of the two LAPD end-points.
If one end-point is declared as being Network, the other
must be User.
User The role of one of the two LAPD end-points.
If one end-point is declared as being Network, the other
must be User.
OSC Byte
Configuration• D1 - D3
• D4 - D12
The bytes which transport the supervision signal within
the supervision frame.
• D1-D3 bytes are typically used for supervision
transport between adjacent nodes (regeneration
section). Rate is 192 Kbps.
These bytes are configured for any type of nodes.
• D4-D12 bytes are typically used for supervision
transport between nodes which terminate
multiplexing section. Rate is 576 Kbps.
These bytes are configured only for Line Terminals
and xOADM nodes.
Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersIP Static Routes Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
See Also
“Configuring LAPD” (p. 6-21)
IP Tunnel Parameter
IP tunnel is required when you want to reach the network manager via an IP subnetwork.
The following table describes the IP tunnel parameter.
Parameter Possible Value Description
IP Tunnel
Address
x.x.x.x
4 position
numerical
characters
x= 0 to 255
IP address of the remote machine where IP
communication terminates.
Depending on your network design, can be the
network manager or a router.
Note 1: The IP tunnel becomes effective when you
have set �E IP address at network manager or at
relevant router. Once these two addresses assigned,
the IP tunnel is considered as a Point-To-Point link
by the IS-IS router.
Note 2: If you want to have a spare IP tunnel, click
New to enable a new tab where you can set a new IP
tunnel address.
See Also
“Managing OSI over IP” (p. 6-23)
Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersLAPD Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
6-11
Managing Communication and Routing
Overview
Purpose
This section describes all the required procedures to be performed when you want to set
or to update 1626 LM communication and routing parameters.
Contents
Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters 6-13
Setting Up the �etwork Manager Address Associated to the 1626 LM 6-14
Identifying a �etwork Element as a �TP Server 6-15
Disabling A�TP from the 1626 LM 6-16
Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 �M values 6-17
Configuring the Ethernet Interface 6-18
Configuring IP Static Routes 6-19
Configuring LAPD 6-21
Managing OSI over IP 6-23
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-12 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare the 1626 LM network addresses.
Before you begin
• You must know all the network identifiers of the 1626 LM,
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to set up the 1626 LM Network address
To set up 1626 LM network addresses, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>Local Configuration menu.
Result:The Local Address area window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area
Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK to finish.
See Also
• Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-4)
• “Common �etwork Concepts” (p. 6-3)
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingSetting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
6-13
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Setting Up the Network Manager Address Associated to the1626 LM
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare the network manager address which supervise the 1626 LM.
Good to Know
“Common �etwork Concepts” (p. 6-3)
Before you begin
• You must know all the network identifiers of the network manager,
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to set up the Network Manager Address associated to the 1626 LM
To set up the network manager address associated to the 1626 LM, perform the following
steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>OS Configuration menu.
Result:The OS Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area
Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-4)for the Main OS Address area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK to finish.
See Also
Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-4)
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingSetting Up the Network Manager Address Associated to
the 1626 LM...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-14 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identifying a Network Element as a NTP Server
Purpose
Use this procedure to identify a �etwork Element as a �TP server.
Before you begin
• You must know all the network identifiers of the selected network element.
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to identify a Network Element as a NTP Server
To identify a �etwork Element as a �TP server, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>NTP Server Configuration.
Result:The �TP Server Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Enabling NTP protocol area, click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-2, “�TP Server �etwork
Address Parameters” (p. 6-6) for the Main NTP server Address area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If applicable, set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-2, “�TP Server
�etwork Address Parameters” (p. 6-6) for the Spare NTP server Address area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK to finish.
See Also
“Time Synchronization Parameters” (p. 6-6)
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingIdentifying a Network Element as a NTP Server
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
6-15
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disabling ANTP from the 1626 LM
Purpose
Use this procedure to disable A�TP from the 1626 LM.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to disable ANTP from the 1626 LM
To disable A�TP from the 1626 LM, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>NTP Server Configuration.
Result:The NTP Server Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Enabling NTP protocol area, select No.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK to finish.
See Also
“Time Synchronization Parameters” (p. 6-6)
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingDisabling ANTP from the 1626 LM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-16 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 NM values
Purpose
Use this procedure to force the 1626 LM date and time with the 1353 �M values.
Before you begin
• A�TP is disabled.
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to force the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 NM values
To force the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 �M values, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>NE Time.
Result:The �E Time window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Set NE Time with OS Time area, click Set.
Result:The 1626 LM local clock takes the 1353 �M date and time values as
references.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Close to finish.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In case of multirack configuration, restart the 1626 LM.
�ote: The restart guarantees a complete synchronization across the racks.
See Also
“Time Synchronization Parameters” (p. 6-6)
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingForcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 NM values
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
6-17
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring the Ethernet Interface
Purpose
Use this procedure to assign the required values to the Ethernet parameters
Before you begin
• The ESCT2000 board must be plugged in the master rack and configured.
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to configure the Ethernet Interface
To configure the Ethernet interface, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>Interfaces Configuration>Ethernet
Configuration.
Result:The Ethernet Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Ethernet Interface area, click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-3, “Ethernet Interface
Parameters” (p. 6-7).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Apply to validate the configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Close to finish.
Result:The 1626 LM restarts automatically.
�ote: If you have configured the IP addressing parameters, you must configure the IP
static routing parameters.
See Also
• Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-4)
• Table 6-3, “Ethernet Interface Parameters” (p. 6-7)
• “Configuring IP Static Routes” (p. 6-19)
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingConfiguring the Ethernet Interface
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-18 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring IP Static Routes
Purpose
You must perform this procedure if:
• OSI over IP is implemented,
• �etwork manager is not located into the same area as you �E.
Before you begin
Check that:
• OSI over IP is implemented.
• �etwork manager is not located into the same area as you �E.
• You have configured the IP addressing parameters of the ESCT2000 board.
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to configure IP Static Routes
To configure IP static routes, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>IP Configuration>IP Static Routing Configuration.
Result:The IP Static Routing Configuration window is displayed
• To create a new IP static route, go to Step 2.
• To modify an existing IP static route, go to Step 3.
• To delete an existing IP static route, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To create a new IP static route, click New and perform the following steps:
1. Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-4, “IP Routing Parameters”
(p. 6-9).
2. Click Apply to validate the configuration.
3. Restart the 1626 LM to take into account the new configuration.
4. Go to Step 5 in “How to configure the Ethernet Interface” (p. 6-18).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To modify an existing IP static route, select the relevant tab and perform the following
steps:
1. Set the new values to the required parameters as described in Table 6-4, “IP Routing
Parameters” (p. 6-9).
2. Click Apply to validate the configuration.
3. Restart the 1626 LM to take into account the new configuration.
4. Go to Step 5 in “How to configure the Ethernet Interface” (p. 6-18).
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingConfiguring IP Static Routes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
6-19
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To delete an existing IP static route, select the relevant tab and perform the following
steps:
1. click Delete.
2. Restart the 1626 LM to take into account the new configuration.
See Also
• Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-4)
• Table 6-3, “Ethernet Interface Parameters” (p. 6-7)
• Table 6-4, “IP Routing Parameters” (p. 6-9)
• “Configuring IP Static Routes” (p. 6-19)
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingConfiguring IP Static Routes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-20 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring LAPD
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure LAPD on your 1626 LM.
Before you begin
OSCU board is declared and cabled.
How to configure LAPD
To configure LAPD, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Comm/Routing>Interface Configuration>LAPD Configuration.
Result:The LAPD Configuration window is displayed.
• To create LAPD for a new OTS or OTU point, go to step 2).
• To modify LAPD configuration for an existing OTS, go to step 3).
• To delete LAPD configuration from an existing OTS, go to step 4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To create LAPD for a new OTS or OTU point, perform the following steps:
1. In the LAPD Creation area, click an OTS point reference.
2. Click the relevant LAPD role for this OTS point.
3. In the OSC byte Configuration list, click on the relevant transport bytes identification.
4. Click Create.
5. The LAPD configuration information is displayed in LAPD Configuration area.
6. End of configuration. Go to Step 5 in “How to configure the Ethernet Interface”
(p. 6-18).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To modify LAPD configuration for an existing OTS point, perform the following steps:
• In the LAPD Configuration area, click an OTS point reference.
The Modify button is activated.
• In the LAPD Role area, click the relevant LAPD role for this OTS point.
• Click Modify.
• End of modification. Go to Step 5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To delete LAPD configuration from an existing OTS point, perform the following steps:
1. In the LAPD Configuration area, click an OTS point reference.
The Delete button is activated.
2. Click Delete.
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingConfiguring LAPD
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
6-21
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
“LAPD Parameters” (p. 6-10)
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingConfiguring LAPD
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-22 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Managing OSI over IP
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to create or delete an IP tunnels which transport OSI
packets via an IP tunnel.
Before you begin
You must have previously configured:
• the �E IP address
• the Ethernet interface with OSI and IP enabled
• at least one static route
How to create an IP tunnel
To create IP tunnels, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Comm/Routing>Tunneling Configuration>OSI over IP.
Result:The OSI over IP Tunneling Configuration window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If necessary, click New to create a new IP tunnel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the IP address of the remote machine where IP communication terminates.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If necessary, repeat from Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Close to finish.
See Also
• “IP Tunnel Parameter” (p. 6-11)
• “Configuring the Ethernet Interface” (p. 6-18)
• “Configuring IP Static Routes” (p. 6-19)
• “Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-13)
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingManaging OSI over IP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
6-23
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to delete an IP tunnel
To delete an IP tunnel, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the relevant tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Close to finish.
See Also
“IP Tunnel Parameter” (p. 6-11)
Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingManaging OSI over IP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-24 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 7Database Backup and
Restore
Overview
Purpose
The MIB (Management Information Base) is the database which stores all the
configuration information and processes to be executed by the 1626 LM.
The MIB is the database that you must save on a regular basis.
This chapter describes the procedures to follow when you want to:
• backup and restore the MIB,
• manage the MIB files.
Contents
When to Backup and Restore ? 7-2
When to Backup? 7-2
When to Restore? 7-2
Managing the MIB 7-3
Backing Up the MIB 7-4
Restoring the MIB 7-5
Deleting the MIB 7-7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
7-1
When to Backup and Restore ?
When to Backup?
Backup creation is basically performed after the following events:
• installation,
• version change.
Installation
Installation corresponds to the initial introduction of programs and configuration data in
the 1626 LM.
Version Change
Version change corresponds to a change of software providing new services compared to
the previous version.
Operation Context
In your daily operation context and according to your data security standards, you should
plan to backup the MIB on a regular basis. Choose the time which will have the lowest
impact on the traffic. With this type of backup, you can restore your configuration with
the minimum loss of data.
See Also
“Backing Up the MIB” (p. 7-4)
When to Restore?
Backup restoration consists of restoring a MIB from a backup file.
The following lists the main restoration cases:
• Replacement of an ESCT board,
• Return to a previous operation configuration,
AMIB restore must be performed only if there is serious software and/or hardware
problems and if normal troubleshooting actions have not solved the problem.
See Also
“Restoring the MIB” (p. 7-5)
Database Backup and Restore When to Backup and Restore ?When to Backup?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Managing the MIB
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the MIB management procedures:
Contents
Backing Up the MIB 7-4
Restoring the MIB 7-5
Deleting the MIB 7-7
Database Backup and Restore Managing the MIBOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
7-3
Backing Up the MIB
Purpose
Use the procedure to back up the MIB.
Before you begin
1626 LM GUI is started.
How to backup the MIB
To backup the MIB, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Download>MIB management.
Result:The �E MIB management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In Backup name field, enter a name for your MIB backup.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Backup.
Result:A confirmation dialog box appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK.
Result:The backup starts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
Result:The backup process continues.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Wait until the successful backup message is displayed and click Cancel.
Result:The NE MIB management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 In the Backup name field, the name of the recent MIB backup file is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click Close to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Database Backup and Restore Managing the MIBBacking Up the MIB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Restoring the MIB
Purpose
Use this procedure to restore the MIB.
Before you begin
• Read the Database and Local Configuration Maintenance chapter of the 1626 LM
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing Guide to know in what context the MIB
restoration takes place.
• 1626 LM GUI is started.
• LAPD must be deactivated.
How to restore the MIB
To restore the MIB, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Download>MIB management.
Result:The NE MIB management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Available Backups on local server list, select the relevant backup file to
restore.
Result: In the Backup name field, the name of the selected MIB backup file is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Restore.
Result:A confirmation dialog box appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK.
Result:The restoration starts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
Result:The restoration process continues.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Wait until the successful message is displayed and click Cancel.
Result:The NE MIB management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select the MIB to restore and click Activate.
Database Backup and Restore Managing the MIBRestoring the MIB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
7-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click OK to confirm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Wait until the successful restoration message is displayed and click Cancel.
Result:The NE MIB management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click Close to finish.
�ote:After activation, the 1626 LM performs an automatic reboot.
Database Backup and Restore Managing the MIBRestoring the MIB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deleting the MIB
Purpose
Use this procedure to delete the MIB.
Before you begin
�one.
How to delete the MIB
To delete the MIB, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Download>MIB management.
Result:The NE MIB management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Available Backups on local server list, select the relevant backup file to delete.
Result: In the Backup name field, the name of the selected MIB backup file is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Delete.
Result:A confirmation dialog box appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK.
Result:The deletion starts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Wait until the successful deletion message is displayed and click Cancel.
Result:The �E MIB management appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Close to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Database Backup and Restore Managing the MIBDeleting the MIB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
7-7
8 8Racks and Subracks
Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains:
• how to display 1626 LM racks and subracks,
• how to manage the declaration of 1626 LM racks and subracks.
Contents
Displaying Hardware Views 8-2
Displaying the General Overview of the 1626 LM Hardware 8-3
Displaying the Rack View 8-4
Displaying the Subrack View 8-5
Displaying the Board View 8-6
Managing Racks 8-7
Declaring a Rack 8-8
Setting a Rack In Service 8-10
Setting a Rack Out Of Service 8-11
Undeclaring/Removing a Rack 8-12
Managing Subracks 8-13
Declaring a Subrack 8-14
Setting a Subrack In Service 8-15
Setting a Subrack Out Of Service 8-16
Undeclaring/Removing a Subrack 8-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
8-1
Displaying Hardware Views
Overview
Purpose
This topic explains how to display the different graphical representation of the 1626 LM
hardware.
Contents
Displaying the General Overview of the 1626 LM Hardware 8-3
Displaying the Rack View 8-4
Displaying the Subrack View 8-5
Displaying the Board View 8-6
Racks and Subracks Management Displaying Hardware ViewsOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Displaying the General Overview of the 1626 LM Hardware
Purpose
Use this procedure to display the general overview of the 1626 LM hardware.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to display the general overview of the 1626 LM hardware
To display the general overview of the 1626 LM hardware, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Views>Show Equipment.
Result:
• The Equipment View window is displayed.
• The master rack and possible associated secondary rack are displayed.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Racks and Subracks Management Displaying Hardware ViewsDisplaying the General Overview of the 1626 LM
Hardware...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
8-3
Displaying the Rack View
Purpose
Use this procedure to display the 1626 LM rack view.
Before you begin
The Equipment View window is displayed.
How to display the rack view
To display the rack view, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Double click on a rack.
Result:
• The rack view appears and displays the associated subracks.
• The associated subracks can be configured or empty.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Racks and Subracks Management Displaying Hardware ViewsDisplaying the Rack View
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Displaying the Subrack View
Purpose
Use this procedure to display the 1626 LM subrack view.
Before you begin
The Rack View window is displayed.
How display the subrack view
To display the subrack view, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Double click on a subrack.
Result:The subrack view appears and displays the associated boards and empty slots.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Racks and Subracks Management Displaying Hardware ViewsDisplaying the Subrack View
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
8-5
Displaying the Board View
Purpose
Use this procedure to display the details of a selected board.
Before you begin
The Subrack View window is displayed.
How to display the board view
To display the board view, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Double click on a board.
Result:The board view appears and displays the following:
• board administrative state,
• board alarms,
• depending on the board type:
– specific configuration information,
– XFP (eXtended Form Factor Pluggable) or SFP (Small Form Factor Pluggable)
modules,
– ports with status In Service.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Racks and Subracks Management Displaying Hardware ViewsDisplaying the Board View
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Managing Racks
Overview
Purpose
This topic explains how to manage rack declaration.
Contents
Declaring a Rack 8-8
Setting a Rack In Service 8-10
Setting a Rack Out Of Service 8-11
Undeclaring/Removing a Rack 8-12
Racks and Subracks Management Managing RacksOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
8-7
Declaring a Rack
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare a new rack.
Before you begin
• The Rack View window is displayed,
• The rack slot is empty.
Good to Know
To declare a compact rack for first time, you need to:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Declare a generic rack as described in the procedure below.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set the rack out of service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Undeclare/remove the rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform the compact rack declaration as described in the procedure below.
How to declare a rack
To declare a rack, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click an empty rack slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of available rack types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, select the rack type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
Racks and Subracks Management Managing RacksDeclaring a Rack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In the dialog box, click OK.
Result:
• The rack representation appears.
• The rack operational status is In Service.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Racks and Subracks Management Managing RacksDeclaring a Rack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
8-9
Setting a Rack In Service
Purpose
Use this procedure to set a rack in service.
Before you begin
• The Rack View window is displayed.
• The rack operational status is Out of Service.
How to set a rack in service
To set a rack in service, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set in Service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the dialog box click OK.
Result:The rack operational status becomes In Service.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Racks and Subracks Management Managing RacksSetting a Rack In Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Setting a Rack Out Of Service
Purpose
Use this procedure to set a rack out of service.
Before you begin
• The Rack View window is displayed.
• The rack operational status is In Service.
How to set a rack out of service
To set a rack out of service, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set out of Service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the dialog box click OK.
Result:The rack operational status becomes Out of Service.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Racks and Subracks Management Managing RacksSetting a Rack Out Of Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
8-11
Undeclaring/Removing a Rack
Purpose
Use this procedure to undeclare a rack.
Before you begin
• The Rack View window is displayed.
• All the subracks have been undeclared/removed.
• The shelf operational status is Out of Service.
How to undeclare a rack
To undeclare a rack, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Remove.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the dialog box click OK.
Result:The rack disappears from the shelf view.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Racks and Subracks Management Managing RacksUndeclaring/Removing a Rack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-12 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Managing Subracks
Overview
Purpose
This topic explains how to manage subrack declaration.
Contents
Declaring a Subrack 8-14
Setting a Subrack In Service 8-15
Setting a Subrack Out Of Service 8-16
Undeclaring/Removing a Subrack 8-17
Racks and Subracks Management Managing SubracksOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
8-13
Declaring a Subrack
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare a new subrack.
Before you begin
The Rack View window is displayed.
How to declare a subrack
To declare a subrack, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click an empty subrack slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, select the subrack type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the dialog box, click OK.
Result:
• The subrack representation appears.
• The subrack operational status is In Service.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Racks and Subracks Management Managing SubracksDeclaring a Subrack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-14 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Setting a Subrack In Service
Purpose
Use this procedure to set a subrack in service.
Before you begin
• The Rack View window is displayed.
• The subrack operational status is Out of Service.
How to set a subrack in service
To set a subrack in service, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set in Service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the dialog box click OK.
Result:The subrack operational status becomes In Service.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Racks and Subracks Management Managing SubracksSetting a Subrack In Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
8-15
Setting a Subrack Out Of Service
Purpose
Use this procedure to set a subrack out of service.
Before you begin
• The Rack View window is displayed.
• The subrack operational status is In Service.
How to set a subrack out of service
To set a subrack out of service, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set out of Service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the dialog box click OK.
Result:The subrack operational status becomes Out of Service.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Racks and Subracks Management Managing SubracksSetting a Subrack Out Of Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-16 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Undeclaring/Removing a Subrack
Purpose
Use this procedure to undeclare a subrack.
Before you begin
• The Subrack View window is displayed.
• All the boards have been undeclared/removed.
• The subrack operational status is Out of Service.
How to undeclare a subrack
To undeclare a subrack, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Remove.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the dialog box click OK.
Result:The subrack disappears from the rack view.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Racks and Subracks Management Managing SubracksUndeclaring/Removing a Subrack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
8-17
9 9Board and SFP/XFP
Module Management
Overview
Purpose
Boards are the hardware components which host the functions delivered by the 1626 LM.
For connectivity reasons, boards can be enhanced with hot swappable optical transceivers
called SFP (Small Form Factor Pluggable) or XFP (eXtended Form Factor Pluggable)
modules.
This chapter explains how to manage boards and SFP/XFP modules.
Contents
About Board Provisioning and Configuration 9-4
About the Provisioning Process 9-4
About ETHC Configurations 9-5
About TRBD1191 Board 9-11
Declaring/Undeclaring Boards 9-12
TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features 9-13
Declaring OCPU Protection Boards 9-19
Declaring Control and Service Boards 9-20
Declaring TRBD Boards 9-22
Declaring TRBC boards 9-26
Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards 9-29
Declaring BMDX Boards 9-31
Declaring OMDX Boards 9-33
Declaring CMDX Boards 9-35
Declaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board 9-36
Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards 9-38
Declaring BOFAAmplifier Boards 9-40
Declaring Ethernet Boards 9-42
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-1
Declaring TDMX 1180 boards 9-44
Declaring OADC boards 9-46
Declaring WMA�1100 Boards 9-47
Declaring WMA� 3x74 Boards 9-49
Undeclaring/Removing Boards 9-51
Board Configuration Parameters 9-53
Board Generic Configuration Parameters 9-53
Board Specific Configuration Parameters 9-55
Laser Power Configuration Parameters 9-62
TRBx Shutdown Criteria 9-64
LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters 9-65
LOFA11xx APSD Parameters 9-68
TDMX and WMA� Configuration Parameters 9-69
Configuring Boards 9-73
Configuring ETHCWorking Mode 9-74
Managing ETHC Cross Connections 9-75
Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation 9-77
Configuring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power 9-78
Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power 9-79
Configuring WMA� Laser Power 9-80
Configuring TRBx Frequency 9-81
Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters 9-82
Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria 9-83
Configuring 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet Mapping 9-84
Configuring LOFA11xx APSD 9-85
Configuring Contradirectionality 9-86
Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board 9-87
Configuring ALCTWorking Mode 9-88
Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism 9-90
Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile 9-91
Configuring TDMX 1180 Output Power 9-92
Configuring WMA� Provisioning Parameters 9-93
Configuring WMA� 1100 Equalization Parameter 9-94
Configuring Channels on WMA� 3x74 boards 9-95
Setting Boards In/Out of Service 9-96
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Setting a Board In Service 9-97
Setting a Board Out of Service 9-98
Managing SFP/XFPModules 9-99
About SFP/XFPModules and Board Compatibility 9-100
Declaring a SFP/XFPModule 9-101
Setting a SFP/XFPModule In Service 9-102
Setting a SFP/XFPModule Out of Service 9-103
Undeclaring/Removing SFP/XFPModules 9-104
Displaying SFP/XFPModule Payload 9-105
Changing an SFP or an XFP 9-106
Activating Firmware 9-107
Firmware Activation Displayed Information 9-107
Activating Firmware 9-108
Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board Laser 9-109
Laser Control Parameters 9-109
Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser 9-111
Managing External Points 9-113
About External Points 9-113
External Points Parameters 9-115
Displaying all External Points 9-116
Managing External Input Points 9-117
Managing External Output Points 9-118
Filtering External Input Points 9-119
Filtering External Output Points 9-120
Managing LOFAUpgrade with EMPM1000 9-121
Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without
OMSP
9-122
Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with
OMSP
9-124
Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM 9-126
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-3
About Board Provisioning and Configuration
About the Provisioning Process
Board installation and declaration is necessary but not sufficient to perform a complete
provisioning process.
Important! Board declaration is not applicable when board insertion triggers an
automatic provisioning.
The following describes the step by step provisioning process:
1. Declare boards.
Important: This step is not applicable when board insertion triggers an automatic
provisioning
2. If applicable, declare SFP/XFP modules.
3. Set the connectors in service.
4. If applicable, set the board generic and/or specific parameters.
5. For each board to connect, declare cabling between the relevant connectors.
6. Update transmission.
7. If necessary, create cross connections.
8. End.
See Also
• “Declaring/Undeclaring Boards” (p. 9-12)
• “Board Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-53)
• “Configuring Boards” (p. 9-73)
• “Setting Boards In/Out of Service” (p. 9-96)
• “Managing SFP/XFPModules” (p. 9-99)
• “Activating Firmware” (p. 9-107)
• “Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board Laser” (p. 9-109)
• “Managing External Points” (p. 9-113)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management About Board Provisioning and ConfigurationAbout the Provisioning Process
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
About ETHC Configurations
ETHC Basic Concept
An ETHC board aggregates Gigabit Ethernet channels at 1 Gbps rate into optical lines at
10 Gbps rate.
It can be connected either to a TRBD1191 transponder or to an XFP module before to
connect to a Mux/Demux.
Depending on the configuration modes, the ETHC board enables:
• Up to 12 channels at 1 Gps rate on the User/Client side,
• Up to 2 optical lines at 10 Gps rate on the line to MUX side.
The following figure illustrates the basic concept of an ETHC.
The following figure illustrates an example of how an ETHC can interface with a
TRBD1191.
Figure 9-1 ETHC Basic Concept
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management About Board Provisioning and ConfigurationAbout ETHC Configurations
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-5
Figure 9-2 Example of ETHC-TRBD1191 connection
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management About Board Provisioning and ConfigurationAbout ETHC Configurations
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
ETHC Configuration Modes
Depending on your network design, you can configure the ETHC into different
configuration modes. As a consequence, you will have access to different level of
resources as explained in the following table:
If you configure the ETHC in... You can...
Concentration Mode use the following resources:
• Up to 9 User-Client channels numbered
from 51 to 59.
These numbers are automatically assigned
and cannot be changed.
• One 10 Gbps optical line labelled L13.
L13 supports 9 User-Client channels.
•
connect the ETHC to one of the following:
• a TRBD1191 board via the backplane
• an XFP module
Add & Drop Mode use the following resources:
• Up to 12 User-Client channels which
numbers can be picked up in the following
range: 100 to 999
• Two optical lines labelled L13 and L14.
Each of these two lines supports a
maximum of 9 User-Client channels.
In case of migration from Concentrator
mode to Add & Drop mode , you can:
• Keep the existing channels numbered from
51 to 59, as Add & Drop channels. For any
circumstances, you want to redesign the
way your services are handled, you may
need to delete these existing cross
connections and to create new ones.
• Implement the new channels by picking
the channel numbers from the range: 100
to 999.
ATTENTION:You cannot change your
configuration fromAdd & Drop mode to
Concentration mode.
The following figures illustrate the ETHC concept in the context of the different
configuration modes.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management About Board Provisioning and ConfigurationAbout ETHC Configurations
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-7
ETHC Working in a Concentration Mode
To configure an ETHC in a concentration mode, you must perform the following:
1. Depending on your node configuration:
• to connect ETHC line toward MUX via XFP module, or
• to connect User-Client traffic to TRBD1191 line module.
2. to set the specific CONF_MODE parameter to Concentrator_Auto.
Figure 9-3 Illustration of an ETHC in Concentration Mode
Figure 9-4 Illustration of an ETHC in Add & Drop Mode
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management About Board Provisioning and ConfigurationAbout ETHC Configurations
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
To connect User-Client channels to line modules, you must establish cross connections
via functional blocks from the transmission view as follows:
If you want to connect...
Then, cross connection is...
And you connect thefollowing TP ...
ETHC line to ETHC XFP
line• Mandatory
• Operator responsibility
port#13 - RsTTP
to
port#13 - OCH
ETHC line to TRBD1191
line• Depending on node
configuration
• Operator responsibility
ETHC port#13 - RsTTP
to
TRBD1191 port#101 - ODU2
For information only:
ETHC User-Client channels
to ETHC line
• Automatic
• �ot operator
configurable
For information only:
OCHgdc port
to
RSgdc port
See Also
“Managing Cross Connections” (p. 12-7)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management About Board Provisioning and ConfigurationAbout ETHC Configurations
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-9
ETHC Working in an Add & Drop Mode
To configure an ETHC in an Add & Drop mode, you must perform the following:
1. Depending on your node configuration:
• to connect ETHC line toward MUX via XFP module, or
• to connect ETHC line to TRBD1191 line module.
2. to set the specific CONF_MODE parameter to AddDrop_Manual.
3. to manage channel connections via the VLAN Cross Connection Management
window.
ATTENTION:You cannot change the configuration mode from AddDrop_Manual to
Concentrator_Auto without de-provisioning the board.
See Also
• Table 9-15, “ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table” (p. 9-58)
• “Configuring ETHCWorking Mode” (p. 9-74)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management About Board Provisioning and ConfigurationAbout ETHC Configurations
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
About TRBD1191 Board
TRBD1191 Basic Concept
ATRBD1191 board is an interface between WDM network and User-Client networks.
User-Client channels are processed through an XFP connection module which is called
User-Client XFP.
Channels to WDM network are transported via TRBD1191 line through a connection
matrix.
Figure 9-5, “TRBD1191 Basic Concept” (p. 9-11) illustrates TRBD1191 basic concepts.
TRBD1191 Cross Connections
To connect User-Client channels to line module, you must establish a cross connection
between port#1 - OCH and port#101 - ODU2.
To know how to create a cross connection, refer to “Creating Cross Connections”
(p. 12-10).
Figure 9-5 TRBD1191 Basic Concept
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management About Board Provisioning and ConfigurationAbout TRBD1191 Board
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-11
Declaring/Undeclaring Boards
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes all the required procedures and parameters to declare or undeclare
1626 LM boards.
Contents
TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features 9-13
Declaring OCPU Protection Boards 9-19
Declaring Control and Service Boards 9-20
Declaring TRBD Boards 9-22
Declaring TRBC boards 9-26
Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards 9-29
Declaring BMDX Boards 9-31
Declaring OMDX Boards 9-33
Declaring CMDX Boards 9-35
Declaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board 9-36
Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards 9-38
Declaring BOFAAmplifier Boards 9-40
Declaring Ethernet Boards 9-42
Declaring TDMX 1180 boards 9-44
Declaring OADC boards 9-46
Declaring WMA�1100 Boards 9-47
Declaring WMA� 3x74 Boards 9-49
Undeclaring/Removing Boards 9-51
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-12 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features
The following tables give an overview of the main characteristics of transponder and
Mux/Demux boards.
Table 9-1 Transponder Models and Features
Transponder Models Features
TRBD4612• 40 Gbps rate, P-DPSK
• 50 GHz grid
• 3 slots wide
• U�I/G.709 compliant
• STM-256/OC-768 User-Client
• Fully tunable over 80 channels of C band
• Less than 83 W power consumption
• 1+1 OS�CP protection
• Embedded TDCM
• PMDC to enhance performances w/ poor PMD
fibers. Implemented as an external board.
• Compliant with mux/demux CMDX1012 (8
channels, 50 GHz)
TRBD4412• 40 Gbps rate, DPSK
• 100 GHz grid
• 3 slots wide
• U�I/G.709 compliant
• STM-256/OC-768 User-Client
• Fully tunable over 40 channels of C band
• Less than 83 W power consumption
• 1+1 OS�CP protection
• Embedded TDCM
• PMDC to enhance performances w/ poor PMD
fibers. Implemented as an external board.
• Compliant with mux/demux CMDX1052 (4
channels, 100 GHz)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsTRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-13
Table 9-1 Transponder Models and Features (continued)
Transponder Models Features
TRBD1191 TRBD1191 general characteristics:
• 10 Gbps rate, �RZ
• I-64.1/S-64.2b/10GBASE S/P1L1-2D2 User
Interface
• 50 GHz grid
• 1 slot wide
• G.709 compliant
• STM-64/OC-192 CBR at 9,95 Gbps/OTU2/10 GbE
WA�/ 10 GbE LA� User-Client
• Fully tunable over 96 channels of C+ band
• Less than 48 W power consumption
• 1+1 OS�CP protection
• Compliant with mux/demux CMDX1010 (8
channels, 50 GHz)
Specific MLSE characteristics:
• 50 GHz grid / Frequency range from 191.700 THz to
196.000 THz
• Up to 46 W power consumption (Maximum number
of units per shelf: 14)
• High PMD tolerance
TRBD1131• 10 Gbps rate, �RZ
• LR User Interface
• 50 GHz grid
• 1 slot wide
• G.709 compliant
• 10 GbE LA� User-Client
• Fully tunable over 96 channels of C+ band
• Less than 35 W power consumption
• 1+1 OS�CP protection
• Compliant with mux/demux CMDX1010 (8
channels, 50 GHz)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsTRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-14 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 9-1 Transponder Models and Features (continued)
Transponder Models Features
TRBD1121• 10 Gbps rate, �RZ
• S-64.2b User Interface
• 50 GHz grid
• 1 slot wide
• G.709 compliant
• STM-64/OC-192 CBR at 9,95 Gbps/OTU2/10 GbE
WA� User-Client
• Fully tunable over 96 channels of C+ band
• Less than 34 W power consumption
• 1+1 OS�CP protection
• Compliant with mux/demux CMDX1010 (8
channels, 50 GHz)
TRBD1111• 10 Gbps rate, �RZ
• I-64.1 User Interface
• 50 GHz grid
• 1 slot wide
• G.709 compliant
• STM-64/OC-192 CBR at 9,95 Gbps/OTU2/10 GbE
WA� User-Client
• Fully tunable over 96 channels of C+ band
• Less than 37 W power consumption
• 1+1 OS�CP protection
• Compliant with mux/demux CMDX1010 (8
channels, 50 GHz)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsTRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-15
Table 9-2 Concentrator Models and Features
Concentrator Models Features
TRBC4612• 40 Gbps rate WDM side, P-DPSK
• 4x10 Gbps rate User-Client side, XFP pluggable
mode
• 50 GHz grid
• 3 slots wide
• U�I/G.709 compliant
• STM-64/OC-192 CBR at 9,95 Gbps/10GbE LA�
User-Client
• Fully tunable over 80 channels of C band
• Less than 101 W power consumption
• Embedded TDCM
• PMDC to enhance performances w/ poor PMD
fibers. Implemented as an external board.
• Compliant with mux/demux CMDX1012 (8
channels, 50 GHz)
TRBC4412• 40 Gbps rate WDM side, DPSK
• 4x10 Gbps rate User-Client side, XFP pluggable
mode
• 50 GHz grid
• 3 slots wide
• U�I/G.709 compliant
• STM-64/OC-192 CBR at 9,95 Gbps/10GbE LA�
User-Client
• Fully tunable over 80 channels of C band
• Less than 101 W power consumption
• Embedded TDCM
• PMDC to enhance performances w/ poor PMD
fibers. Implemented as an external board.
• Compliant with mux/demux CMDX1052 (8
channels, 50 GHz)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsTRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-16 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 9-2 Concentrator Models and Features (continued)
Concentrator Models Features
TRBC1111• 10 Gbps rate WDM side, �RZ
• 4x2.5 Gbps User-Client side, SFP Pluggable
• I-16/S-16.1/L-16.1/L-16.2/Generic SFP User
Interface
• 50 GHz grid
• 1 slot wide
• G.709 compliant
• STM-16/OC-48 CBR at 2.48 Gbps User-Client
• Fully tunable over 96 channels of C+ band
• Less than 39 W power consumption
• 1+1 OS�CP protection
• Compliant with mux/demux CMDX1010 (8
channels, 50 GHz)
Table 9-3 Mux/Demux Models and Features
Mux/Demux Models Features
OMDX 4100 4 channels in C band, 100 GHz grid
OMDX 8100 8 channels in L1, L2, S1 or S2 band, 100 GHz grid
OMDX 8100_L1_X 8 channels in L1 band, 100 GHz grid, expansion
capacity
CMDX 1010 8 channels in C+ band, 50 GHz grid
CMDX 1012 8 channels in C band, 50 GHz grid
CMDX 1052 4 channels in C band, 100 GHz grid
BMDX 1100 12 bands of 7 channels in C+ band, 50 GHz grid
BMDX 1000 12 bands of 8 channels in C+ band, 50 GHz grid
Table 9-4 OMDX Specificities
OMDX Models Band Id Multiplexed Frequency Range (GHz) 100
GHz Grid
OMDX 8100 L2 192000 to 192800 (exception: 192400)
L1 193000 to 193800 (exception: 193400)
S2 194200 to 195000 (exception: 194600)
S1 195200 to 196000 (exception: 195600)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsTRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-17
Table 9-4 OMDX Specificities (continued)
OMDX Models Band Id Multiplexed Frequency Range (GHz) 100
GHz Grid
OMDX 4100 20-23 192000 to 192300
25-28 192500 to 192800
30-33 193000 to 193300
35-38 193500 to 193800
42-45 194200 to 194500
47-50 194700 to 195000
52-55 195200 to 195500
57-60 195700 to 196000
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsTRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-18 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Declaring OCPU Protection Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare OCPU protection boards.
Before you begin
• You know the slot dedicated to OCPU board.
• You know the TRBx to be protected by the OCPU board.
• Subrack View window is displayed.
How to declare OCPU protection board
To declare OCPU protection boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on a subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on an empty slot between slot#11 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click OK.
Result:The OCPU board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
service (Red padlock).
Post-Declaration Task
To activate the protection, you must perform cabling declaration between the OCPU
board and the two TRBx to protect.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring OCPU Protection Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-19
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Declaring Control and Service Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare the following boards:
• ESCT 2000,
• ESCT 1000,
• PSUP 1000,
• RAIU 1000,
• FA�S 1000,
• USIB 1000.
Good to Know
If the board isa ...
Then, board name is ... And possiblesubrack slot#are ...
Control board ESCT 2000
For the current release, ESCT 2000 is mandatory in a
master shelf and may be installed in secondary shelves.
1
ESCT 1000
This board can be installed in secondary shelves only,
with specific engineering rules.
ESCT 1000 is prohibited as soon as WMA�, TDMX and
ETHC boards are implemented.
1
Power Supply
board
PSUP 1000 21 and 40
Rack Alarm
board
RAIU 1000 22 and 39
Fan board FANS 1000 41
User Interface
board
USIB 1000 From 23 to 38
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring Control and Service Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-20 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Before you begin
Subrack View window is displayed.
How to declare Control and Service boards
To declare control and service boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on an empty slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
Result:The board appears in the subrack view with operational state In Service (Red
padlock).
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring Control and Service Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-21
Declaring TRBD Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare TRBD boards.
Before you begin
• In case of protection mechanisms:
– You know the slot and the associated role of the TRBD (main or spare).
– You know the slot of the OCPU in charge of protection management.
• Subrack View window is displayed.
CAUTION: At board plugging, you must check that Rx input power at User-Client
and WDM side does not exceed the maximum acceptable values. This measure is
relevant ONLY IF the related channel is present. This check is mandatory to
prevent any damage for the WDM receiver.
The following tables indicate the maximum acceptable input power per TRBD board.
Table 9-5 TRBD4xxx Maximum Acceptable Input Power
TRBD4xxx Maximum Acceptable Input Power
User-Client Side WDM Side
+3 dBm +5 dBm
Table 9-6 TRBD4312 Maximum Acceptable Input Power
TRBD4312 Maximum Acceptable Input Power
User-Client Side WDM Side
+3 dBm +5 dBm
Table 9-7 TRBD1x9z Maximum Acceptable Input Power
TRBD1x9z Maximum Acceptable Input Power
Interface Type User-Client Side WDM Side
I-64.1 +0.5 dBm Caution:
• For TRBD1191 MLSE: -6 dBm
• For other TRBD1x9z: Refer to
the value noticed on the front
panel sticker. If no sticker: +2
dBm
S-64.2b -1 dBm
10GBASE S -2 dBm
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TRBD Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-22 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 9-8 TRBD1xyz Maximum Acceptable Input Power
TRBD1xyz Maximum Acceptable Input Power
Interface Type User-Client Side WDM Side
y=1
(VSR/I-64.1
module)
+0.5 dBm Refer to the value noticed on the
front panel sticker. If no sticker: +2
dBm
y=2 and 4
(S-64.2b
module)
-1 dBm
y=3
(10GBASE LR)
+0.5 dBm
How to declare TRBD boards
To declare TRBD boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant TRBD model.
Result:The Channel Configuration and Grid, Band and Interface Configuration
areas appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Channel Configuration area, click on the relevant frequency.
Result:
• The selected frequency is displayed on the left.
• In the Grid, Band and Interface Configuration area, the associated grid and
network interface are displayed.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TRBD Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 For TRBD1xyz, select the relevant interface:
• UNI: for a User to �etwork Interface.
• NNI: for a �etwork to �etwork Interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 In the State of the Line area, select the required Line State.
Line State to On enables the optical interface (Emission/Reception).
Line State to Off disables the optical interface (Emission/Reception).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click OK.
Result:The TRBD board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
Good to know
• ARUP alarm may appear during approximately 1 minute.
• Line State management have the following consequences:
If Line State is set to ... Then ...
ON – Force LOSS parameters is set to
Un-Activated.
– APSD Control is set to Disable.
The reception interface and the laser are enabled.
To change these parameter values refer to:
– “Configuring TRBx Transmission
Parameters” (p. 9-82),
– “Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC
Boards Laser” (p. 9-111).
OFF – Force LOSS parameters is set to Activated.
– APSD Control is set to Laser Forced Off.
The reception interface and the laser are disabled.
To change these parameter values refer to:
– “Configuring TRBx Transmission
Parameters” (p. 9-82),
– “Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC
Boards Laser” (p. 9-111).
Post-Declaration Tasks
1. If necessary, set the specific parameters.
2. Set the connectors and cabling in service.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TRBD Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-24 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For 40 Gbps transponders, you can set the WDM line connector in service only
if:
a. WDMModule output connector is in service.
b. VOA input connector is in service.
c. Cabling between WDMModule output connector and VOA input or BOFA input
is declared.
3. Update transmission.
�ote: Any action on Tributary connections at physical or configuration level,
requires SPLM synchronization.
See Also
• Table 9-12, “TRBx Transmission Parameters Table” (p. 9-55)
• Table 9-24, “TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table” (p. 9-64)
• “Laser Power Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-62)
• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”,
• “Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters” (p. 9-82)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TRBD Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-25
Declaring TRBC boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare TRBC boards.
Before you begin
• In case of protection mechanisms:
– You know the slot and the associated role of the TRBC (main or spare).
– You know the slot of the OCPU in charge of protection management.
• Subrack View window is displayed.
CAUTION At board plugging, you must check that Rx input power at User-Client
and WDM side does not exceed the maximum acceptable values. This measure is
relevant ONLY IF the related channel is present. This check is mandatory to
prevent any damage for the WDM receiver.
Table 9-9 TRBC4xxx Maximum Acceptable Input Power
TRBC4xxx Maximum Acceptable Input Power
Interface Type User-Client Side WDM Side
10GBEWA�
SW
0 dBm +5 dBm
10GBE LA� SR 0 dBm
P1L1-2D2 -7 dBm
How to declare TRBC boards
To declare TRBC boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result: Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant TRBC model.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TRBC boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-26 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Result:The Channel Configuration and Grid, Band and Interface Configuration
areas appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Channel Configuration area, click on the relevant frequency.
Result:The selected frequency is displayed on the left.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In the Grid, Band and Interface Configuration area, the relevant interface type for each
User /Client port is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 In the State of the Line area, select the required Line State.
Line State to On enables the optical interface (Emission/Reception).
Line State to Off disables the optical interface (Emission/Reception).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click OK.
Result:The TRBC board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
Good to know
• ARUP alarm may appear during approximately 1 minute.
• Line State management have the following consequences:
If Line State is set to ... Then ...
ON – Force LOSS parameters is set to
Un-Activated.
– APSD Control is set to Disable.
The reception interface and the laser are enabled.
To change these parameter values refer to:
– “Configuring TRBx Transmission
Parameters” (p. 9-82),
– “Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC
Boards Laser” (p. 9-111).
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TRBC boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-27
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Line State is set to ... Then ...
OFF – Force LOSS parameters is set to Activated.
– APSD Control is set to Laser Forced Off.
The reception interface and the laser are disabled.
To change these parameter values refer to:
– “Configuring TRBx Transmission
Parameters” (p. 9-82),
– “Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC
Boards Laser” (p. 9-111).
Post-Declaration Tasks
1. If necessary, set the specific parameters.
2. Set the connectors and cabling in service.
For 40 Gbps transponders, you can set the WDM line connector in service only
if:
a. WDMModule output connector is in service.
b. VOA input connector is in service.
c. Cabling between WDMModule output connector and VOA input or BOFA input
is declared.
3. Update transmission.
�ote: Any action on Tributary connections at physical or configuration level,
requires SPLM synchronization.
See Also
• “Board Specific Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-55)
• Table 9-24, “TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table” (p. 9-64)
• “Declaring a SFP/XFPModule” (p. 9-101)
• “Setting a SFP/XFPModule In Service” (p. 9-102)
• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”,
• “Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters” (p. 9-82)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TRBC boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-28 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare OSCU supervision boards.
Before you begin
Subrack View window is displayed.
How to declare OSCU supervision boards
To declare OSCU supervision boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In Type of Line area, select the relevant entry:
• REPEATER
This option triggers the following:
– OSCU clock is set to Receive Signal Clock.
– For LAPD configuration, only D1-D3 bytes are enabled.
• OTHERS:
This option triggers the following:
– OSCU clock is set to Local Clock.
– Full LAPD configuration is enabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click OK.
Result:The OSCU board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring OSCU Supervision Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-29
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
“Board Specific Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-55)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring OSCU Supervision Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-30 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Declaring BMDX Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare BMDX boards.
Before you begin
Subrack View window is displayed.
How to declare BMDX boards
To declare BMDX boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on a subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Equipment>Set.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click OK.
Result:The BMDX board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
Post-Declaration Tasks
1. Set the connectors and cabling in service.
2. Update transmission.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring BMDX Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-31
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
• “TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features” (p. 9-13)
• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring BMDX Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-32 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Declaring OMDX Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare OMDX boards.
Before you begin
Subrack View window is displayed.
How to declare OMDX boards
To declare OMDX boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on an empty slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Channel Min&Max area, select the required frequency range.
�ote: This step does not apply for OMDX8100_L1_X.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click OK.
Result:The OMDX board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
Post-Declaration Tasks
1. Set the connectors and cabling in service.
2. Update transmission.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring OMDX Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-33
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
• “TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features” (p. 9-13)
• Table 9-4, “OMDX Specificities” (p. 9-17)
• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring OMDX Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-34 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Declaring CMDX Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare CMDX boards.
Before you begin
Subrack View window is displayed.
How to declare CMDX boards
To declare CMDX boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Grid, Band and Interface Configuration area, select the required band.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click OK.
Result:The CMDX board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
Post-Declaration Tasks
1. Set the connectors and cabling in service.
2. Update transmission.
See Also
• “TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features” (p. 9-13)
• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring CMDX Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-35
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Declaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board.
Before you begin
• Subrack View window is displayed.
• You must declare the associated BMDX board before the ALCT board.
How to declare the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) board
To declare an ALCT board, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant ALCT model.
Result:The Channel Configuration and Grid, Band and Interface Configuration
areas appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Channel Configuration area, click on the relevant frequency.
Result:
• The selected frequency is displayed on the left.
• In the Channel Configuration area, the following is displayed:
– Grid: 400 GHz
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the frequency corresponding to the supported wavelength.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click OK.
Result:The ALCT board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-36 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Post-Declaration Tasks
1. Set the connectors and cabling in service.
2. Update transmission.
See Also
• “Board Specific Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-55)
• “Laser Power Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-62)
• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-37
Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare LOFA11xx amplifiers.
Good to Know
• By default, LOFA11xx boards are declared as a bidirectional amplifiers:
– Stage 1 input and stage 2 output act as a bidirectional OTS port,
– Stage 2 input and stage 1 output act as a bidirectional OTS port.
• An unidirectional amplifier is a LOFA11xx board for which the first stage output has
been cabled with the second stage input.
• LOFA11x0 inter-stage cabling is mandatory because it can be unidirectional only.
• To use two unidirectional LOFA11xx boards as a bidirectional amplifier device, you
must set the contradirectionality between the two boards.
• Contradirectionality is a specific Alcatel-Lucent concept. This concept designates a
link between two unidirectional amplifiers to build a bidirectional set.
4 LOFA11xx Repeater Configuration Special Case
For a repeater configuration which includes 4 LOFA11xx, you must carefully check that
the following is implemented:
• The inter-stage cabling has been configured for each LOFA11xx.
• The cabling has been configured as described in Figure 9-6, “4 LOFA11xx Repeater
Configuration” (p. 9-38).
• Contradirectionality is configured between Amplifier 1 and Amplifier 4,
• Contradirectionality is configured between Amplifier 2 and Amplifier 3
Before you begin
Subrack View window is displayed.
Figure 9-6 4 LOFA11xx Repeater Configuration
Contradir
Ampli 1
Ampli4
Ampli 2
Ampli 3
Contradir Contradir
Ampli 1Ampli 1
Ampli4
Ampli 2Ampli 2
Ampli 3Ampli 3
Contradir
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-38 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
How to declare Amplifier boards
To declare amplifier boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
Result:The LOFA11xx board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
Post-Declaration Tasks
1. If necessary, set the contradirectionality and power tuning parameters.
2. Set the connectors and cabling in service.
3. Update transmission.
See Also
• Table 9-11, “Contradirectionality Parameters table” (p. 9-54)
• “LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters” (p. 9-65)
• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-39
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Declaring BOFA Amplifier Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare BOFA amplifiers.
Before you begin
Subrack View window is displayed.
How to declare BOFA amplifier boards
To declare BOFA amplifier boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
Result:The BOFA board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock). According to the BOFA type, one or two gain blocks are set In
Service automatically.
Post-Declaration Tasks
1. According to the configuration, declare required TRBx, BMDX or CMDX boards.
2. Set the connectors and cabling in service.
3. Update transmission.
See Also
• “Declaring TRBD Boards” (p. 9-22),
• “Declaring TRBC boards” (p. 9-26),
• “Declaring BMDX Boards” (p. 9-31),
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring BOFA Amplifier Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-40 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
• “Declaring CMDX Boards” (p. 9-35),
• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring BOFA Amplifier Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-41
Declaring Ethernet Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare Ethernet boards.
Before you begin
Subrack View window is displayed.
How to declare Ethernet boards
To declare Ethernet boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
Result:The Ethernet board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Close.
Post-Declaration Tasks
1. If necessary, set the specific parameters.
2. Declare SFP/XFP module(s),
3. Activate the connectors and cabling.
4. Update transmission.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring Ethernet Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-42 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
• “Board Specific Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-55)
• “Declaring a SFP/XFPModule” (p. 9-101)
• “Setting a SFP/XFPModule In Service” (p. 9-102)
• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring Ethernet Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-43
Declaring TDMX 1180 boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare TDMX 1180 boards.
Before you begin
• Subrack View window is displayed.
• The TDMX 1180 board takes 4 consecutive slots. As a consequence, the selected
subrack must have enough consecutive empty slots to host a TDMX 1180 board.
How to declare TDMX 1180 boards
To declare TDMX 1180 boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
Result:The TDMX 1180 board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Close.
Post-Declaration Tasks
1. Configure the port profiles (Specific parameters configuration),
2. Configure the port signal transmission,
3. Activate the connectors and cabling,
4. Update transmission.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TDMX 1180 boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-44 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
• “Board Specific Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-55),
• “TDMX and WMA� Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-69),
• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TDMX 1180 boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-45
Declaring OADC boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare OADC boards.
Before you begin
Subrack View window is displayed.
How to declare OADC boards
To declare OADC boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
Result:The OADC board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Close.
Post-Declaration Tasks
�one.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring OADC boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-46 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Declaring WMAN1100 Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to declare WMA�1100 boards.
Before you begin
• Subrack View window is displayed.
• The WMA�1100 board takes 3 consecutive slots. As a consequence, the selected
subrack must have enough consecutive empty slots to host a WMA� 1100 board.
• WMA�1100 declaration requires to understand what Contradirectionality concept is.
Contradirectionality is a specific Alcatel-Lucent concept. This concept designates a
link between two unidirectional boards to build a bidirectional set.
How to declare WMAN 1100 boards
To declare WMA� 1100 boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on WMAN 1100.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK to finish.
Result:The WMA� 1100 board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Close.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring WMAN1100 Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-47
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Post-Declaration Tasks
If necessary:
1. Configure provisioning parameters.
2. Configure laser power
3. Activate the connectors and cabling
4. Configure contradirectionality
See Also
• “Board Specific Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-55)
• “Configuring WMA� Laser Power” (p. 9-80)
• “Configuring Contradirectionality” (p. 9-86)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring WMAN1100 Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-48 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Declaring WMAN 3x74 Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare WMA� 3x74 boards.
Before you begin
• Subrack View window is displayed.
• The WMA� 3x74 board takes 4 consecutive slots. As a consequence, the selected
subrack must have enough consecutive empty slots to host a WMA� 3x74 board.
How to declare WMAN 31x74 boards
To declare WMA� 3x74 boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click WMAN 3174 or WMAN 3374.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK to finish.
Result:The WMA� 3x74 board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Close.
Post-Declaration Tasks
If necessary:
1. Configure provisioning parameters.
2. Configure laser power
3. Activate the connectors and cabling
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring WMAN 3x74 Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-49
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
• “Board Specific Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-55)
• “Configuring WMA� Laser Power” (p. 9-80)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring WMAN 3x74 Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-50 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Undeclaring/Removing Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to undeclare boards.
Before you begin
• This procedure does not apply to SFP/XFP modules.
To know how to undeclare a SFP/XFP module, refer to the relevant section.
• Subrack View window is displayed.
• Board operational status must be set to Out of Service.
• For TRBx boards, perform the following:
1. Remove loopbacks, then
2. Delete cable configuration, then
3. Stop performance monitoring.
• For BMDX boards, disconnect CMDX boards.
• For CMDX boards, disconnect TRBD boards.
• For OMDX boards, disconnect associated OMDX boards.
CAUTIO�: Do not unplug a board during a firmware download (Hardware failure LED
in yellow). Otherwise the board will not restart and you will have to return it for
manufacturer repair.
Good to Know
For 40 Gbps transponder, you must follow the required sequence:
1. Set the User/Client and WDM line connectors out of service.
2. Delete the cabling between WDMModule output connector and VOA Input
connector.
To know how to delete the cabling between two connectors refer to “Deleting the
Cabling between 2 Connectors” (p. 13-5)
3. Set the VOA Input connector out of service.
4. Set the WDM module output connector out of service.
How to undeclare/remove boards
To undeclare/remove boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Remove.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the dialog box click OK.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsUndeclaring/Removing Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-51
Result:The board disappears from the subrack view.
An UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present) is raised if the board is still plugged intothe slot.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsUndeclaring/Removing Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-52 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Board Configuration Parameters
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the required parameters and procedures to manage board
configuration.
Contents
Board Generic Configuration Parameters 9-53
Board Specific Configuration Parameters 9-55
Laser Power Configuration Parameters 9-62
TRBx Shutdown Criteria 9-64
LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters 9-65
LOFA11xx APSD Parameters 9-68
TDMX and WMA� Configuration Parameters 9-69
Board Generic Configuration Parameters
Generic configuration parameters are associated to the following boards:
• CMDX boards
CMDX generic configuration parameter is about the band associated to a CMDX
board.
• LOFA11xx and WMAN1100 boards
LOFA and WMA�1100 generic configuration parameters are about
contradirectionality.
Contradirectionality is a specific Alcatel-Lucent concept.
This concept designates a link between two unidirectional boards to build a
bidirectional set.
An amplifier is unidirectional when the interstage cable links the first stage output to
the second stage input.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-53
The following tables describe CMDX, LOFA11xx and WMA�1100 boards generic
configuration parameters:
• Table 9-10, “CMDX Band Parameter Table” (p. 9-54) is dedicated to CMDX band
parameter,
• Table 9-11, “Contradirectionality Parameters table” (p. 9-54) is dedicated to
contradirectionality parameters.
Table 9-10 CMDX Band Parameter Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Band The BMDX band# to which the
CMDX board is connected.
1 to 12
See Also
“Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board” (p. 9-87)
Table 9-11 Contradirectionality Parameters table
Parameters Description Possible Values
RRSBBP Contradirectional
Rack Indicates the rack number which
hosts the related subrack.
Rack#,Subrack#andslot#
of the related board.
Subrack Indicates the subrack number which
hosts the board.
Slot Indicates the slot number where the
board is plugged.
Enter Contradir Enables the Rack, Subrack and Slot
fields.
On/Off
Remove Contradir Disables the Rack, Subrack and Slot
fields.
See Also
• “Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards” (p. 9-38)
• “Declaring WMA�1100 Boards” (p. 9-47)
• “Configuring Contradirectionality” (p. 9-86)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersBoard Generic Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-54 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Board Specific Configuration Parameters
Specific configuration parameters are associated to the following boards:
• TRBx boards. Table 9-12, “TRBx Transmission Parameters Table” (p. 9-55) is
dedicated to TRBx transmission parameters.
• LOFAx boards. Table 9-13, “LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table” (p. 9-57) is
dedicated to
• ALCT boards. Table 9-14, “ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Parameter Table”
(p. 9-58) is dedicated to ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering parameters.
• ETHC boards. Table 9-15, “ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table” (p. 9-58) is
dedicated to ETHC configuration mode parameters.
• 2*GE_FC boards. Table 9-16, “2*GE_FC Signal Type Transportation Parameters
Table” (p. 9-59) is dedicated to 2*GE_FC signal type transportation parameters.
• TDMX 1180 boards. Table 9-17, “TDMX 1180 Port Profile Parameters Table”
(p. 9-59) is dedicated to TDMX 1180 port profile parameters.
• WMAN 1100 boards. Table 9-18, “WMA� 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table”
(p. 9-59) is dedicated to WMA� 1100 provisioning parameters.
• WMAN 3x74 boards. Table 9-19, “WMA� 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table”
(p. 9-60) is dedicated to WMA� 3x74 provisioning parameters.
• OSCU boards. Table 9-20, “OSCU Channel Supervision Synchronization Parameter
Table” (p. 9-62) is dedicated to OSCU supervision synchronization parameters.
Depending on TRBx models, some of the following parameters may not apply.
Table 9-12 TRBx Transmission Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
UDC_CONFIG Configuration of a User Data
Channel.
A 2.048 kbps link may be plugged
into the User Data Channel faceplate
connection.
Not used
The configuration plans
that no link is plugged
into the User Data
Channel faceplate
connection.
Add/drop to front panel
The configuration plans
that a link is plugged into
the User Data Channel
faceplate connection.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersBoard Specific Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-55
Table 9-12 TRBx Transmission Parameters Table (continued)
Parameters Description Possible Values
RPO_MODE Receiver Parameter Optimization
Mode.
An optimization mechanism enables
to clearly determine if the optical
signal corresponds to digital value 0
or 1.
Automatic
The optimization
mechanism is based on
the FEC (Forward Error
Correction).
Factory
The optimization
mechanism is based on
the standard manufacturer
mechanism.
SBS_SUPPR Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin
Scattering.
Amechanism to compensate for
vibrations inside the fiber.
This parameter does not apply for
TRBD4xxx boards.
Enabled
The suppression
mechanism is enabled.
Disabled
The suppression
mechanism is disabled.
Force_LOSS Amechanism to force a TRBx to
send a LOSS indication to the remote
network element.
When Force_LOSS is Activated, the
receiver interface is disabled
Activated
The mechanism is
activated.
Un-activated
The mechanism is
deactivated.
TDCM_Mode Tunable Dispersion Compensator
Module Mode
automatic
Chromatic dispersion
tuning is performed
automatically.
manual
Chromatic dispersion
tuning must be done
manually via
Board>Optical Power
level Configuration
menu.
Signal_TYPE Indicates the type of client signal. CBR10G
10 Gigabit SH, Constant
Bit Rate
10GBLAN
10 Gigabit Ethernet LA�
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersBoard Specific Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-56 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
See Also
“Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters” (p. 9-82)
Good to Know
Depending on the value you assigned to Line State at TRBx declaration, you may need to
take an action on TRBx transmission parameters:
If you have set Line State to ... and you want to ...
ON disable the optical interface emission and reception, then
you must set:
• Force LOSS to Activated,
• APSD Control to Laser Forced Off.
Refer to: “Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC
Boards Laser” (p. 9-111)
OFF enable the optical interface, then you must set Force
LOSS to Un-Activated.
Table 9-13 LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
COVER_DISABLE Drives the LOFA shutdown delay
depending on the assigned value.
Cover_Enable
The laser is shutdown
immediately and the
traffic is interrupted.
Cover_Disable
The laser is shutdown
after 5 minutes delay.
• This delay lets you
remove the cover
without traffic
interruption.
• During these 5
minutes, you can
perform tasks that
require the cover to be
removed.
ATTENTION: If after the 5
minutes delay, the safety
cover is not replaced,
LOFA laser is shutdown.
See Also
“Managing LOFAUpgrade with EMPM1000” (p. 9-121)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersBoard Specific Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-57
Table 9-14 ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Parameter Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
SBS_SUPPR Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin
Scattering.
Amechanism to compensate for
vibrations inside the fiber.
Enabled
The suppression
mechanism is enabled.
Disabled
The suppression
mechanism is disabled.
See Also
“Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism” (p. 9-90)
Each of these parameters may have a Reference Point value.
A Reference Point is a label for display only, which value informs about the location
where the related parameter applies in the board.
Table 9-15 ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
CONF_MODE Enables the ETHC to work in
concentration or Add & Drop mode.
Concentrator_Auto
Default value
Only L13 optical line is
enabled.
AddDrop_Manual
Enables L13 and L14
optical lines.
ATTENTION:You cannot
change the configuration
mode from
AddDrop_Manual to
Concentrator_Auto.
Concentrator_Manual
�ot used in the current
configuration.
See Also
“Configuring ETHCWorking Mode” (p. 9-74)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersBoard Specific Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-58 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 9-16 2*GE_FC Signal Type Transportation Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Signal_Type Indicates the type of signal
transported by the Ethernet medium.
The selected value applies to both
client lines.
1GBE LAN
1 Gigabit Ethernet LA�
FIBER CHANNEL
Fiber Channel
See Also
“Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation” (p. 9-77)
Table 9-17 TDMX 1180 Port Profile Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Power Tolerance (dB) Determines the maximum variation
between actual and target power the
system tolerates without raising a
Performance Degraded (PD) alarm.
Beyond this tolerance, PD alarm is
raised.
1 to +3 dB
Default: 2 dB
Blocking Level The maximum power value which
determines a channel blocking.
-50 to -30 dBm
See Also
“Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile” (p. 9-91)
Table 9-18 WMAN 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Background Control
Process
Background control process of the
output power. When enabled, it is one
of the parameters which determines if
the output power is kept.
• Enabled
• Disabled
Correction Process Attenuation correction process.
When enabled, adjusts the attenuation
when discrepancies exist between
requested and measured attenuation
values.
• Enabled
• Disabled
Board Output According to the selected value,
determines if the board provides
optical output or not.
• No optical output
• Optical output
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersBoard Specific Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-59
Table 9-18 WMAN 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table (continued)
Parameters Description Possible Values
Blocking Threshold The value which determines when a
channel is blocked.
+30 to +40 dBm, 1 dB
step.
Default: +40 dBm.
Power Tolerance (dB) Determines the maximum variation
between actual and target power the
system tolerates without raising a
Performance Degraded (PD) alarm.
Beyond this tolerance, PD alarm is
raised.
1 to +3 dB
Default: 2 dB
Control Period Periodicity of background control
process execution.
+30 to +600 sec, 10 sec
step.
Default: 60 sec.
Input Channel Threshold The minimum power value to
consider that there is a channel at the
input port.
-26 to 0 dBm, 1 dB step.
Default: -22 dBm.
PGE Commissioning Enables to determine a flat spectrum
at WMA� 1100 commissioning
phase.
Attention: Refer to “Configuring
WMA� 1100 Equalization
Parameter” (p. 9-94) to understand
how to manage this parameter.
• Off
The equalization
process is not active.
• Even
The equalization
process is enabled for
even channels.
• Odd
The equalization
process is enabled for
odd channels.
Context of the NE Qualifies the configuration of the �E
where WMA� board is plugged.• OADM
• REPEATER
See Also
• “Configuring WMA� Provisioning Parameters” (p. 9-93)
• “Configuring WMA� 1100 Equalization Parameter” (p. 9-94)
Table 9-19 WMAN 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Background Control
Process
Background control process of the
output power. When enabled, it is one
of the parameters which determines if
the output power is kept.
• Enabled
• Disabled
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersBoard Specific Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-60 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 9-19 WMAN 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table (continued)
Parameters Description Possible Values
Correction Process Attenuation correction process.
When enabled, adjusts the attenuation
when discrepancies exist between
requested and measured attenuation
values.
• Enabled
• Disabled
Board Output According to the selected value,
determines if the board provides
optical output or not.
No optical output
Power Tolerance (dB) Determines the maximum variation
between actual and target power the
system tolerates without raising a
Performance Degraded (PD) alarm.
Beyond this tolerance, PD alarm is
raised.
1 to +3 dB
Default: 2 dB
Control Period(s) Periodicity of background control
process execution.
+30 to +600 sec, 10 sec
step.
Default: 60 sec.
Blocking Level (dBm) The maximum power value which
determines a channel blocking.
-30 to -50 dBm, 1 dB
step.
Default: -30 dBm.
Express Port 1
Express Port 2
Express Port 3
According to the selected Express
port, determines if VOA is activated
or not.
• No Optical Output
The VOA is at
maximum attenuation.
• Optical Output
The VOA is activated.
Control / Correction
Type
The flag which determines:
• if the channel power is kept at the
output of the Wavelength
Selective Switch,
• if the channel attenuation is kept
in the Wavelength Selective
Switch.
• Power
• Attenuation
Default: Power.
Context of the NE Qualifies the configuration of the �E
where WMA� board is plugged.• OADM
• REPEATER
See Also
“Configuring WMA� Provisioning Parameters” (p. 9-93)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersBoard Specific Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-61
Table 9-20 OSCU Channel Supervision Synchronization Parameter Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
OSC Clock
Synchronization
OSCU board supports channel
supervision. When several nodes
have OCSU boards, you need to
decide which OSCU board will be the
reference and which OSCU board
will have to synchronize with the
reference one.
• Local Clock
This value defines the
reference OSCU
board for
synchronization.
• Receive Signal Clock
This value defines the
OSCU board which
synchronizes with the
reference board.
See Also
“Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards” (p. 9-29)
Laser Power Configuration Parameters
Table 9-21, “TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table” (p. 9-62)
describes the laser output power level configuration which applies to TRBx or ALCT
boards.
Table 9-21 TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Pre-Emphasis Assigns the laser output power value
for the selected TRBx or ALCT
channel.
• For 10 Gbps
transponders and
concentrators:
-24 to +1 dBm
• For 40 Gbps
transponders and
concentrators without
BOFA:
-15 to +1 dBm
• For 40 Gbps
transponders and
concentrators with
BOFA:
-15 to +9,5 dBm
For ALCT board:
-14 to +11 dBm
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersBoard Specific Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-62 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 9-21 TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table
(continued)
Parameters Description Possible Values
Chromatic Dispersion Enables to tune manually the value of
the chromatic dispersion
compensation module.
• For TRBD44xx:
-400 to 400 ps/nm,
10 ps/nm step
• For TRBD46xx:
-500 to 500 ps/nm,
10 ps/nm step
See Also
• “Configuring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power” (p. 9-78)
• Table 9-22, “WMA� 1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Table”
(p. 9-63) describes the laser output power level configuration which applies to
WMA� 1100 boards.
Table 9-22 WMAN 1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Attenuation - Line
Output
Offset attenuation applied at the
board output.
The assigned value includes the offset
attenuation defined in the previous
parameter.
1.5 to 11.5 dB,
Default: 1.5 dB
Attenuation - Channel Attenuation applied to the selected
channel.
8.7 to 30.7 dB, 0.1 dB
step
Default: 20.7 dB
See Also
• “Configuring WMA� Laser Power” (p. 9-80)
• Table 9-23, “WMA� 3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Table” (p. 9-63)
describes the laser power level configuration which applies to WMA� 3174 boards.
Table 9-23 WMAN 3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Attenuation -
Wavelength Selective
Switch Input
Offset attenuation applied to any
channel going through the given
Express port.
1 to 11 dB, 0.1 dB step
Optical Power Level-
Channel
Power applied to the selected
channel.
-27 to +20 dBm, 0.1 dBm
step
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersLaser Power Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-63
See Also
“Configuring WMA� Laser Power” (p. 9-80)
TRBx Shutdown Criteria
Table 9-24, “TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table” (p. 9-64) describes TRBx shutdown criteria.
Table 9-24 TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Incoming Alarms A group of specific WDM incoming
alarms that can be raised from the
transmission blocks of TRBC/TRBD
boards.
For each group of alarms corresponds
a set of 3 associated actions.
Radio button: On
The associated Incoming
Alarms / Action is
selected.
By default the first group
is selected.
Radio button: Off
The associated Incoming
Alarms / Action is not
selected.
Action Indicates the resultant consequence
on the signal if one of the incoming
alarm is raised.
AIS
AIS (Alarm Indicator
Signal) is inserted toward
client/user side.
SHUTDOWN
If one of the
corresponding incoming
alarms is raised, the
client/user side laser is
shutdown.
TRANSPARENT
The signal flows without
any change.
See Also
“Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria” (p. 9-83)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersLaser Power Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-64 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters
2 families of parameters enable to manage a LOFA11xx board:
• APT: Amplifier Power Tuning
• VOA: Variable Optical Attenuation
APT Parameters
APT parameter family enables to tune the LOFA11xx laser power.
VOA Parameters
VOA parameter family enables to correct the optical signal deviation resulting from the
laser power increase or decrease.
LOFA11xx board tuning is driven by APT and VOAmodes.
• Table 9-25, “APT Modes Table” (p. 9-65) describes the different APT modes
• Table 9-26, “VOAModes Table” (p. 9-66) describes the different VOAmodes
• Table 9-27, “APT/VOA Parameters Table” (p. 9-67) describes the APT / VOA
parameters
Table 9-25 APT Modes Table
APT Modes Description
Manual 1rst stage output power (OP1) and 2nd stage output power (OP2) values are
entered manually.
In the Manual APT mode, other APT parameters are inactivated.
The Manual APT mode:
• is possible for all types of LOFA boards.
• is compatible with all VOAmodes for unidirectional LOFA board.
• is compatible with Manual VOAmode only for bidirectional LOFA
board.
Power The 2 following parameters are configured manually:
• 2nd stage output power (OP2)
• Limitation parameter of non linear effects (OP_Diff)
The configuration of these 2 parameters determines the value of 1rst stage
output power (OP1).
The Power APT mode:
• is possible for unidirectional LOFA board only.
• is compatible with all VOAmodes.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersLOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-65
Table 9-25 APT Modes Table (continued)
APT Modes Description
Gain The 2 following parameters are configured manually:
• IT
The Effective IntersTage attenuation.
This parameter represents the attenuation between the location where
the channels are added and the 2nd stage input.
• EOL span
The Effective End Of Life span attenuation.
This parameter represents the attenuation between the upstream node
where the channels are added and the 1rst stage input.
In the Gain APT mode, other parameters are inactivated.
The Gain APT mode:
• is possible for all types of LOFA board.
• is compatible with Manual VOAmode only.
See Also
“Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power” (p. 9-79)
Table 9-26 VOA Modes Table
VOA Modes Description
Manual Attenuation value (VOA) is entered manually.
In the Manual VOAmode, other VOA parameters are inactivated.
The Manual VOAmode:
• is possible for all types of LOFA board.
• is compatible with all APT mod
MSV In the Mid Stage VOA tuning, K_Diff is entered manually:
K_Diff is the difference between the theoretical ideal flatness constant (given
by the manufacturer) and the effective flatness constant.
In the MSV VOAmode, other VOA parameters are inactivated.
The MSV VOAmode:
• is possible for unidirectional LOFA board only.
• is compatible with Manual and Power APT modes.
See Also
“Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power” (p. 9-79)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersLOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-66 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 9-27 APT/VOA Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
APT Parameters Area
Mode APT tuning mode• Manual
• Power
• Gain
OP1 1rst stage Output Power +1 to +17.5 dBm,0.5 dB
step
Default: +1 dBm
OP2 2nd stage Output Power +2 to +17 dBm,0.5 dB
step
Default: +8 dBm
OP_Diff Limitation parameter of non linear
effects
-10.5 to +37 dB,0.25 dB
step
Default: +9 dB
IT The Effective IntersTage attenuation.
This parameter represents the
attenuation between the location
where the channels are added and the
2nd stage input.
0 to +47 dB,0.25 dB step
Default: 15 dB
VOA Parameters Area
Mode VOA tuning mode• Manual
• MSV
VOA Variable Output Attenuation• +1 to +15 dB,0.5 dB
step
• To compensate for
span degradation (line
ageing), it is
recommended to
assign VOA value
greater than 1 dB.
• For detailed
information, refer to
1626LM System
Turn-Up Guide
K_Diff The difference between the
theoretical ideal flatness constant
(given by the manufacturer) and the
effective flatness constant.
-14 to +14 dB,0.25 dB
step
Default: 0 dB
EOL Span Parameters Area
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersLOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-67
Table 9-27 APT/VOA Parameters Table (continued)
Parameters Description Possible Values
EOLspan The Effective End Of Life span
attenuation.
This parameter represents the
attenuation between the upstream
node where the channels are added
and the 1rst stage input.
10 to +62.5 dB,0.25 dB
step
Default: +14 dB
See Also
“Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power” (p. 9-79)
LOFA11xx APSD Parameters
APSD (Automatic Power ShutDown) is an optical safety mechanism which prevent
powerful light to be emitted in case of fiber brake.
APSD mechanism applies:
• to bidirectional amplifiers, or
• to 2 unidirectional amplifiers linked by a directionality contract.
When enabled, APSD mechanism is able:
1. to detect a loss of signal at amplifier stage 1 reception,
2. to stop the amplifier stage 2 emitting laser,
3. to restart amplifier laser automatically when the problem is solved.
Table 9-28, “APSD Parameters Table” (p. 9-68) describes APSD parameters.
Table 9-28 APSD Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Laser Stage Identifies the amplifier laser stage• Laser Stage 01
• Laser Stage 02
Laser Current State Displays the current state of the
amplifier laser stages.
Off/On
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersLOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-68 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 9-28 APSD Parameters Table (continued)
Parameters Description Possible Values
APSD Displays the state of the ASPD
mechanism which has been
configured via ASPD configuration
list box of ASPD Configuration
window.
Enabled
ASPD mechanism is
enabled. In case of
problem at signal
reception, the
contradirectional emitting
laser is switched off.
Laser Forced Off
APSD mechanism is
disabled and the laser is
switched off.
APSD Control Enable the selection of possible
configuration for APSD mechanism.
Enabled
ASPD mechanism is
enabled. In case of
problem at signal
reception, the
contradirectional emitting
laser is switched off.
Laser Forced Off
APSD mechanism is
disabled and the laser is
switched off.
Laser Current State Displays the laser operational state. Laser Off/On
See Also
“Configuring LOFA11xx APSD” (p. 9-85)
TDMX and WMAN Configuration Parameters• For TDMX parameters, refer to “TDMX Port Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-69)
• For WMA� parameters, refer to “WMA�3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters”
(p. 9-70)
TDMX Port Configuration Parameters
TDMX boards have 8 ports.
For each port, you can set:
• the channel wavelength to be assigned to the selected port,
• the output power level.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersLOFA11xx APSD Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-69
Table 9-29, “TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table” (p. 9-70) describes the port
configuration parameters.
Table 9-29 TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Port Number Indicates the port number to be
configured.
1 to 8
Channel Indicates the channel frequency to
drop.
This parameter is for display only.
• Blocked
The channel
frequency is not
transmitted to the
output of the TDMX
1180 board.
• One of the 96
possible channels
The channel
frequency to be
dropped toward
tributary boards.
Output Power Indicates the output power to be
assigned to the selected port.
-30 to 0 dBm,1 dB step
�ote: To know how to configure TDMX ports, refer to “Configuring TDMX 1180
Output Power” (p. 9-92).
WMAN3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters
�ote:WMA� 3x74 parameters can be set for each channel frequency.
However, you can propagate a set of parameter values at once, as follows:
If you want topropagate a set ofparameter values ...
Then, on the top first line of Channel Configurationwindow, you must ...
to some or all frequencies 1. Assign the values for each parameters.
2. Select the frequency to configure.
3. Click Apply.
4. End.
to all non configured
frequencies1. Assign the values for each parameters.
2. Click Apply.
3. End.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersTDMX and WMAN Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-70 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 9-30 WMAN 3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Frequency The frequency of the wavelength handled
by the WMA� board.
One of the 96 possible channels
from 191150 GHz
Input The WMA� input port of the channel to be
transmitted to the WMA� output port.
WMA� input port can be:
• Express: the input port type handling
WDM channels coming from other
�E.
• Add: the input port type handling
WDM channels coming from Tributary
boards.
• 0
The channels are blocked. There
is no transmission to the output
port whatever the input port.
• IN 1
The channel frequency is
assigned to express input port
number 1.
• IN 2
The channel frequency is
assigned to express input port
number 2.
• IN 3
The channel frequency is
assigned to express input port
number 3.
• Add1
The channel frequency coming
from Tributary board is assigned
to add & drop input port number
1.
• Add2
The channel frequency coming
from Tributary board is assigned
to add & drop input port number
2.
• Add3
The channel frequency coming
from Tributary board is assigned
to add & drop input port number
3.
• Add4
The channel frequency coming
from Tributary board is assigned
to add & drop input port number
4.
Default value: 0.
Power in dBm The power value to be applied between
input and output port for transmission
channel optimization.
From -27 to 20 dBm.
Default value: -27 dBm.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersTDMX and WMAN Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-71
Table 9-30 WMAN 3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters Table (continued)
Parameters Description Possible Values
Power Maintain This parameter makes part of a process
which guarantees the channel output power
if:
• Power Maintain is Enabled, A�D
• Background Control Process is
Enabled, A�D
• Correction Process is Enabled, A�D
• Control/Correction Type is set to
Power
• Enabled
• Disabled
Default value: Enabled.
�ote: To know how to configure WMA�3x74 channels, refer to “Configuring
Channels on WMA� 3x74 boards” (p. 9-95)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersTDMX and WMAN Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-72 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Configuring Boards
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes board configuration procedures.
Contents
Configuring ETHCWorking Mode 9-74
Managing ETHC Cross Connections 9-75
Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation 9-77
Configuring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power 9-78
Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power 9-79
Configuring WMA� Laser Power 9-80
Configuring TRBx Frequency 9-81
Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters 9-82
Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria 9-83
Configuring 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet Mapping 9-84
Configuring LOFA11xx APSD 9-85
Configuring Contradirectionality 9-86
Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board 9-87
Configuring ALCTWorking Mode 9-88
Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism 9-90
Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile 9-91
Configuring TDMX 1180 Output Power 9-92
Configuring WMA� Provisioning Parameters 9-93
Configuring WMA� 1100 Equalization Parameter 9-94
Configuring Channels on WMA� 3x74 boards 9-95
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-73
Configuring ETHC Working Mode
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure ETHC working mode.
Before you begin
Board View window is displayed.
How to configure ETHC working mode
To configure ETHC working mode, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board>Modify specific equipment configuration
Result:The Specific parameter configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For CONF_MODE parameter, select the relevant value from the following list:
• Concentrator_Auto
• AddDrop_Manual
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
See Also
• “About ETHC Configurations” (p. 9-5)
• Table 9-15, “ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table” (p. 9-58)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring ETHC Working Mode
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-74 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing ETHC Cross Connections
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want:
• to display ETHC cross connections
• to create ETHC cross connection in an Add & Drop context.
The VLAN Cross Connection Management Window
The VLAN Cross Connection Management window shows:
• vertically: the ports (1 to 9) for both L13 and L14 10 Gbps optical lines. The
User-Client channel numbers (51-59 and/or 100-999, depending on the ETHC
configuration mode) are displayed next to the port number.
• horizontally: the User-Client ports (1 to 12, depending on ETHC working mode)
which supports the User-Client channels. The User-Client channel numbers (51-59
and/or 100-999, depending on the ETHC configuration mode) are displayed next to
the port number.
When applicable a graphical link shows the cross connection between a User-Client
channel port and an ETHC line port. Each port number is associated with a channel
number.
Before you begin
• ETHC board view is displayed.
• To understand the content of this window , refer to “The VLA� Cross Connection
Management Window” (p. 9-75).
How to display ETHC cross connections
To display ETHC cross connections, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board> Manage ETHC Cross Connections....
Result:The VLAN Cross Connection Management window is displayed.
If necessary, refer to “The VLA� Cross Connection Management Window” (p. 9-75)to understand the content of this window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Cancel to finish.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsManaging ETHC Cross Connections
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-75
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to create ETHC cross connections in an Add & Drop context
To create ETHC cross connections in an Add & Drop context, perform the following
steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If necessary, to remind how channel and port numbers are managed, refer to “About
ETHC Configurations” (p. 9-5).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that ETHC working mode is set to AddDrop_Manual.
To know how to configure the ETHC working mode, refer to “Configuring ETHC
Working Mode” (p. 9-74)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Board> Manage ETHC Cross Connections....
Result:The VLAN Cross Connection Management window is displayed.
If necessary, refer to “The VLA� Cross Connection Management Window” (p. 9-75)to understand the content of this window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform one of the following:
• To create an Add & Drop cross connection:
1. Enter a channel number (picked from range 100 to 990) associated with a
User-Client port (Horizontal)
2. Enter the same channel number to the selected User-Client port.
3. Keep clicked the selected port number and drag until the target port of either L13
or L14 lines.
• To create a path-through cross connection:
1. Enter a channel number associated with one port of either L13 or L14 lines.
2. Enter the same channel number to the selected port.
3. Keep clicked the selected port number and drag until the target port of the lines.
Reminder:
In case of migration from Concentrator mode to Add & Drop mode , you can:
• Keep the existing channels numbered from 51 to 59. For any circumstances, if you
want to redesign the way your services are handled, you will need to delete these
existing cross connections and to create new ones.
• Implement the new channels by picking the channel numbers from the range: 100 to
999.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If necessary, repeat from Step 4 until the end of cross connection process.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsManaging ETHC Cross Connections
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-76 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure 2xGBE_FC board signal type transportation.
Before you begin
Board View window is displayed.
How to configure 2xGBE_FC board signal type transportation
To configure 2xGBE_FC board signal type transportation, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board>Modify specific equipment configuration
Result:The Specific parameter configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For Signal_Type parameter, select the relevant value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
See Also
Table 9-16, “2*GE_FC Signal Type Transportation Parameters Table” (p. 9-59)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-77
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure TRBx or ALCT laser output power
Before you begin
Board View window is displayed.
How to configure TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power
To configure TRBx or ALCT laser output power, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board>Optical Power Level Configuration
Result:The ALC & Output power level configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the relevant pre-emphasis value for the selected channel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Apply.
See Also
Table 9-21, “TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table” (p. 9-62)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-78 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure LOFA laser output power.
Before you begin
Board View window is displayed.
How to configure LOFA Laser Output Power
To configure LOFA11xx laser output power, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board > APT/MSV.
Result:The APT/VOA configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For each required parameter, select the relevant value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
See Also
“LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters” (p. 9-65)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-79
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring WMAN Laser Power
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure WMA� laser output power.
Before you begin
Board View window is displayed.
How to configure WMAN Output Power
To configure WMA� laser output power, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board>Optical Power Level Configuration
Result:The ALC & Output power level configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the relevant attenuation parameter value for each selected element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Apply.
See Also
• Table 9-22, “WMA� 1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Table”
(p. 9-63)
• Table 9-23, “WMA� 3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Table” (p. 9-63)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring WMAN Laser Power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-80 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring TRBx Frequency
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure TRBx frequency.
Before you begin
Board View window is displayed.
How to configure TRBx Frequency
To configure TRBx frequency, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board > Modify equipment configuration
Result:The Modify Equipment parameter window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the list, click on the frequency corresponding to required wavelength.
Result:The selected frequency is displayed on the left.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring TRBx Frequency
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-81
Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure TRBx transmission parameters.
Before you begin
Board View window is displayed.
How to configure TRBx transmission parameters
To configure TRBx transmission parameters, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board > Modify specific equipment configuration.
Result:The Specific parameter configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For each required parameter, select the relevant value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
See Also
Table 9-12, “TRBx Transmission Parameters Table” (p. 9-55)
Good to Know
Depending on the value you assigned to Line State at TRBx declaration, you may need to
take an action on TRBx transmission parameters:
If you have set Line State to ... and you want to ...
ON disable the optical interface emission and reception, then
you must set:
• Force LOSS to Activated,
• APSD Control to Laser Forced Off.
Refer to: “Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC
Boards Laser” (p. 9-111)
OFF enable the optical interface, then you must set Force
LOSS to Un-Activated.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring TRBx Transmission Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-82 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria
Purpose
Use this procedure to set the TRBx shutdown criteria.
Before you begin
User-Client OGPI transmission block is displayed
How to configure TRBx Shutdown Criteria
To configure TRBx shutdown criteria, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Transmission > Shutdown Criteria Configuration.
Result:The Shutdown Criteria Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on the relevant radio button to change.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
See Also
Table 9-24, “TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table” (p. 9-64)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring TRBx Shutdown Criteria
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-83
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet Mapping
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to configure the 10 GBE LA� data frame GFP-F
encapsulation into G.709 frame for 40 Gps TRBC.
Before you begin
• 40 Gps TRBC is declared.
• XFP module(s) is/are declared.
• Cabling is performed.
• Transmission update is performed.
• Transmission View is displayed.
How to configure 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet mapping
To configure 10 GBE LA� data frame GFP-F encapsulation into G.709 frame for 40 Gps
TRBC, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that prerequisites are fulfilled (Refer to “Before you begin” (p. 9-84)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click Transmission block port#x-ODU2 (where x = 1,2,3 or 4 depending on the
number of XFP in service) and select Ethernet Mapping.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Depending on the type of GFP-F encapsulation, tick one of the following:
• Standard: This option blocks the Start of Frame, Ethernet Preambule and Ordered
Sets.
• Proprietary: This option lets the Start of Frame, Ethernet Preambule and Ordered
Sets to be transmitted into the G.709 frame according to ITU-T Serie G, Supplement
43, § 7.3
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet Mapping
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-84 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Configuring LOFA11xx APSD
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure LOFA11xx APSD.
Before you begin
Board View window is displayed.
How to configure LOFA APSD
To configure LOFA11xx APSD, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board > APSD Configuration.
Result:The APSD Management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select a LOFA11xx stage and click Configuration....
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The APSD Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From the APSD Control list, select the required value and click OK.
See Also
“LOFA11xx APSD Parameters” (p. 9-68)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring LOFA11xx APSD
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-85
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring Contradirectionality
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to configure bidirectionality for:
• 2 unidirectional horizontal LOFA11xx,
• 2 WMA�1100.
Before you begin
• The 2 boards to link are declared.
• If applicable, the 2 LOFA11xx boards are unidirectional.
• Connectors are in service,
• Cabling has been declared and activated,
• One board is selected.
• Board view window is displayed.
How to configure Bidirectionality
To configure bidirectionality, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board > Modify Equipment Configuration.
Result:The Modify Equipment parameters window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the relevant fields, enter the identification of the contradirectional board:
• Rack number,
• subrack number,
• Slot number.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK to finish.
See Also
• “Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards” (p. 9-38)
• “Declaring WMA�1100 Boards” (p. 9-47)
• Table 9-11, “Contradirectionality Parameters table” (p. 9-54)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring Contradirectionality
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-86 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure the BMDX band associated to a CMDX board.
Before you begin
CMDX Board View window is displayed.
How to configure the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX
To configure the BMDX band associated to a CMDX board, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board > Modify Equipment Configuration...
Result:The Modify Equipment parameters window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For Band parameter, select the relevant band number.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
See Also
Table 9-10, “CMDX Band Parameter Table” (p. 9-54)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-87
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring ALCT Working Mode
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure ALCT board working mode as static or dynamic.
Good to Know
The ALCT (Automatic Level ConTrol) board hosts the 1626 LM power regulation
function which performs the following:
• enables to maintain the booster input at a constant power,
• helps to keep low enough the transmitted power per channel for a low channel count
to avoid non-linear effects on working channels,
• helps to compensate for the power variations when some channels are missing.
As a consequence, the ALCT board configuration has a major impact on the booster input
power.
ALCT Working Modes
The ALCT board works according to the two following modes:
• Static (or Disable) Mode
In this mode the ALCT board output power is manually set at a constant value. The
booster input power varies depending on this fixed value and the number of channels.
To manage the ALCT board output power, refer to “Configuring TRBx or ALCT
Laser Output Power” (p. 9-78).
• Dynamic Mode
In this mode, a set point value is defined as the booster input power (Power
Configuration section). In this mode the ALCT board will adapt dynamically its
output power to maintain the booster input power at this set point value whatever the
number of active channels is.
– If all or most of the channels are present, the role of ALCT in booster input power
will be insignificant.
– If some channels disappear, ALCT output power will rapidly increase to
compensate for the resultant power loss.
Before you begin
• Rx LOFA of relevant node is selected.
• Related OTS transmission view is displayed.
• Port#1-OMS is selected.
How to configure ALCT working mode
To configure ALCT working mode, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click and select ALC Management.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring ALCT Working Mode
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-88 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Result:The Automatic Laser Control Management window is displayed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform one or more of the following:
To specify the related ALCT board location:
1. From Dynamic ALC Configuration section, enter related ALCT board rack, subrack
and slot numbers.
2. Click Set.
3. End.
To set the configuration mode:
1. From Mode Configuration section, click the relevant radio button. For mode details
refer to “ALCTWorking Modes” (p. 9-88).
2. End.
To set the booster input power set point value:
1. In the Power Configuration section, enter a value.
The value displayed into the grayed part of Booster input is the last value set.
2. Click Set.
The new set point value is taken into account.
3. End.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring ALCT Working Mode
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-89
Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism.
Before you begin
ALCT Board View window is displayed.
How to configure ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism
To configure ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism, perform the following
steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board > Modify specific equipment configuration.
Result:The Specific parameter configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For SBS_SUPPR parameter, select the relevant value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
See Also
Table 9-14, “ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Parameter Table” (p. 9-58)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering
Mechanism...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-90 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure TDMX 1180 port profile.
Before you begin
TDMX 1180 Board View window is displayed.
How to configure TDMX 1180 port profile
To configure TDMX 1180 port profile, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board > Modify specific equipment configuration.
Result:The Specific parameter configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For ACC_WDM and BLCK_LVL parameters, select the relevant value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
See Also
• Table 9-17, “TDMX 1180 Port Profile Parameters Table” (p. 9-59),
• “Configuring TDMX 1180 Output Power” (p. 9-92),
• Table 9-29, “TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table” (p. 9-70).
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring TDMX 1180 Port Profile
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-91
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring TDMX 1180 Output Power
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure TDMX 1180 Output Power.
Before you begin
TDMX Board View window is displayed.
How to configure TDMX 1180 Output Power
To configure TDMX 1180 output power, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board> Configure TDMX 1180...
Result:
• The TDMX Port Configuration window is displayed.
• The port number and related channel frequency are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For any port number/channel frequency, select the required output value as described in
Table 9-29, “TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table” (p. 9-70).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Set Selected Port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Apply to finish.
See Also
• Table 9-29, “TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table” (p. 9-70),
• “Board Specific Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-55).
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring TDMX 1180 Output Power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-92 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring WMAN Provisioning Parameters
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure WMA� provisioning parameters.
Before you begin
WMAN Board View window is displayed.
How to configure WMAN provisioning parameters
To configure WMA� provisioning parameters, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board > Modify specific equipment configuration.
Result:The Specific parameter configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For all the parameter displayed in the list, select the relevant value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
See Also
• Table 9-18, “WMA� 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table” (p. 9-59)
• Table 9-19, “WMA� 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table” (p. 9-60)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring WMAN Provisioning Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-93
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring WMAN 1100 Equalization Parameter
Purpose
Use this procedure to equalize all the channels going through WMA� 1100 board.
Before you begin
• WMA� 1100 equalization parameter must be done at commissioning phase only.
• Channel must be blocked.
• WMAN 1100 Board View window is displayed.
How to configure WMAN 1100 equalization parameter
To configure WMA� 1100 equalization parameter, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board > Modify specific equipment configuration.
Result:The Specific parameter configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For PGE Commissioning parameter displayed in the list, perform the following steps:
1. Select Odd or Even and click OK.
Result:
• The equalization process starts for the channels of the selected parity.
• The window is open until the end of equalization process.
• At the end of the process, the value is reset to Off.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Continue the channel equalization process of the same parity on other nodes of your
network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Once you have performed the channel equalization process of a given parity on all nodes
of your network, repeat the process for the other channel parity node by node.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Once all channel equalization of all nodes have been performed, reset PGE
Commissioning to Off on each relevant node.
See Also
Table 9-18, “WMA� 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table” (p. 9-59)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring WMAN 1100 Equalization Parameter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-94 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring Channels on WMAN 3x74 boards
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure channels on WMA� 3174 boards.
Before you begin
WMAN 3174 Board View window is displayed.
How to configure channels on WMAN 3174 boards
To configure channels on WMA� 3174 boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board >Configure WMAN 3x74....
Result:The Channel Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For all the parameter displayed in the list, select the relevant value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Apply.
See Also
“WMA�3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-70)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring Channels on WMAN 3x74 boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-95
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Setting Boards In/Out of Service
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to set boards in service or
out of service.
Contents
Setting a Board In Service 9-97
Setting a Board Out of Service 9-98
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Setting Boards In/Out of ServiceOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-96 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Setting a Board In Service
Purpose
Use this procedure to set a board in service.
Before you begin
�ote: This procedure does not apply to SFP/XFP modules. To know how to set a
SFP/XFP module in/out of service, refer to:
• “Setting a SFP/XFPModule In Service” (p. 9-102)
• “Setting a SFP/XFPModule Out of Service” (p. 9-103)
• Subrack View window is displayed.
• The board operational status is Out of Service (�o red padlock).
How to set a board in service
To set a board in service, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment > Set in Service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the dialog box click OK.
Result:The board operational status becomes In Service (Red padlock is displayed).
Good to Know
For 40 Gbps transponders, you can set the WDM line connector in service only if:
1. WDMModule output connector is in service.
2. VOA input connector is in service.
3. Cabling between WDMModule output connector and VOA input or BOFA input is
declared.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Setting Boards In/Out of ServiceSetting a Board In Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-97
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Setting a Board Out of Service
Purpose
Use this procedure to set a board out of service.
Before you begin
�ote: This procedure does not apply to SFP/XFP modules. To know how to set a
SFP/XFP module in/out of service, refer to:
• “Setting a SFP/XFPModule In Service” (p. 9-102)
• “Setting a SFP/XFPModule Out of Service” (p. 9-103)
• Subrack View window is displayed.
• The board operational status is In Service (Red padlock is displayed).
How to set a board out of service
To set a board out of service, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment > Set out of Service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the dialog box click OK.
Result:
• The board operational status becomes Out of Service (�o red padlock).
• Related alarms are inhibited and will no longer be raised.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Setting Boards In/Out of ServiceSetting a Board Out of Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-98 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Managing SFP/XFP Modules
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to manage SFP/XFP
modules.
Contents
About SFP/XFPModules and Board Compatibility 9-100
Declaring a SFP/XFPModule 9-101
Setting a SFP/XFPModule In Service 9-102
Setting a SFP/XFPModule Out of Service 9-103
Undeclaring/Removing SFP/XFPModules 9-104
Displaying SFP/XFPModule Payload 9-105
Changing an SFP or an XFP 9-106
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-99
About SFP/XFP Modules and Board Compatibility
SFP means Small Form Factor Pluggable.
XFP means eXtended Form Factor Pluggable.
SFP/XFP modules are hot-swappable optical transceivers which plug in the following
boards:
For ... You can plug ... And possible slot#are ...
ETHC boards until 9 SFP modules to connect client lines 1 to 9
1 XFP module to connect WDM line (�ot
Mandatory)
13 or 14
2*GE_FC
boards
until 2 SFP modules to connect client lines 1 to 9
1 SFP module to connect WDM line (Mandatory) 13 or 14
TRBD1191
boards
1 XFP to connect client lines (Mandatory) 1
TRBC boards• 10 Gbps: until 4 SFP modules to connect client
lines
• 40 Gbps: until 4 XFP modules to connect client
lines
1 to 4
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesAbout SFP/XFP Modules and Board Compatibility
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-100 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Declaring a SFP/XFP Module
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare SFP/XFP modules
Before you begin
Board View window is displayed.
How to declare a SFP/XFP Module
To declare a SFP/XFP module, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on an empty slot dedicated to SFP/XFP modules.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Set.
Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.
Result:The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Result:The module appears in the board view with operational state In Service (Red
padlock is displayed).
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesDeclaring a SFP/XFP Module
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-101
Setting a SFP/XFP Module In Service
Purpose
Use this procedure to set SFP/XFP module in service.
Before you begin
• Board View window is displayed.
• The module operational status is Out of Service (�o red padlock).
How to set a SFP/XFP module in service
To set a SFP/XFP module in service, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment > Set in Service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the dialog box click OK.
Result:The module operational status becomes In Service (Red padlock is
displayed).
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesSetting a SFP/XFP Module In Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-102 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Setting a SFP/XFP Module Out of Service
Purpose
Use this procedure to set a SFP/XFP module out of service.
Before you begin
• Board View window is displayed.
• The module operational status is In Service (Red padlock is displayed).
• The module has no configured cabling.
• All connectors are out of service.
How to set a SFP/XFP module out of service
To set a SFP/XFP module out of service, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment > Set out of Service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the dialog box click OK.
Result:The module operational status becomes Out of Service (�o red padlock).
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesSetting a SFP/XFP Module Out of Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-103
Undeclaring/Removing SFP/XFP Modules
Purpose
Use this procedure to undeclare SFP/XFP modules.
Before you begin
• Board View window is displayed.
• Module operational status must be set to Out of Service (�o red padlock displayed).
• For modules on concentrators, perform the following:
1. Remove loopbacks, then
2. Delete cable configuration.
Attention:Do not unplug a board during a firmware download (Hardware failure
LED in yellow). Otherwise the board will not restart and you will have to return it for
manufacturer repair.
How to undeclare/remove SFP/XFP
To undeclare/remove SFP/XFP modules, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Equipment>Remove.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the dialog box click OK.
Result:The board disappears from the subrack view.
An UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present) is raised if the board is still plugged intothe slot
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesUndeclaring/Removing SFP/XFP Modules
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-104 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Displaying SFP/XFP Module Payload
Purpose
Use this procedure to display SFP/XFP module payload.
Before you begin
Module View window is displayed.
How to display SFP/XFP Module Payload
To display SFP/XFP module payload, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Board > Payload Configuration.
Result:The Payload Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Cancel to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesDisplaying SFP/XFP Module Payload
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-105
Changing an SFP or an XFP
Purpose
Use this procedure when you need to change the current SFP or XFP module of a board.
Before you begin
Board View is displayed.
How to change the current SFP or XFP module of a board
To change the current SFP or XFP module of a board, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Equipment> Modify...
Result:The Create/Modify Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the list, select the XFP_Generic or SFP_Generic entry.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform the following sequence:
1. Disconnect the fibers.
2. Unplug the current module.
3. Plug the new module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Equipment> Modify...
Result:The Create/Modify Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 From the list, select the new module type entry.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click OK.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesChanging an SFP or an XFP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-106 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Activating Firmware
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the displayed information and the procedure related to firmware
management.
Contents
Firmware Activation Displayed Information 9-107
Activating Firmware 9-108
Firmware Activation Displayed Information
Table 9-31, “Firmware Activation Displayed Information” (p. 9-107) describes firmware
activation displayed information.
Table 9-31 Firmware Activation Displayed Information
Information Description
Board Type Displays the board acronym.
Location Displays the board location in the subrack with the following sequence:
• rack#
• subrack#
• slot#
Firmware
Version
Displays the firmware version
Firmware
Status
Displays the firmware status, which can take the following values:
• In Service: firmware is up to date and correctly loaded.
• Not Accessible: firmware download is not successfully completed. The
board is unstable. This state may require a manual reset.
• Downloading: firmware download is in progress.
• Misaligned: mismatch between the last downloaded version and the
current version. This state may require an activation.
See Also
“Activating Firmware” (p. 9-108)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Activating FirmwareOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-107
Activating Firmware
Purpose
Use this procedure to activate board firmware.
Before you begin
• 1626 LM GUI is started.
• Board firmware status is Misaligned.
How to activate board firmware
To activate board firmware, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration > Firmware activation...
Result:The Firmware activation window is displayed, displaying firmware
information for each board supporting a firmware.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To activate all misaligned boards, perform the following steps:
1. Tick Activate all check box.
2. Click Activate.
3. Go to End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To activate a selection of misaligned boards, perform the following steps:
1. Select one or several misaligned boards.
2. Click Activate.
3. Go to End.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Activating FirmwareActivating Firmware
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-108 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board Laser
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the parameters and procedures to perform to manage TRBx, ETHC
and 2*GE_FC boards laser.
Contents
Laser Control Parameters 9-109
Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser 9-111
Laser Control Parameters
Good to Know
• Port#1-OGPI refers to Client / User side.
• Port#101-OGPI refers to WDM line side.
Table 9-32, “Laser Control Parameters Table” (p. 9-109) describes the parameters you can
manage or display to take control of TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC boards laser.
Table 9-32 Laser Control Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
APSD Control Enables:
• to force the laser to shutdown,
• to let the system to control the
laser.
Disable
The laser is not under operator
control. The system controls the
laser shutdown.
Laser Forced Off
You force the laser to shutdown.
Laser Current
State
Displays the laser operational state. Laser Off/On
See Also
“Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser” (p. 9-111)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board LaserOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-109
Good to Know
Depending on the value you assigned to Line State at TRBx declaration, you may need to
take an action on TRBx laser:
If you have set Line State to ... and you want to ...
ON disable the optical interface emission and reception, then
you must set:
• APSD Control to Laser Forced Off,
• Force LOSS to Activated.
Refer to: “Configuring TRBx Transmission
Parameters” (p. 9-82)
OFF• enable the optical interface, then you must set Force
LOSS to Un-Activated.
Refer to: “Configuring TRBx Transmission
Parameters” (p. 9-82).
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board LaserLaser Control Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-110 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser
Purpose
Use this procedure to control TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC boards laser.
Before you begin
• The transmission view of the related boards is displayed.
• OGPI ports are available.
Port#1-OGPIrefers to Client/User side.
Port#101-OGPIrefers to WDM line side.
How to control TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC boards laser
To control TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC boards laser, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the OGPI port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click and select APSD Configuration...
Result:The APSD Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To force the laser to shutdown, perform the following:
1. From APSD Control list box select Laser Forced Off.
2. Click OK.
3. Go to End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To let the system to control the laser, perform the following steps:
1. From APSD Control list box select Disable.
2. Click OK.
3. Go to End.
See Also
“Laser Control Parameters” (p. 9-109)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board LaserControlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-111
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Good to Know
Depending on the value you assigned to Line State at TRBx declaration, you may need to
take an action on TRBx laser:
If you have set Line State to ... and you want to ...
ON disable the optical interface emission and reception,
then you must set:
• APSD Control to Laser Forced Off,
• Force LOSS to Activated.
Refer to: “Configuring TRBx Transmission
Parameters” (p. 9-82)
OFF• enable the optical interface, then you must set Force
LOSS to Un-Activated.
Refer to: “Configuring TRBx Transmission
Parameters” (p. 9-82).
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board LaserControlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-112 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Managing External Points
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the parameters and procedures to perform when you want to manage
external points.
Contents
About External Points 9-113
External Points Parameters 9-115
Displaying all External Points 9-116
Managing External Input Points 9-117
Managing External Output Points 9-118
Filtering External Input Points 9-119
Filtering External Output Points 9-120
About External Points
External points are devices outside of the 1626 LM which connect to the 1626 LM via
HSKU boards.
Each HSKU board can connect up to:
• 9 external input points, and
• 9 external output points.
External input points
External input points trigger housekeeping alarm, based on specific circumstances.
For example:
• door open,
• intrusion or fire detection,
• temperature limit reach,
• hygrometry limit reach.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-113
External output points
External output points are triggered by the 1626 LM.
For example:
• Flashing light,
• Fire alarm klaxon.
The link [External Point - 1626 LM] can be assimilated to a circuit which status can be
open or closed.
A circuit logic can determine the external point activation or inactivation, depending on
the circuit status.
The following table gives the rules of external points activation.
If ... Then ...
External input logic is active
closed
The housekeeping alarm is raised.
A flag is displayed in the External Points View window.
External output point status is
active closed
The external device is triggered.
A flag is displayed in the External Points View window.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsAbout External Points
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-114 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
External Points Parameters
External input and output points have their own parameters:
• Table 9-33, “External Input Point Parameters Table” (p. 9-115) describes External
input point parameters
• Table 9-34, “External Output Point Parameters” (p. 9-115) describes External output
point parameters.
Table 9-33 External Input Point Parameters Table
Parameters Description Possible Values
Board HSKU board location in charge of
external point interface• External point type
• HSKU board number
• External point number
User Label External Point identification Alphanumeric character string.
Operator configurable.
Logic Circuit logic which determine
external point activation• Active closed
• Active open
External Point Circuit status Closed
�ot operator configurable.
Probable Cause The type of alarm which will be
raised if the circuit logic and the
circuit status match.
Housekeeping alarm
�ot operator configurable.
Table 9-34 External Output Point Parameters
Parameters Description Possible Values
Board HSKU board location in charge of
external point interface• External point type
• HSKU board number
• External point number
User Label External Point identification Alphanumeric character string.
Operator configurable.
Logic Circuit logic which determine
external point activation• Active closed
• Active open
External Point Circuit status• Open
• Closed
Mode The type of configuration mode. Manual
�ot operator configurable.
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsExternal Points Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-115
Displaying all External Points
Purpose
Use this procedure to display all external points.
Before you begin
• The 1626 LM GUI is started, or
• The input points are displayed, or
• The output points are displayed.
How to display all external points
To display all external points, perform one of the following actions, depending on the
display:
From the 1626 LM menu bar:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Views>External Points.
Result:The External Points View window is displayed.
From the input or output points list display:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click and select Show All External Points.
Result:The External Points View window is displayed.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsDisplaying all External Points
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-116 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing External Input Points
Purpose
Use this procedure to manage external input points.
Before you begin
• External Points View window is displayed, or
• Input points only are displayed
How to manage External Input Points
To manage external input points, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select an external input point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click and select Configuration...
Result:The External Input Point Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 According to your needs, complete the User Label or select the relevant Logic.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsManaging External Input Points
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-117
Managing External Output Points
Purpose
Use this procedure to manage external output points.
Before you begin
• External Points View window is displayed, or
• Output points only are displayed
How to manage External Input Points
To manage external output points, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select an external output point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click and select Configuration...
Result:The External Output Point Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 According to your needs, complete the User Label or select the relevant External Point
status.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsManaging External Output Points
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-118 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Filtering External Input Points
Purpose
Use this procedure to filter external input points.
Before you begin
• External Points View window is displayed.
• Input and output points are displayed, or
• Output points are displayed only.
How to filter External Input Points
To filter external input points, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the External Points View window, right-click and select Show External Input
Points.
Result:The input points are displayed.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsFiltering External Input Points
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-119
Filtering External Output Points
Purpose
Use this procedure to filter external output points.
Before you begin
• External Points View window is displayed.
• Input and output points are displayed, or
• Input points are displayed only.
How to filter External Output Points
To filter external output points, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the External Points View window, right-click and select Show External Output
Points.
Result:The output points are displayed.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsFiltering External Output Points
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-120 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the procedures to follow when you need to instal and cable an
EMPM1000 for upgrading LOFA up to 23 dBm.
For any specific power value tuning, refer to 1626 LM System Turn-up Guide - 3AL
75138 GAAA.
Contents
Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without
OMSP
9-122
Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with
OMSP
9-124
Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM 9-126
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-121
Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or aB-OADM without OMSP
Purpose
Use this procedure when you need to instal and cable an EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal
or a B-OADM without OMSP.
Before you begin
• You must have the cabling plan of your configuration.
• If EMPM1000 is implemented for a preamplifier, collect remote inventory of BMDX
boards.
How to upgrade a LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without OMSP
To upgrade a LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without OMSP,
perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Plug EMPM1000 into the slot immediately adjacent to the LOFA to upgrade.
If:
• LOFA is in slot n, n as an odd number, you must plug the EMPM1000 into slot n+1.
• LOFA is in slot n, n as an even number, you must plug the EMPM1000 into slot n-1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Assign LOFA COVER_DISABLE specific parameter to Cover_Disable.
Result:You can remove the LOFA safety cover without traffic interruption.
ATTENTION: You have 5 minutes maximum to perform the requiredconnections. When these 5 minutes have passed, LOFA will shut down.
Refer to Table 9-13, “LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table” (p. 9-57)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the LOFA safety cover.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Connect fiber reference 1AB-36108-0002 from EMPM output port to LOFA EMPM input
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the LOFA safety cover.
Result:The system detects that the safety cover has been replaced and turns the
COVER_DISABLE specific parameter to Cover_Enable.
ATTENTION: Do not remove the cover once it has been replaced. Otherwise,you take the risk to shut the LOFA down.
Refer to Table 9-13, “LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table” (p. 9-57)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a
B-OADM without OMSP...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-122 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform EMPM1000 feedback cabling as follows:
If LOFA is... Then...
A booster Connect EMPM Mon input port to 1rst stage
Mon input port of related contradirectional
LOFA.
A preamplifier Refer to BMDX remote inventory information.
If BMDX reference is:
• 3AL-95504-Ax-AA01, then connect
EMPM Mon input port to Demux output
port of the band dedicated to ALCT board.
• 3AL-95504-Bx-AA01, then there is no
optical cabling to perform. EMPM
feedback is performed via backpanel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Set ports in service for all involved boards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform logical cabling in compliance with physical cabling.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a
B-OADM without OMSP...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-123
Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or aB-OADM with OMSP
Purpose
Use this procedure when you need to instal and cable an EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal
or a B-OADM with OMSP.
Before you begin
• You must have the cabling plan of your configuration.
• Remind that only 3 EMPM1000 boards fit into a B-OADM shelf which supports
OMSP.
How to upgrade a LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with OMSP
To upgrade a LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with OMSP,
perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Plug EMPM1000 into the slot immediately adjacent to the LOFA to upgrade.
If:
• LOFA is in slot n, n as an odd number, you must plug the EMPM1000 into slot n+1.
• LOFA is in slot n, n as an even number, you must plug the EMPM1000 into slot n-1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Assign LOFA COVER_DISABLE specific parameter to Cover_Disable.
Result:You can remove the LOFA safety cover without traffic interruption.
ATTENTION: You have 5 minutes maximum to perform the requiredconnections. When these 5 minutes have passed, LOFA will shut down.
Refer to Table 9-13, “LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table” (p. 9-57)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the LOFA safety cover.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Connect fiber reference 1AB-36108-0002 from EMPM output port to LOFA EMPM input
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the LOFA safety cover.
Result:The system detects that the safety cover has been replaced and turns the
COVER_DISABLE specific parameter to Cover_Enable.
ATTENTION: Do not remove the cover once it has been replaced. Otherwise,you take the risk to shut the LOFA down.
Refer to Table 9-13, “LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table” (p. 9-57)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a
B-OADM with OMSP...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-124 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform EMPM1000 feedback cabling as follows:
If LOFA is... Then...
A booster Connect EMPM Mon input port to 1rst stage
Mon input port of related contradirectional
LOFA.
A preamplifier Connect EMPM Mon input port to OCPU Mon
input port of the corresponding OTS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Set ports in service for all involved boards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform logical cabling in compliance with physical cabling.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a
B-OADM with OMSP...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-125
Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM
Purpose
Use this procedure when you need to instal and cable an EMPM1000 in a in a
T/R-OADM.
Before you begin
You must have the cabling plan of your configuration.
How to upgrade a LOFA with EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM
To upgrade a LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a in a T/R-OADM, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Plug EMPM1000 into the slot immediately adjacent to the LOFA to upgrade.
If:
• LOFA is in slot n, n as an odd number, you must plug the EMPM1000 into slot n+1.
• LOFA is in slot n, n as an even number, you must plug the EMPM1000 into slot n-1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Assign LOFA COVER_DISABLE specific parameter to Cover_Disable.
Result:You can remove the LOFA safety cover without traffic interruption.
ATTENTION: You have 5 minutes maximum to perform the requiredconnections. When these 5 minutes have passed, LOFA will shut down.
Refer to Table 9-13, “LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table” (p. 9-57)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the LOFA safety cover.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Connect fiber reference 1AB-36108-0002 from EMPM output port to LOFA EMPM input
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the LOFA safety cover.
Result:The system detects that the safety cover has been replaced and turns the
COVER_DISABLE specific parameter to Cover_Enable.
ATTENTION: Do not remove the cover once it has been replaced. Otherwise,you take the risk to shut the LOFA down.
Refer to Table 9-13, “LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table” (p. 9-57)
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-126 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform EMPM1000 feedback cabling as follows:
If LOFA is... Then...
A booster Connect EMPM Mon input port to 1rst stage
Mon input port of related contradirectional
LOFA.
A preamplifier Depending on the configuration:
• In case of TR-OADM: connect EMPM Mon
input port to TDMX Mon input port.
• In case of R-OADM with BMDX reference
3AL-95504-Ax-AA01: connect EMPM
Mon input port to Demux output port of
the band dedicated to ALCT board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Set ports in service for all involved boards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform logical cabling in compliance with physical cabling.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
9-127
10 10R-OADM and TR-OADM
Configuration
Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the parameters and the associated procedures for configuring the
different types of R-OADM and TR-OADM nodes.
Contents
About R-OADM and TR-OADM 10-2
R-OADM and TR-OADMMain characteristics 10-3
Boards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM �odes 10-5
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks 10-7
R/TR-OADM �etwork Procedures/WMA�3x74 Based 10-9
Creating a Transmission Path 10-10
Deleting a Transmission Path 10-13
R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMA�3x74 Based 10-16
Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections 10-17
Blocking a Channel Connection 10-19
Setting an Add & Drop Connection 10-20
Setting an Express Connection 10-23
R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMA�1100 Based 10-26
R-OADM/WMA�1100 Based Configuration Parameters 10-27
Configuring R-OADM with WMA�1100 Boards 10-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-1
About R-OADM and TR-OADM
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the main characteristics and the boards involved in:
• Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer (R-OADM), or
• Tunable and Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer (TR-OADM).
Contents
R-OADM and TR-OADMMain characteristics 10-3
Boards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM �odes 10-5
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks 10-7
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
R-OADM and TR-OADM Main characteristics
R-OADM and TR-OADM Main Characteristics
The following table describes the main characteristics of a Reconfigurable or a Tunable
and Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer.
Table 10-1 R-OADM and TR-OADM Main Characteristics
R-OADM and TR-OADM Main Characteristics Benefits
Remotely reconfigurable• Minimizes on-site intervention.
• Makes network planning more flexible in the
sense that channels can be dynamically added,
dropped or passed through according customer
needs.
Fixed wavelength transponder architecture (R-OADM
only)• Saves initial customer investments in
transponders.
• Enables migration from fixed OADM to
Reconfigurable OADM at a reasonable cost.
Transponder tunability architecture (TR-OADM only) Enables transponders to be remotely set at any
available wavelength.
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMR-OADM and TR-OADM Main characteristics
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-3
Table 10-1 R-OADM and TR-OADM Main Characteristics (continued)
R-OADM and TR-OADM Main Characteristics Benefits
Connectivity The connectivity degree of R-OADM or a TR-OADM
depends on the number of nodes that one of these
configurations connect to.
For example:
• if a R-OADM or TR-OADM node connects to 2
nodes, the node will be degree 2.
• if a R-OADM or TR-OADM node connects to 3
or 4 nodes, the node will be degree 3 or degree 4.
The current release enables
• R-OADM degree 2 connectivity with
WMA�1100 boards.
• R-OADM degree 2 to 8 connectivity with
WMA�3x74 boards.
• TR-OADM degree 2 to 8 connectivity.
• TR-OADM with multidirectional Add & Drop
Amultidirectional Add & Drop configuration
enables to connect the frequency of a given
transponder to any available direction.
Current release handles multidirectional Add &
Drop configurations as follows:
– 2 directions + 2 Add & Drop blocks.
– 3 directions + 1 Add & Drop blocks.
– 4 directions + 4 Add & Drop blocks.
– 5 directions + 3 Add & Drop blocks.
– 6 directions + 2 Add & Drop blocks.
– 7 directions + 1 Add & Drop blocks.
– 8 directions
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMR-OADM and TR-OADM Main characteristics
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Boards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM Nodes
Significant Boards in R-OADM and TR-OADM Nodes
The following table lists the most significant boards involved in R-OADM and
TR-OADM nodes.
Table 10-2 R-OADM and TR-OADM Significant Boards
Boards Function Applicable Configuration
OADC1102 Splits or combines signals for
Express and Add & Drop channels.
R-OADM with WMA�1100.
board
WMA�1100 Controls channel output.
The WMA�1100:
• lets a channel to pass through
with an eventual attenuation,
or
• blocks a channel with a
maximum attenuation for Add
& Drop purpose.
R-OADM
BMDX/CMDX/OMDX Fix MUX/DEMUX R-OADM
OADC1300 Splits or combines signals for
Express and Add & Drop channels.
TR-OADM
OADC1750 Combines signals for dropped
channels.
TR-OADM
OC�C12x0:
• 1220 for degree 2 connectivity
• 1230 for degree 3 connectivity
• 1240 for degree 4 connectivity
• 1280 for degree 4 connectivity
that may be upgraded until
degree 8.
Splits signals for Express and Drop
channels.
TR-OADM
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMBoards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM Nodes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-5
Table 10-2 R-OADM and TR-OADM Significant Boards (continued)
Boards Function Applicable Configuration
WMA�3174 (50 GHz) Associated with TDMX1180 for
transponder tunability, the
WMA�3174 controls channel
output:
• from any input port, lets a
channel to pass through with
an eventual attenuation, or
• blocks a channel with a
maximum attenuation.
TR-OADM
Without TDMX1180, the
WMA�3174 controls channel
output:
• from any input port, lets a
channel to pass through with
an eventual attenuation, or
• blocks a channel with a
maximum attenuation.
R-OADM
WMA�3374 (100 GHz) Controls channel output:
• from any input port, lets a
channel to pass through with
an eventual attenuation, or
• blocks a channel with a
maximum attenuation.
R-OADM
TDMX1180 Controls frequencies and power of
dropped channels.
TR-OADM
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMBoards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM Nodes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks
What you must absolutely know
For the current release, you are recommended:
• To know the cabling plan between transponder boards and associated WMA� ports,
• To know the cabling plan between TDMX and associated transponder boards (for
TR-OADM configurations).
• To have the traffic matrix document to know what the network context is.
• To have the �etwork Description Table (�DT) to know what parameter values must
be assigned for each board of each node.
What are the tasks to perform
R-OADM and TR-OADM configuration can be considered according to two
perspectives:
• From network perspective
• From node perspective
Configuration from network perspective
In this case you are requested to perform procedures which include actions on all nodes
involved in a transmission path. Configuring R or TR-OADM from a network perspective
comes to:
• Create a transmission path.
To know how to create a transmission path, refer to “Creating a Transmission Path”
(p. 10-10)
• Delete a transmission path.
To know how to delete a transmission path, refer to “Deleting a Transmission Path”
(p. 10-13)
Configuration from node perspective
In this case, you are requested to perform unitary procedures without any concern about
the global network context. Performing unitary procedures comes to:
• Create or delete specific cross connections between:
– splitter input and output points, for Express channels,
– splitter input points and TDMX or CMDX output points, for Add & Drop
channels.
TDMX boards are used in TR-OADM context for transponder tunability purposes.
CMDX boards are used in R-OADM context.
• Block a channel connection,
• Set an Add & Drop connection for a given channel,
• Set an Express connection for a given channel.
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMR-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-7
R and TR-OADM configuration depends on the type of WMA� boards which are
implemented into your nodes.
• If your R-OADM configuration is WMA�1100 based, refer to “R-OADM Unitary
Procedures / WMA�1100 Based” (p. 10-26)
• If your R or TR-OADM configuration is WMA�3x74 based, refer to “R/TR-OADM
Unitary Procedures/WMA�3x74 Based” (p. 10-16)
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMR-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 Based
Overview
Purpose
In an R or TR-OADM context, you can be led to manage and configure more than a
specific node. You are led to manage a transmission path also called an OCH Trail. From
one end to the other, the transmission path may involve various nodes across your
network.
This section describes the necessary procedures to manage a transmission path in an R or
TR-OADM with WMA�3x74 boards.
Contents
Creating a Transmission Path 10-10
Deleting a Transmission Path 10-13
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-9
Creating a Transmission Path
Purpose
This topic describes all the required actions that you need to perform if you want to create
a transmission path within your network.
Before you begin
• You are recommended to have the traffic matrix document to know what the network
context is.
• You are recommended to have the �etwork Description Table (�DT) to know what
parameter values must be assigned for each board of each node.
• This procedure applies only if WMA�3x74 boards are used.
• Check that transponders are emitting.
Good to Know
• An OCH Trail represents the path taken by a channel between two termination
points.
• An OCH Group represents a group of channels using the same path between 2
termination points.
How to create a transmission path
To create a transmission path, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Create an Add & Drop connection for each termination points of the transmission path.
• To know how to create an Add & Drop connection for WMA�110 based
configurations, refer to “Configuring R-OADM with WMA�1100 Boards” (p. 10-28)
• To know how to create an Add & Drop connection for WMA�3x74 configurations,
refer to “Setting an Add & Drop Connection” (p. 10-20)
Result:
• If TR-OADM: on the relevant TDMX board, the channel frequency to drop is
assigned to the relevant port number.
• On the WDM side:
– the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: Off.
– the relevant transponder laser is switched on.
• On the relevant WMA� boards, the required channel is assigned to the relevant
Add & Drop input port number which connects the related transponder board.
• Channel output power of relevant WMA� boards is set to minimum (–27 dBm /
Blocked).
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedCreating a Transmission Path
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If requested, for each intermediate entity crossed by the transmission path, create an
Express connection for the channel.
• To know how to create an Express connection for WMA�1100 based configurations,
refer to “Configuring R-OADM with WMA�1100 Boards” (p. 10-28)
• To know how to create an Express connection, refer to “Setting an Express
Connection” (p. 10-23)
Result:On the relevant WMA� boards, the required channel frequency is assigned to
the relevant Express input port number.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Tune the transmission path.
You can tune the transmission path automatically or manually. According to your
operation context, refer to one of the following:
• “How to tune the transmission path automatically” (p. 10-11)
• “How to tune the transmission path manually” (p. 10-12)
How to tune the transmission path automatically
�ote:Automatic transmission path tuning needs SPLM (Smart Photonic Layer
Manager) tool. To know how to use SPLM, refer to 1626LM SPLM User
Provisioning Guide.
To tune the transmission path automatically via SPLM, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Launch SPLM Graphical User Interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Synchronize SPLM with the subnetwork.
�ote: Any action on Rx and Tx Tributary connections at physical or configuration
level, requires SPLM synchronization.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check that the ALC initial target reference power has been assigned once.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the relevant OCH Group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Run the APE process.
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedCreating a Transmission Path
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-11
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to tune the transmission path manually
�ote: For all the following steps, you must follow the signal direction from Tx to Rx.
To tune the transmission path manually (without SPLM), perform the following steps for
all the entities crossed by the OCH Trail:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set all involved amplifiers to GAI� mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set the ALC initial target reference power for all involved ALCT boards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Set channel power of involved WMA�3x and TDMX boards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Update the ALC power resulting from the new configuration for all involved ALCT
boards.
For detailed information, refer to 1626 LM System Turn-up Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Set all involved amplifiers back to Power-MSV mode.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedCreating a Transmission Path
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-12 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Deleting a Transmission Path
Purpose
This topic describes all the required actions that you need to perform if you want to delete
a transmission path from your network.
To delete a transmission path you need to perform the following:
1. Tune the transmission path for deletion.
• To know how to tune the transmission path for deletion automatically, refer to
“How to tune the transmission path for deletion automatically” (p. 10-14)
• To know how to tune the transmission path for deletion manually, refer to “How
to tune the transmission path for deletion manually” (p. 10-14)
2. Block the relevant channel frequency.
3. End.
Before you begin
• You are recommended to have the traffic matrix document to know what the network
context is.
• You are recommended to have the �etwork Description Table (�DT) to know what
parameter values must be assigned for each board of each node.
Good to Know
• An OCH Trail represents the path taken by a channel between two termination
points.
• An OCH Group represents a group of channels using the same path between 2
termination points.
How to delete a transmission path
To delete a transmission path, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Tune the transmission path for deletion.
You can tune the transmission path automatically or manually. According to your
operation context, refer to one of the following:
• “How to tune the transmission path for deletion automatically” (p. 10-14)
• “How to tune the transmission path for deletion manually” (p. 10-14)
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedDeleting a Transmission Path
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-13
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Block the relevant channel frequency.
• For WMA�1100 configurations, set the relevant frequency to state: 0 (BLOCKED).
To know how to block a channel frequency, refer to “Configuring R-OADM with
WMA�1100 Boards” (p. 10-28)
• For WMA�3174 configurations:
For all entities crossed by the transmission path, delete existing cross connections.
To know how to display cross connections for a board, refer to “Displaying Cross
Connections for a Board” (p. 12-9).
R or TR-OADM cross connections involve the following transmission blocks:
– OMSOch-OMSoch for Express connections
– OMSoch-OGPIoch for Add & Drop connections
Result:On the relevant WMA� boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to
Input value 0 (BLOCKED).
How to tune the transmission path for deletion automatically
�ote: The automatic transmission path tuning needs SPLM (Smart Photonic Layer
Manager) tool. To know how to use SPLM, refer to 1626 LM/SPLM User
Provisioning Guide - 3AL 75138 BAAA.
To tune the transmission path automatically via SPLM, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Launch SPLM Graphical User Interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Synchronize SPLM with the subnetwork.
�ote: Any action on Rx and Tx Tributary connections at physical or configuration
level, requires SPLM synchronization.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the relevant OCH Group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Run the APE process with Delete Channels option activated.
How to tune the transmission path for deletion manually
�ote: For all the following steps, you must follow the signal direction from Rx to Tx.
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedDeleting a Transmission Path
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-14 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To tune the transmission path manually (without SPLM), perform the following steps for
all the entities crossed by the OCH Trail:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set all involved amplifiers to GAI� mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set the ALC initial target reference power for all involved ALCT boards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Set channel power of involved WMA�3x to minimum (-27 dBm).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Update the ALC power resulting from the new configuration for all involved ALCT
boards.
For detailed information, refer to 1626 LM System Turn-up Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Set all involved amplifiers back to Power-MSV mode.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedDeleting a Transmission Path
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-15
R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 Based
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the R and TR-OADM management procedures when you are
required to focus on a specific node, rather than on a network perspective. In this context,
your node configuration is based on WMA�3x74 boards.
Contents
Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections 10-17
Blocking a Channel Connection 10-19
Setting an Add & Drop Connection 10-20
Setting an Express Connection 10-23
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-16 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to create cross connections for Express or Add & Drop
channel connections for R-OADM or TR-OADM nodes with WMA�3x74 boards.
�ote: To know how to delete a cross connection, refer to“Deleting Cross
Connections” (p. 12-12)
Before you begin
• Remind that this procedure applies only if WMA�3x74 boards are used.
• You must have the complete cabling plan of your configuration.
How to perform R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections
To perform R-OADM and TR-OADM cross connections, perform the following steps:
If you want to set ... Then, perform the following cross connections ...
an Express connection 1. From the cross connection management window, click
Create.
2. Select the input TP.
The input TP consists in the channel frequency of the splitter
board input related to one direction/OTS, identified by the
following
format<rack/subrack/slot>,port#1,<channel
frequency>,OMSoch
3. From available output TP list, select the relevant output TP.
The output TP consists in the channel frequency of the splitter
board input related to the other direction/OTS, identified by
the following format
<rack/subrack/slot>,port#1,<same channel
frequency>,OMSoch.
4. To configure the Express path, refer to “Setting an Express
Connection” (p. 10-23).
5. End.
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedPerforming R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-17
If you want to set ... Then, perform the following cross connections ...
an Add & Drop
connection1. From the cross connection management window, click
Create.
2. Select the input TP.
The input TP consists in the channel frequency of the splitter
board input, identified by the following
formatport#1,<channel frequency>,OMSoch
3. From available output TP list, select the relevant output TP.
The output TP consists in:
• For TR-OADM: the TDMX board which connects the
relevant TRBD board, identified by the following format
<rack/subrack/slot>,<any available port
from 1 to 8>,OGPIoch
• For R-OADM: the CMDX board which connects the
relevant TRBD board, identified by the following format
<rack/subrack/slot>,<port#101 to 108>,
OGPIoch
4. To configure an Add & Drop path, refer to“Setting an Add &
Drop Connection” (p. 10-20).
5. End.
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedPerforming R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-18 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Blocking a Channel Connection
Purpose
Use this procedure, when you want to block a channel connection.
Before you begin
• Remind that this procedure applies only if WMA�3x74 boards are used.
• You must have the complete cabling plan of your configuration.
• The channel connection state must be either:
– Add & Drop, or
– Express.
How to block a channel connection
To block a channel connection perform the following step:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Delete the relevant cross connection.
To know how to delete a cross connection, refer to “Deleting Cross Connections”
(p. 12-12).
Result:
• If the channel connection initial state is Add & Drop:
– On the relevant WMA� boards, Input value 0 (BLOCKED) is assigned to the
relevant channel frequency.
– On WDM side, the relevant transponder laser is switched off.
– On the WDM side, the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: On.
– In case of TR-OADM configuration, the relevant TDMX board is blocked.
• If the channel connection initial state is Express:
– On the relevant WMA� boards, Input value 0 (BLOCKED) is assigned to the
relevant channel frequency.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedBlocking a Channel Connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-19
Setting an Add & Drop Connection
Purpose
Use this procedure, when you want to set an Add & Drop connection for a given channel
frequency.
Before you begin
• Remind that this procedure applies only if WMA�3x74 boards are used.
• You must have the complete cabling plan of your configuration.
• When you want to set an Add & Drop connection, the channel connection state can be
either:
– Blocked (Refer to “Channel Connection Initial State is Blocked” (p. 10-20)), or
– Express (Refer to “Channel Connection Initial State is Express” (p. 10-21)), or
– Add & Drop (Refer to “Channel Connection Initial State is Add & Drop (For
TR-OADM only)” (p. 10-22).
Channel Connection Initial State is Blocked
To set an Add & Drop connection when initial channel connection state is Blocked,
perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Create the cross connection for the Add & Drop connection.
To know how to create a cross connection, refer to “How to perform R-OADM and
TR-OADM Cross Connections” (p. 10-17).
Result:
• If TR-OADM: on the relevant TDMX board, the channel frequency to drop is
assigned to the relevant port number.
• On the WDM side:
– the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: Off.
– the relevant transponder laser is switched on.
• On the relevant WMA� boards, the required channel frequency is assigned to the
relevant Add & Drop input port number which connects the related transponder
board.
• Channel output power of relevant WMA� boards is set to minimum (-27 dBm /
Blocked).
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedSetting an Add & Drop Connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-20 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Connection Initial State is Express
To set an Add & Drop connection when channel connection initial state is Express,
perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Delete the exiting cross connection dedicated to the Express connection.
To know how to delete a cross connection, refer to “Deleting Cross Connections”
(p. 12-12).
Result:On the relevant WMA� boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to
Inputvalue 0 (BLOCKED).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Create the cross connection for the newAdd & Drop connection.
To know how to create a cross connection, refer to “How to perform R-OADM and
TR-OADM Cross Connections” (p. 10-17).
Result:
• If TR-OADM: on the relevant TDMX board, the channel frequency to drop is
assigned to the relevant port number.
• On the WDM side:
– the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: Off.
– the relevant transponder laser is switched on.
• On the relevant WMA� boards, the required channel frequency is assigned to the
relevant Add & Drop input port number which connects the related transponder
board.
• Channel output power of relevant WMA� boards is set to minimum (-27 dBm /
Blocked).
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedSetting an Add & Drop Connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-21
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Connection Initial State is Add & Drop (For TR-OADM only)
To set an Add & Drop connection when channel connection initial state is Add & Drop.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Delete the cross connection dedicated to the exiting Add & Drop connection.
To know how to delete a cross connection, refer to “Deleting Cross Connections”
(p. 12-12).
Result:
• On the relevant WMA� boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to
Inputvalue 0 (BLOCKED).
• On the WDM side, the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: On.
• On relevant TDMX board, the relevant channel frequency is blocked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Create the cross connection for the newAdd & Drop connection.
To know how to create a cross connection, refer to “How to perform R-OADM and
TR-OADM Cross Connections” (p. 10-17).
Result:
• If TR-OADM: on the relevant TDMX board, the channel frequency to drop is
assigned to the relevant port number.
• On the WDM side:
– the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: Off.
– the relevant transponder laser is switched on.
• On the relevant WMA� boards, the required channel frequency is assigned to the
relevant Add & Drop input port number which connects the related transponder
board.
• Channel output power of relevant WMA� boards is set to minimum (-27 dBm /
Blocked).
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedSetting an Add & Drop Connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-22 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Setting an Express Connection
Purpose
Use this procedure, when you want to set an Express connection for a given channel
frequency.
Before you begin
• Remind that this procedure applies only if WMA�3x74 boards are used.
• You must have the complete cabling plan of your configuration.
• The channel connection initial state must be either:
– Blocked, or
– Add & Drop, or
– Express (TR-OADM only).
Find the right procedure quickly
According to the channel connection initial case, refer to one of the following:
• “Channel Connection Initial State is Blocked” (p. 10-23)
• “Channel Connection Initial State is Add & Drop” (p. 10-24)
• “Channel Connection Initial State is Express (For Degree higher than 2 only)”
(p. 10-24)
Channel Connection Initial State is Blocked
To set an Express connection when channel connection initial state is Blocked, perform
the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Create the relevant cross connection.
To know how to create a cross connection, refer to “Performing R-OADM and
TR-OADM Cross Connections” (p. 10-17).
Result:On the two relevant WMA� boards, the required channel frequency is
assigned to the relevant Express input port number.
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedSetting an Express Connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-23
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Connection Initial State is Add & Drop
To set an Express connection when channel connection initial state is Add & Drop,
perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Delete the relevant cross connection.
To know how to delete a cross connection, refer to “Deleting Cross Connections”
(p. 12-12).
Result:
• If TR-OADM: on relevant TDMX board, the required channel frequency is
blocked.
• On the relevant WMA� boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to
Input value 0 (BLOCKED).
• On the WDM side, the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: On.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Create the new cross connection.
To know how to create a cross connection, refer to “Performing R-OADM and
TR-OADM Cross Connections” (p. 10-17).
Result:On the relevant WMA� boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to
the relevant Express input port number.
Channel Connection Initial State is Express (For Degree higher than 2 only)
To set an Express connection when channel connection initial state is Express, perform
the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Delete the relevant cross connection.
To know how to delete a cross connection, refer to “Deleting Cross Connections”
(p. 12-12).
Result:On the relevant WMA� boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to
Input value 0 (BLOCKED).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Create the new cross connection.
To know how to create a cross connection, refer to “Performing R-OADM and
TR-OADM Cross Connections” (p. 10-17).
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedSetting an Express Connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-24 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:On the relevant WMA� boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to
the relevant Express input port number.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedSetting an Express Connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-25
R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMAN1100 Based
Overview
Purpose
This section describes:
• The configuration parameters of an R-OADM with WMA�1100 boards.
• The procedure for configuring an R-OADM with WMA�1100 boards.
when you are requested to focus R-OADM configuration on a specific node.
In this context, your R-OADM configuration is based on WMA�1100 boards.
Contents
R-OADM/WMA�1100 Based Configuration Parameters 10-27
Configuring R-OADM with WMA�1100 Boards 10-28
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMAN1100 BasedOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-26 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
R-OADM/WMAN1100 Based Configuration Parameters
R-OADM / WMAN1100 Parameters
On a R-OADM configuration node with WMA�1100 boards, you can
configure/reconfigure channel connections by performing the following actions:
1. to determine Express and Add & Drop channel connections via frequency state as
shown in the following table:
Frequency State Values Description
Express The channel goes through the R-OADM node.
AddDrop1 The channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from
WDM line #1 toward client line. Then the channel and a new
digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line #1.
AddDrop2 The channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from
WDM line #2 toward client line. Then the channel and a new
digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line #2.
AddDrop12 The channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from
WDM line #1 toward client line. Then the channel and a new
digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line #1
A�D the channel and its associated digital signal is extracted
fromWDM line #2 toward client line. Then the channel and a
new digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line
#2.
Blocked The channel is blocked. There is no transmission whatever the
frequency state is.
2. To assign power attenuation for transmission optimization.
See Also
“Configuring R-OADM with WMA�1100 Boards” (p. 10-28)
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMAN1100 BasedR-OADM/WMAN1100 Based Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-27
Configuring R-OADM with WMAN1100 Boards
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to configure Express and Add & Drop channel
connections in an R-OADM node, WMA�1100 based.
Before you begin
R-OADM configuration must be complete:
• Boards are declared and In Service.
• Cabling has been configured.
• Contradirectionality has been configured.
• Update Transmission has been performed.
How to configure R-OADM with WMAN1100 Boards
To configure R-OADM with WMA�1100 boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration > R-OADM.
Result:The R-OADM Overview window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the frequency to configure.
Result:The R-OADM Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Assign the relevant State and attenuations for the selected frequency.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Repeat from step 2 as many time as frequencies need to be configured.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Apply.
Good to Know
• To assign a given state to all frequencies, use Global Settings list box.
• To assign a given state to pre-selected frequencies, use Selected Settings list box.
• To set an attenuation value between input/output of a WMA� board, use relevant SET
OTS X > Y buttons, where X and Y are the OTS.
• To set an attenuation tolerance to the assigned attenuation, use relevant VAR OTS X >
Y buttons, where X and Y are the OTS.
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMAN1100 BasedConfiguring R-OADM with WMAN1100 Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-28 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
“R-OADM/WMA�1100 Based Configuration Parameters” (p. 10-27)
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMAN1100 BasedConfiguring R-OADM with WMAN1100 Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
10-29
11 11Transmission Management
Overview
Purpose
Transmission is a major topic in the 1626 LM management.
It is a representation of the transmission process with all the involved functional blocks.
From the transmission representation, you can perform a lot of operation tasks such as:
• Loopbacks,
• Performance Monitoring,
• Cross Connections,
• etc.
For clarity and relevancy purposes, a special focus has been done on specific operation
management subjects in specific chapters.
This chapter is limited to particular transmission parameters and configuration
procedures.
Contents
About Transmission Management Entities 11-2
The Main Transmission Management Entities 11-2
About RS-TTI and J0 Configuration 11-7
Introducing RS-TTI and J0 11-7
Configuring the RS-TTI/J0 11-9
About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) Configuration 11-10
Introducing Optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers) 11-10
Configuring TTIs 11-12
Managing Error Correction 11-14
Enabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction) 11-15
Disabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction) 11-16
Modifying the BER (Bit Error Rate) Threshold 11-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
11-1
About Transmission Management Entities
The Main Transmission Management Entities
Transmission management enables to visualize the different TP (Termination Points)
involved in the transport processing functions supported by the 1626 LM boards.
According to their location in the transport process, 1626 LM boards have OGPI and/or
OTS ports.
OGPI ports
OGPI port is a bidirectional access point for a User-Client or a Line to Mux signal type.
A User-Client signal type is a fixed wavelength to be multiplexed in a Mux.
A Line to Mux signal type is a single or a set of wavelengths to be multiplexed in a Mux.
OTS ports
OTS port is a bidirectional access point for a WDM line signal type.
AWDM line signal transports a set of multiplexed wavelengths.
• Figure 11-1, “OGPI Ports and Associated Boards” (p. 11-3) illustrate the OGPI ports
of 1626 LM boards.
• Figure 11-2, “OTS Ports and Associated Boards” (p. 11-4) illustrates the OTS ports of
1626 LM boards.
Transmission Management About Transmission Management EntitiesThe Main Transmission Management Entities
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Figure 11-1 OGPI Ports and Associated Boards
Transmission Management About Transmission Management EntitiesThe Main Transmission Management Entities
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
11-3
Transport processing functions are compliant with the G.798 and G.709 standards.
In the 1626 LM context, the transport processing functions are represented by:
• TTP (Trail Termination Point),
• CTP (Connection Termination Point)
TTP (Trail Termination Point)
ATTP represents a point of insertion/extraction of adapted information to a given
network layer.
Figure 11-2 OTS Ports and Associated Boards
Transmission Management About Transmission Management EntitiesThe Main Transmission Management Entities
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
CTP (Connection termination Point)
ACTP represents a point of transfer and adaptation between two network layers.
Table 11-1, “TP (Termination Points)” (p. 11-5) describes the TP involved in the signal
transport.
Table 11-1 TP (Termination Points)
TP Meaning Description
OGPI Optical Generic Physical Interface TTP.
The access point for a single wavelength.
Corresponds to the client port. Hosts the
features of the optical port.
OTS Optical Transport Section TTP.
The access point for multiplexed wavelength.
Corresponds to the WDM line port. Hosts the
features of the optical port.WDM line signal
type
PGPloch Optical Generic Physical Interface / optical
channel
CTP.
The point where the adaptation between OGPI
and OCH occurs.
OCH Optical Channel TTP.
The point where the optoelectrical conversion
occurs.
OTU Optical Transmission Unit TTP.
The points where:
• FEC (Forward Error Correction) is created.
• Encapsulation / Decapsulation of G.709
frame takes place.
ODU Optical Data Unit
TM Trail Monitor TTP. This is the point where monitoring
information can be red.
RSgdc Regenerator Section/generic data client CTP.
The point where adaptation between RS and a
generic client occurs.
In the 1626 LM context, generic client is
Ethernet or Fiber Channel.
RsTTP Regenerator Section Trail Termination Point TTP.
The point where SDH encapsulation /
decapsulation occurs.
OMoch Optical Multiplex Section/optical channel CTP.
The point where the adaptation between OMS
and OCH occurs.
Transmission Management About Transmission Management EntitiesThe Main Transmission Management Entities
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
11-5
Table 11-1 TP (Termination Points) (continued)
TP Meaning Description
OMS Optical Multiplex Section TTP.
The point where wavelength multiplexing
occurs.
OMSots Optical Multiplex Section/Adaptation CTP.
The point where adaptation between OMS and
OTS occurs
OMS-band Optical Multiplex Section/band CTP.
This is the point where adaptation of a set of
wavelength occurs.
Transmission Management About Transmission Management EntitiesThe Main Transmission Management Entities
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
About RS-TTI and J0 Configuration
Introducing RS-TTI and J0
The RS-TTI (Regenerator Section - Trail Trace Identifier) is a connectivity control entity
dedicated for SDH frame.
This entity is carried by the RS overhead of the SDH frame via one byte called J0.
You configure the RS-TTI on each node of your transmission network, by indicating how
the J0 byte will be composed.
The RS-TTI is inserted in an SDH frame in the J0 byte at the source of a trail for
transmission.
At the sink of a trail, the received RS-TTI is compared with the expected one. Any
mismatch between the expected value and the received value means that there is an
integrity problem in your transmission process. In this case a TIM (Trail Identifier
Mismatch) alarm is raised.
You configure RS-TTI for the following boards:
• ETHC,
• 2*GBE_FC,
• TRBC,
• TRBD1191 only.
Transmission Management About RS-TTI and J0 ConfigurationIntroducing RS-TTI and J0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
11-7
RS-TTI/J0 Parameters
Table 11-2, “RS-TTI/J0 Parameters” (p. 11-8) gives a description of RS-TTI/J0
configuration parameters.
Table 11-2 RS-TTI/J0 Parameters
RS-TTI/J0
parameters
Description
TX Side/Transmitted
This is the area where you configure the RS-TTI insertion for Ethernet boards only.
Mode 1 In this mode, you configure a RS-TTI which length needs to be greater than 1 byte but
less than 15 bytes.
You must process as follows:
1. You enter a 15 characters word in the entry field, on the right.
2. You calculate the associated transmission error control value type CRC7 (Cyclic
Redundancy Check 7) via the CRC7 button. The CRC7 value is displayed in the
CRC7 field.
3. Optionally, you can configure the expected RS-TTI in the RX Side / Expected area.
Each SDH frame is transmitted with a J0 byte which is successively composed of one
character of the 15 characters word.
At the end of 15 transmissions, the sink node receive the CRC7 code and checks the
consistency between the successive fifteen characters and the corresponding expected
{15 characters word, CRC7 value}.
If the sink node cannot rebuild the 15 characters word, the transmission integrity is not
guaranteed and a TIM (Trail Identifier Mismatch) alarm is raised.
One repeat Byte In this mode, you enter a one character RS-TTI.
Each SDH frame carries the RS-TTI via the J0 byte. The sink node checks the
consistency between the transmitted and the expected RS-TTI. In case of mismatch, a
TIM (Trail Identifier Mismatch) alarm is raised.
RX Side /Received This is the area where you see the received RS-TTI.
RX Side /Expected This is the area where you see the expected RS-TTI.
This area is optional for Ethernet and TRBx boards.
For TRBx boards, this is the area where you configure the expected RS-TTI, if you
decide to monitor it.
By default, the RS-TTI monitoring is disabled.
To enable the RS-TTI configuration, you must:
1. Click STM Mon. Disabled. The button turns to STM Mon. Enabled.
2. Refer to Mode 1 or to One repeat Byte related information to know how to
complete the necessary fields.
See Also
“Configuring the RS-TTI/J0” (p. 11-9)
Transmission Management About RS-TTI and J0 ConfigurationIntroducing RS-TTI and J0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Configuring the RS-TTI/J0
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure the RS-TTI/J0.
Before you begin
• Transmission view of relevant Ethernet or TRBx board is displayed.
• Depending on the type of board, RSTTP or TM transmission block is selected.
How to configure the RS-TTI/J0
To configure the RS-TTI/J0, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click the selected transmission block and select Path Trace Configuration.
Result:The J0 Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 According to the selected board and to your operation rules, complete:
• the TX Side / Transmitted area only, or
• the TX Side / Transmitted and RX side / expected areas.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To enable RX Side / Expected area, click STM Mon. Disabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Apply to finish.
See Also
• “About RS-TTI and J0 Configuration” (p. 11-7)
• Table 11-2, “RS-TTI/J0 Parameters” (p. 11-8)
Transmission Management About RS-TTI and J0 ConfigurationConfiguring the RS-TTI/J0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
11-9
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) Configuration
Introducing Optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers)
The various optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers)
Optical TTIs enable to check the connectivity between WDM nodes at different levels:
• ODU-TTI (Optical Data Unit TTI) enables to check the matching of data transmitted
between two WDM nodes, through regeneration units.
• OTU-TTI (Optical Transport Unit TTI) enables to check the matching of optical
channels connections between two WDM nodes.
• OTS-TTI (Optical Transport Section TTI) enables to check the matching of optical
lines between two WDM nodes.
You configure the TTI on each node of your transmission network, by indicating how the
SAPI and DAPI will be composed.
SAPI means Source Address Point Identifier.
DAPI means Destination Address Point Identifier.
SAPI and DAPI enable to identify the source and the destination, both of them in a 16
bytes field.
A specific 32 bytes field is provided for operator use.
The TTI is inserted at the source of a trail for transmission.
At the sink of a trail, the received TTI is compared with the expected one. Any mismatch
between the expected value and the received value means that there is an integrity
problem in your transmission process. In this case a TIM (Trail Identifier Mismatch)
alarm is raised.
You can configure the TTIs as follows:
• OTU-TTI applies to TRBC and TRBD boards (10 and 40 Gbps), line side.
• OTS-TTI applies to LOFA boards supporting a line/OTS.
• ODU-TTI applies to 10 Gbps TRBC and TRBD boards, line side.
Transmission Management About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) ConfigurationIntroducing Optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
TTI Parameters
Table 11-3 TTI Parameters
TTI Parameters Description
Received This is the area where you see the received TTI with received SAPI and DAPI if
configured.
Expected This is the area where you enter the expected SAPI and DAPI to be received from the
source.
You activate the SAPI and DAPI fields via the associated check boxes.
Sent This is the area where you enter the SAPI and DAPI to be transmitted to the destination.
You can use for internal use the 32 bytes Specific to operator field.
See Also
“Configuring TTIs” (p. 11-12)
Transmission Management About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) ConfigurationIntroducing Optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
11-11
Configuring TTIs
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure OTU, OTS or ODU TTIs.
Before you begin
According to the TTI you want to configure, you must comply with the following rules:
• For OTU-TTI: port#101-OTU transmission block of a TRBC or a TRBD board is
selected.
• For OTS-TTI:
– If required: LOFA contradirectionality is configured and transmission update is
performed.
– OSCU board is installed, declared and cabled.
– port#1-OTS transmission block of a reception LOFA board is selected.
• For ODU-TTI:
– If UNI configuration: port#101-ODU2 transmission block of 10 Gbps
TRBC/TRBD board is selected.
You recognize a U�I configuration when port#101-ODU2 transmission block islinked to port#1-OCH transmission blocks on user/client side.
– If NNI configuration: TM(Trail Monitor) of port#101-OTU transmission block of
a TRBD board is selected.
You recognize a ��I configuration when port#1-OTU transmission block ispresent.
How to configure TTIs
To configure TTIs, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click on the relevant transmission block and select:
• For OTS-TTI, OTU-TTI and [ODU-TTI (U�I configuration)]: Trail Trace
Management>On TP
• For ODU-TTI in a ��I configuration: Trail Trace Management>On TM.
Result:The Trail Trace Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If required, complete the Expected and/or Sent areas.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
Transmission Management About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) ConfigurationConfiguring TTIs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-12 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
• “About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) Configuration” (p. 11-10)
• Table 11-3, “TTI Parameters” (p. 11-11)
Transmission Management About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) ConfigurationConfiguring TTIs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
11-13
Managing Error Correction
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedure to perform when you want:
• to enable or disable the FEC (Forward Error Correction),
• to modify the BER (Bit Error Rate).
Contents
Enabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction) 11-15
Disabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction) 11-16
Modifying the BER (Bit Error Rate) Threshold 11-17
Transmission Management Managing Error CorrectionOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-14 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Enabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction)
Purpose
Use this procedure to enable the FEC process.
Before you begin
• OCH transmission block of line port is displayed.
• FEC is disabled.
How to enable the FEC
To enable the FEC process, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Transmission>Enable FEC.
Result:The OCH transmission block is updated and displays a F.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transmission Management Managing Error CorrectionEnabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
11-15
Disabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction)
Purpose
Use this procedure to disable the FEC process.
Before you begin
• OCH transmission block of line port is displayed.
• FEC is enabled.
How to disable the FEC
To disable the FEC process, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Transmission>Disable FEC.
Result:The OCH transmission block is updated and the F disappears.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transmission Management Managing Error CorrectionDisabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-16 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Modifying the BER (Bit Error Rate) Threshold
Purpose
Use this procedure to modify the BER threshold.
Good to Know
You act on the BER (Bit Error Rate) by configuring the LTCER (Low Threshold
Corrected Error Rate).
Before you begin
• OCH transmission block of line port is displayed.
• FEC is enabled.
How to modify the BER Threshold
To modify the BER threshold, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click the OCH transmission block of line port and select BER Threshold
Configuration....
Result:The LTCER Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Low Threshold Set list box, select the LTCER value (from 10-3 to 10-8).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transmission Management Managing Error CorrectionModifying the BER (Bit Error Rate) Threshold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
11-17
12 12Cross Connection
Management
Overview
Purpose
In the current release, cross connections are used:
• in ETHC and TRBD1191 boards,
• in splitter boards for R-OADM and TR-OADM configuration.
Cross Connections enable:
• to connect ETHC User-Client traffic to lines toward Mux,
• to connect ETHC User-Client traffic to TRBD1191 lines,
• to enable express or add & drop path in R-OADM and TR-OADM configuration.
This chapter describes the procedure to perform when you want to manage cross
connections.
To have detailed information about cross connections used in specific board configuration
context, refer to the following:
• “About ETHC Configurations” (p. 9-5)
• “About TRBD1191 Board” (p. 9-11)
• Chapter 10, “R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management”.
Contents
About Cross Connections 12-2
Cross Connection Types 12-3
Cross Connections Parameters 12-4
Managing Cross Connections 12-7
Displaying Cross Connections for a Subrack 12-8
Displaying Cross Connections for a Board 12-9
Creating Cross Connections 12-10
Modifying Cross Connections 12-11
Deleting Cross Connections 12-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
12-1
About Cross Connections
Overview
Purpose
This topic:
• gives a quick overview of the different cross connection types,
• describes the cross connections parameters.
To have detailed information about cross connections used in specific board configuration
context, refer to the following:
• “About ETHC Configurations” (p. 9-5)
• “About TRBD1191 Board” (p. 9-11)
• Chapter 10, “R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management”.
Contents
Cross Connection Types 12-3
Cross Connections Parameters 12-4
Cross Connection Management About Cross ConnectionsOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Cross Connection Types
In the current release, you establish bidirectional cross connections to connect:
• ETHC line to ETHC XFP line (mandatory)
• TRBD1191 line to User-Client XFP (mandatory)
• ETHC line to TRBD1191 line (depending on configuration) through the backplane
• R-OADM and TR-OADM express and add & drop paths.
�ote:You cannot modify an existing cross connection.
See Also
• “About ETHC Configurations” (p. 9-5)
• “About TRBD1191 Board” (p. 9-11)
• “Cross Connections Parameters” (p. 12-4)
• “Managing Cross Connections” (p. 12-7)
• Chapter 10, “R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management”.
Cross Connection Management About Cross ConnectionsCross Connection Types
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
12-3
Cross Connections Parameters
The following table describes the relevant cross connection parameters.
Table 12-1 Cross Connection Parameters
Parameters Description Possible Values
Prot. State Indicates the protection state.
Only used in protection context.
Normal P
Protection path is active. �o alarms.
Normal I
Main path is active. �o alarms.
Auto P
Protection path is active. Alarms are
raised on the main path.
Auto I
Main path is active. Alarms are
raised on the protection path.
Lockout I
The traffic is locked on the main
path.
The protection is disabled.
Forced P
The traffic is forced on the
protection path. �o alarms.
SNCP For future use. �one.
State Indicates the state of the cross
connection.
A
Active cross connection.
Dir. Indicates the cross connection
direction
Uni
The connection is unidirectional.
Bi
The connection is bidirectional.
Input Indicates the input point of a cross
connection.
Sequence giving the following
information:
• rack#
• subrack#
• slot#
• port#
• Termination Point identifier
Cross Connection Management About Cross ConnectionsCross Connections Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 12-1 Cross Connection Parameters (continued)
Parameters Description Possible Values
Protecting
Input
Indicates the protecting entity of a
protection system.
• �ot used in cross connection
management context.
• Only used for protection
management context.
Sequence giving the following
information:
• rack#
• subrack#
• slot#
• port#
• Termination Point identifier
Output Indicates the output point of a cross
connection.
Sequence giving the following
information:
• rack#
• subrack#
• slot#
• port#
• Termination Point identifier
Revertive A protection characteristic:
• A revertive protection refers to a
mechanism where the transport
and selection of the normal
traffic signal (service) always
returns to (or remains on) the
working transport entity if the
switch requests are terminated;
i.e., when the working transport
entity has recovered from the
defect or the external request is
cleared.
• A non revertive protection refers
to a mechanism, where the
transport and selection of the
normal traffic signal does not
return to the working transport
entity if the switch requests are
terminated.
Only used for protection.
• Checked
The protection is revertive.
Revertive protection refers to
OS�CP protection for
User-Client signals. Such
protection type is supported by
40 Gbps transponders and
TRBD1191, 10 Gbps
transponder only.
• Unchecked
The protection is not revertive.
Cross Connection Management About Cross ConnectionsCross Connections Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
12-5
Table 12-1 Cross Connection Parameters (continued)
Parameters Description Possible Values
WRT Wait to Restore Time.
A period of time that must elapse
before a transport entity that has
recovered from a Signal Fail (SF) or
Signal Degrade (SD) condition can
be used again to transport the normal
traffic signal and/or to select the
normal traffic signal from.
Only used for protection.
0 to 60,000 seconds
HOT Hold Of Time.
A delay that prevents an autonomous
switch of a protected channel to the
protecting path for the configured
time following identification that an
autonomous protection switch is
required.
Only used for protection.
0 to 10,000 milliseconds
See Also
• “About Cross Connections ” (p. 12-2)
• “Cross Connection Types” (p. 12-3)
• “Managing Cross Connections” (p. 12-7)
Cross Connection Management About Cross ConnectionsCross Connections Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Managing Cross Connections
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedure to perform when you want to manage cross
connections.
Contents
Displaying Cross Connections for a Subrack 12-8
Displaying Cross Connections for a Board 12-9
Creating Cross Connections 12-10
Modifying Cross Connections 12-11
Deleting Cross Connections 12-12
Cross Connection Management Managing Cross ConnectionsOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
12-7
Displaying Cross Connections for a Subrack
Purpose
Use this procedure to display cross connections at subrack level.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to display cross connections for a subrack
To display cross connection for a subrack, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration > Cross Connection Management.
Result:The Cross Connection Management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Search.
Result:The list of existing cross connections appears.
See Also
“Cross Connections Parameters” (p. 12-4)
Cross Connection Management Managing Cross ConnectionsDisplaying Cross Connections for a Subrack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Displaying Cross Connections for a Board
Purpose
Use this procedure to display cross connections at board level.
Before you begin
Transmission View window of the relevant board is displayed.
How to display cross connections for a board
To display cross connections for a board, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Transmission View window, identify the transmission blocks with a cross.
Result:The cross indicates that a cross connection is effective between the two
blocks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the transmission block indicating a cross connection and right-click Cross
Connection>Cross Connection Management.
See Also
“Cross Connections Parameters” (p. 12-4)
Cross Connection Management Managing Cross ConnectionsDisplaying Cross Connections for a Board
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
12-9
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating Cross Connections
Purpose
Use this procedure to create cross connections.
Before you begin
• Transmission View of eligible board is displayed.
• You know the type of TP to cross connect.
How to create cross connections
To create cross connections, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the input TP.
Result:The selected TP is highligthed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click and select Cross Connection>Create Cross Connection.
Result:The Main Cross Connection window is displayed. The input field is prefilled
with the selected TP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Choose... to select the output TP.
Result:The Choose a Cross Connectable TP window is displayed and lists the
relevant TP available for cross connection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the relevant output TP and click OK.
Result:The Main Cross Connection window is refreshed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK to finish.
See Also
• “About Cross Connections ” (p. 12-2)
• “Cross Connection Types” (p. 12-3)
• “Cross Connections Parameters” (p. 12-4)
Cross Connection Management Managing Cross ConnectionsCreating Cross Connections
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modifying Cross Connections
Purpose
Use this procedure to modify protection cross connections.
Before you begin
• You can modify cross connections only if they are revertive. Revertive cross
connections refer to OS�CP protection for User-Client signals. Such protection type
is supported by 40 Gbps transponders and TRBD1191, 10 Gbps transponder only.
How to modify cross connections
To modify cross connections, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Cross Connection Management.
Result:The Cross Connection Management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Search
Result:The list of existing cross connections appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the cross connections dedicated to protection: Protecting Input column filled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the relevant row.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Modify.
Result:The Main Cross Connection window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Modify one of the following:
• Revertive:If you uncheck the box, the protection becomes non revertive.
• WTR:The Wait to Restore Time. You can modify the value of this parameter.
• HOT:The Hold Off Time. You can modify the value of this parameter.
To know more about these parameters, refer to “Cross Connections Parameters” (p. 12-4)
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cross Connection Management Managing Cross ConnectionsModifying Cross Connections
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
12-11
Deleting Cross Connections
Purpose
Use this procedure to delete cross connections.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to delete cross connections
To delete cross connections, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Cross Connection>Create Cross Connection.
Result:The Cross Connection Managementwindow is displayed and lists the
existing cross connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the cross connection to delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK to confirm the deletion.
Result:The cross connection disappears from the list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Close to finish.
See Also
• “About Cross Connections ” (p. 12-2)
• “Cross Connection Types” (p. 12-3)
• “Cross Connections Parameters” (p. 12-4)
• Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections
Cross Connection Management Managing Cross ConnectionsDeleting Cross Connections
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-12 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 13Connector and Cabling
Management
Overview
Purpose
Connectors are the interfaces which enable the cabling:
• among the 1626 LM boards,
• with external transmission devices.
This chapter describes the procedures to perform when you want:
• to set in/out of service connectors,
• to declare the cabling between two connectors.
• to export the cabling configuration to an XML file.
Contents
Setting Connectors In Service 13-2
Setting Connectors Out Of Service 13-3
Configuring the Cabling between 2 Connectors 13-4
Deleting the Cabling between 2 Connectors 13-5
Exporting the Cabling Configuration to an XML File 13-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
13-1
Setting Connectors In Service
Purpose
Use this procedure to set connectors in service.
Before you begin
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
• The connectors are not in service.
How to set connectors in service
To set connectors in service, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration > Connectors/Cabling...
Result:The Connectors Configuration window appears.
The list of racks, subracks, boards and channels are displayed in a tree structure. Foreach of these managed entities, you can expand or collapse the tree via + or - signs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If necessary, expand the tree until the relevant board.
Result:The connectors appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the relevant connectors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Set In Service.
Result:The connector status becomes In Service (Red Padlock is displayed).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Close to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connector and Cabling Management Setting Connectors In Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Setting Connectors Out Of Service
Purpose
Use this procedure to set connectors out of service.
Before you begin
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
• The connectors are in service.
How to set connectors out of service
To set connectors out of service, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration > Connectors/Cabling...
Result:The Connectors Configuration window appears.
The list of racks, subracks, boards and channels are displayed in a tree structure. Foreach of these managed entities, you can expand or collapse the tree via + or - signs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If necessary, expand the tree until the relevant board.
Result:The connectors appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the relevant connectors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Set Out Of Service.
Result:The connector status becomes Out Of Service (Red Padlock is not displayed).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Close to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connector and Cabling Management Setting Connectors Out Of Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
13-3
Configuring the Cabling between 2 Connectors
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure the cabling between 2 connectors.
Before you begin
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
• The connectors are in service.
• If you run SPLM for line optimization, any action on Rx and Tx Tributary
connections at physical or configuration level, requires SPLM synchronization.
How to configure the cabling between 2 connectors
To configure the cabling between 2 connectors, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Connectors/Cabling...
Result:The Connectors Configuration window appears.
The list of racks, subracks, boards and channels are displayed in a tree structure. Foreach of these managed entities, you can expand or collapse the tree via + or - signs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If necessary, expand the tree until the relevant board.
Result:The connectors appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Cable row, select the cell corresponding to the connector to connect.
Result:The two cells corresponding to input and output channels are highlighted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If necessary, on the left, expand the tree until the relevant board.
Result:The connectors appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Cable row, select a cell corresponding to the connector to connect with.
Result:The two cells corresponding to input and output channels are highlighted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Add Cable.
Result:Two arrows appears, representing the cabling configuration direction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Close to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connector and Cabling Management Configuring the Cabling between 2 Connectors
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Deleting the Cabling between 2 Connectors
Purpose
Use this procedure to delete the cabling between 2 connectors.
Before you begin
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
• The connectors are in service.
• If you run SPLM for line optimization, any action on Rx and Tx Tributary
connections at physical or configuration level, requires SPLM synchronization.
How to delete the cabling between 2 connectors
To delete the cabling between 2 connectors, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Connectors/Cabling...
Result:The Connectors Configuration window appears.
The list of racks, subracks, boards and channels are displayed in a tree structure. Foreach of these managed entities, you can expand or collapse the tree via + or - signs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If necessary, expand the tree until the relevant board.
Result:The connectors appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Cable row, select the cell corresponding to the connector to connect.
Result:The two cells corresponding to input and output channels are highlighted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Delete Cable.
Result:Two arrows disappear from the input and output channel cells.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Close to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connector and Cabling Management Deleting the Cabling between 2 Connectors
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
13-5
Exporting the Cabling Configuration to an XML File
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to export the cabling configuration of a rack to an
XML file.
Before you begin
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
• Cabling has been configured.
• The required rack view is displayed
How to export the cabling configuration to an XML file
To export the cabling configuration to an XML file, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Equipment > Instantaneous Measurements on > Selected Object.
Result:The Instantaneous Measurements window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Export Cabling to XML
Result:A browsing window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the location where you want to save the XML file and click OK.
Result:The cabling configuration is saved into an XML file.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connector and Cabling Management Exporting the Cabling Configuration to an XML File
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
14 14Loopback Tests
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the parameters and procedures to follow when you want to
perform loopbacks for test purposes.
Contents
About Loopbacks 14-2
Introducing Loopbacks 14-2
Loopback Parameters in Display Mode 14-3
Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode 14-5
Managing loopbacks 14-6
Displaying Existing Loopbacks 14-7
Creating Loopbacks 14-8
Deleting Loopbacks 14-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
14-1
About Loopbacks
Introducing Loopbacks
Loopbacks are performed for troubleshooting purposes to identify faults in the
transmission path with the help of an external test device. The external test device is used
to compare the outgoing and returning signals. The result of the loopback is shown on the
external test device.
In the current release, you can create:
• a «loopback and continue» test on:
– OGPI ports / WDM side of ETHC, 2xGBE_FC or 10 Gbps TRBC/TRBD boards.
– OGPI ports / User-Client side of 40 Gbps TRBC boards and 10 Gbps
TRBC/TRBD boards.
• a «loopback and cut» test on:
– OGPI ports / WDM side of 40 Gbps TRBC/TRBD boards.
– OGPI ports / User-Client side of ETHC and 40Gbps TRBD boards .
Important!You cannot create a loopback on both user and line sides at the same
time.
• Figure 14-1, “Loopback and Continue User/Client Side” (p. 14-2) and Figure 14-2,
“Loopback and Continue Line Side” (p. 14-3) illustrate loopback and continue
concept.
• Figure 14-3, “Loopback and Cut Line Side” (p. 14-3) illustrates loop and cut concept.
Figure 14-1 Loopback and Continue User/Client Side
Loopback Tests About LoopbacksIntroducing Loopbacks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
See Also
• “Loopback Parameters in Display Mode” (p. 14-3)
• “Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode” (p. 14-5)
• “Displaying Existing Loopbacks” (p. 14-7)
• “Creating Loopbacks” (p. 14-8)
• “Deleting Loopbacks” (p. 14-9)
Loopback Parameters in Display Mode
Figure 14-2 Loopback and Continue Line Side
Figure 14-3 Loopback and Cut Line Side
Loopback Tests About LoopbacksIntroducing Loopbacks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
14-3
The following table describes loopback parameters in display mode.
Table 14-1 Loopback Parameters in Display Mode
Parameters Description Possible Values
Initial TP Identifies the TP supporting the
loopback.
Sequence giving the following
information:
• rack#
• subrack#
• slot#
• port#
• Termination Point identifier
Destination TP In loopback context, this entity is the
same as the initial TP.
�ot used in the current release.
Sequence giving the following
information:
• rack#
• subrack#
• slot#
• port#
• Termination Point identifier
LoopType Specific type of loopback.• Loop And Continue
• Loop And Cut
Directionality �ot used in the current release. �one.
See Also
• “Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode” (p. 14-5)
• “Displaying Existing Loopbacks” (p. 14-7)
• “Creating Loopbacks” (p. 14-8)
• “Deleting Loopbacks” (p. 14-9)
Loopback Tests About LoopbacksLoopback Parameters in Display Mode
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode
The following table describes loopback parameters in creation mode.
Table 14-2 Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode
Parameters Description Possible Values
Seleted TP Identifies the TP supporting the
loopback.
This parameter is automatically
filled when you create a loopback
from the Transmission View.
Sequence giving the following
information:
• rack#
• subrack#
• slot#
• port#
• Termination Point identifier
Loopback
Actions
�ot used in the current release. �one.
Timed
Loopbacks
�ot used in the current release. �one.
See Also
• “Loopback Parameters in Display Mode” (p. 14-3)
• “Displaying Existing Loopbacks” (p. 14-7)
• “Creating Loopbacks” (p. 14-8)
• “Deleting Loopbacks” (p. 14-9)
Loopback Tests About LoopbacksLoopback Parameters in Creation Mode
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
14-5
Managing loopbacks
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to manage loopbacks.
Contents
Displaying Existing Loopbacks 14-7
Creating Loopbacks 14-8
Deleting Loopbacks 14-9
Loopback Tests Managing loopbacksOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Displaying Existing Loopbacks
Purpose
Use this procedure to display existing loopbacks.
Before you begin
The 126 LM GUI is started.
How to display existing loopbacks
To display existing loopbacks, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Loopback Management.
Result:The Signal Loopback Management window is displayed and displays the
current loopbacks list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Close to finish.
See Also
• “Loopback Parameters in Display Mode” (p. 14-3)
• “Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode” (p. 14-5)
• “Creating Loopbacks” (p. 14-8)
• “Deleting Loopbacks” (p. 14-9)
Loopback Tests Managing loopbacksDisplaying Existing Loopbacks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
14-7
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating Loopbacks
Purpose
Use this procedure to create loopbacks.
Before you begin
Transmission View window of eligible board is displayed
How to create loopbacks
To create loopbacks, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the relevant OGPI block.
Result:The selected OGPI block is highligthed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click and select Loopback > Port Loopback Configuration.
Result:The Port Loopbacks Configuration window is displayed with the
Termination Point field prefilled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK to confirm the loopback creation.
Result:The Transmission View window is updated.
See Also
• “Loopback Parameters in Display Mode” (p. 14-3)
• “Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode” (p. 14-5)
• “Displaying Existing Loopbacks” (p. 14-7)
• “Deleting Loopbacks” (p. 14-9)
Loopback Tests Managing loopbacksCreating Loopbacks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deleting Loopbacks
Purpose
Use this procedure to delete loopbacks.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to delete loopbacks
To delete loopbacks, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Loopback Management.
Result:The Signal Loopback Management window is displayed and displays the
current loopbacks list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the list, select the loopback to delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Delete.
Result:The loopback disappears from the list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Close to finish.
See Also
• “Loopback Parameters in Display Mode” (p. 14-3)
• “Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode” (p. 14-5)
• “Creating Loopbacks” (p. 14-8)
• “Displaying Existing Loopbacks” (p. 14-7)
Loopback Tests Managing loopbacksDeleting Loopbacks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
14-9
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 15Protection Management
Overview
Purpose
The 1626 LM is designed to provide uninterrupted service in all circumstances. The
system's protection function reacts automatically to signal failures or to abnormal
situations which may be due to circumstances outside the 1626 LM.
This chapter describes:
• the 1626 LM protection principles,
• the procedures to perform when you want to manage protection mechanisms.
Contents
About 1626 LM Protection 15-2
Protection Principles 15-3
Recommended Board Location 15-10
The Protection Activation Process 15-11
Managing Protection 15-13
Protection Displayed Information 15-14
Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection 15-17
Controlling Protection 15-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
15-1
About 1626 LM Protection
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the principles and the necessary information you must know to be
able to manage 1626 LM protection.
Contents
Protection Principles 15-3
Recommended Board Location 15-10
The Protection Activation Process 15-11
Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Protection Principles
OSNCP
Client signal and related transponder protection is driven by OS�CP (Optical
Sub�etwork Connection Protection).
OS�CP completely protects the optical path, including cable, amplifiers, mux/demux and
transponders. A high level of reliability is obtained by complete duplication of the
transmission hardware:
• On the transmitting side, an optical splitter (in an OCPU board) duplicates the client
signal for the working and protection lines before the connection to the transponders.
• On the Receiving side, both transponders are connected to a coupler in the same
OCPU board. The received signal to be sent to client equipment is selected by
switching on the laser (transmitting toward the client) on one transponder, while the
laser of the other transponder is switched off.
In the current release, OS�CP protection is implemented as illustrated in Figure 15-1,
“OSC�P Principles” (p. 15-3)
Figure 15-1 OSCNP Principles
Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionProtection Principles
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
15-3
OSNCP Mechanism
In normal operation, when protection is activated, only the "receive" laser on the main
transponder is switched on while the corresponding laser on the spare transponder is
switched off. The signal from the main transponder is sent to the client via the OCPU
board.
In case of failure detected by the main transponder, the receiving main transponder laser
is switched off. The spare transponder laser is switched on via the backplane link which
enables communication between main and spare transponders. The signal from the spare
transponder is sent to the client via the OCPU board as illustrated in Figure 15-2,
“OS�CPActivation” (p. 15-4)
Attention: OSNCP switching within 50 ms from the original fault is not possible
in the following circumstances:
• UE alarm is raised.
50 ms switching is not possible because the UE counter is examined every second.In this particular situation, OS�CP switching triggers between 50 ms and morethan 1 s.
• Loss of user/client signal at the far-end NE.
In this case, the far-end transponder inserts an AIS, which triggers a protectionswitch on the near-end �E. Although the protection mechanism reacts in less than50 ms in the near-end �E, the total interruption of service can be slightly higherthan 50 ms because it includes the detection time of the original fault on thefar-end, and the propagation time of the AIS signal from the far-end �E to thenear-end �E.
�ote: OS�CP revertive protection is implemented for the following boards only:
• 40 Gbps transponders,
• TRBD1191 (10 Gbps transponder).
Figure 15-2 OSNCP Activation
Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionProtection Principles
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Revertive Protection
Revertive protection refers to a mechanism where the transport and selection of the
normal traffic signal (service) always returns to (or remains on) the working transport
entity if the switch requests are terminated; i.e., when the working transport entity has
recovered from the defect or the external request is cleared.
Non Revertive Protection
�on revertive protection refers to a mechanism, where the transport and selection of the
normal traffic signal does not return to the working transport entity if the switch requests
are terminated.
Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionProtection Principles
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
15-5
OMSP
WDM lines and related amplifier protection is driven by OMSP (Optical Multiplex
Section Protection).
OMSP completely protects the transmission line with the exception of transponders and
mux/demux. This type of protection is suitable to prevent traffic interruption in case of
damage to the transmission fiber cable . As transponders and mux/demux are not
duplicated, OMSP is an alternative to OS�CP at a lower cost, but does not protect against
equipment failures.
OMSP requires the following equipment:
• an OCPU 2100 board which implements a split and a switch function,
• a PSCU board which acts as a secondary protection controller and manages the OCPU
boards.
• an OSCU 1010 board which acts as a PSCU controller. The OSCU 1010 must have
the required functional variant to comply with OMSP.
In the current release, 1+1 non revertive protection is implemented as illustrated in figure
Figure 15-3, “Example of OMSP Implementation” (p. 15-6)
Figure 15-3 Example of OMSP Implementation
Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionProtection Principles
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
OMSP Mechanisms
In normal operation, when protection is activated, both receiving laser amplifiers are
working. Only the main amplifier is connected to the demultiplexer via the receiving
OCPU switch.
The OMSP switching event is triggered by:
• LOS detected on the site where the OMSP switching takes place if the affected span is
adjacent to the node itself.
• OMS-FDI forwarding on the OSC to signal a line failure on a remote span.
The following figure illustrates the two OMSP switching cases.
On detection of such failures, the receiving OSCU board communicates with PSCU board
via the backplane to request the receiving OCPU board to switch to the spare amplifier.
Figure 15-4 OMSP Switching cases
Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionProtection Principles
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
15-7
Transponder and Amplifier Boards
Depending on the type of protection, transponder and amplifier boards must follow
specific engineering rules.
OSNCP context
In OS�CP context, transponder and amplifier boards work by pairs. According to the slot
it is plugged in, a receiving board is either:
• a main or protected board, if it is plugged in an odd numbered slot, or
• a spare or protecting board, if it is plugged in an even numbered slot.
OMSP context
In OMSP context:
• Amplifier boards can be placed anywhere in the shelf where the OSCU board is
present. Via a configuration register, OSCU board is informed of the positions of
amplifier boards that communicate with it.
• PSCU board must be placed in slot 39.
Protection Control
As an operator, you can:
• force the traffic onto the spare board.
The traffic is handled by the spare/protecting board.
• lock the traffic onto the main board.
The traffic is exclusively handled by the main board. In this case the system behaves
as if there was no protection.
• cancel the force action.
• cancel the lock action.
Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionProtection Principles
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Protection Implementation
In the 1626 LM, 1+1 protection is viewed as a set of cross connections that are
automatically created after board cabling. Cross connections are created among the
following entities:
• Input
This entity corresponds to the main or protected channel.
– In OS�CP context: it is given by the TP and the physical OCPU port connected
to the main transponder board.
– In OMSP context: it is given by the TP and the physical port location of the main
amplifier board.
• Protecting input
This entity corresponds to the spare or protected channel.
– In OS�CP context: it is given by the TP and the physical OCPU port connected
to the spare transponder board.
– In OMSP context: it is given by the TP and the physical port location of the spare
amplifier board.
• Output
Depending on the type of protection, this entity may represent either one of the
following:
– In OS�CP context: represents the OCPU board which routes the signal to the
User-Client network. It is given by the TP and the physical port location of this
OCPU board.
– In OMSP context: points to the line input port of the “client” board. In fixed
configurations it is a mux/demux board. In flexible configurations, it is a coupler
board.
As an operator, you can manage protection cross-connections only for OS�CP protection
if you need to change parameters related to revertive mode.
See Also
• “Recommended Board Location” (p. 15-10)
• “The Protection Activation Process” (p. 15-11)
• “Protection Displayed Information” (p. 15-14)
• “Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection” (p. 15-17)
• “Controlling Protection” (p. 15-18)
Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionProtection Principles
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
15-9
Recommended Board Location
OS�CP and OMSP protection commissioning consists in a hardware installation and a
cabling declaration.
Client lines will be protected by OS�CP only if the boards are placed in specific slots.
At the same time, OCPU board location determines which transponders and amplifiers to
supervise.
To enable the protection mechanisms, you must comply with:
• the recommended OCPU, TRBx, PSCU3x locations noted in the installation guide,
and
• the recommended cabling plan.
See Also
• “Protection Principles” (p. 15-3)
• “The Protection Activation Process” (p. 15-11)
• “Protection Displayed Information” (p. 15-14)
• “Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection” (p. 15-17)
• “Controlling Protection” (p. 15-18)
Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionRecommended Board Location
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
The Protection Activation Process
To activate the protection functions, you must follow the following sequence of actions:
1. You must have the recommended installation engineering rules and cabling plan of
your configuration.
2. Install the required boards into the recommended slots.
OSNCP Case Plug TRBD/C and OCPU boards following
the recommended engineering rules.
Do not forget: TRBD/C work by pairs.
According to the slot it is plugged in, a
TRBD/C board is either:
• a main or protected board, if it is
plugged in an odd numbered slot, or
• a spare or protecting board, if it is
plugged in an even numbered slot.
OMSP Case Plug LOFA, OCPU, OSCU and PSU boards
following the recommended engineering
rules.
Do not forget:
• Amplifier boards can be placed
anywhere in the shelf where the
OSCU board is present. Via a
configuration register, OSCU board
is informed of the positions of
amplifier boards that communicate
with it.
• PSCU board must be placed in slot
39.
3. Declare and configure the required boards.
ATTENTION: In case of TRBD1191 transponders in an OS�CP configuration, you
must imperatively perform TRBD1191 internal cross connections before declaring the
cabling between TRBD1191 and OCPU boards.
4. Perform the physical cabling.
OSNCP Case Perform boards cabling following the
cabling plan:
a. OCPU and main TRBD/C Client
ports.
b. OCPU and spare TRBD/C Client
ports.
Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionThe Protection Activation Process
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
15-11
OMSP Case Perform boards cabling following the
cabling plan:
a. OSCU and amplifiers.
b. Amplifiers and OCPU.
c. OCPU and Mux/Demux or relevant
coupler.
Do not forget:
• Main LOFA OSC EXTRACTION port
must be cabled to OSCU OSC
Channel 1 INPUT port.
• Main LOFA OSC INSERTION port
must be cabled to OSCU OSC
Channel 1 OUTPUT port.
• Spare LOFA OSC EXTRACTION port
must be cabled to OSCU OSC
Channel 2 INPUT port.
• Spare LOFA OSC INSERTION port
must be cabled to OSCU OSC
Channel 2 OUTPUT port.
5. Set connectors in service.
6. Declare cabling configuration in compliance with the recommended engineering rules.
7. Update the transmission view.
8. End.
See Also
• “Protection Principles” (p. 15-3)
• “Recommended Board Location” (p. 15-10)
• “Protection Displayed Information” (p. 15-14)
• “Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection” (p. 15-17)
• “Controlling Protection” (p. 15-18)
Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionThe Protection Activation Process
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-12 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Managing Protection
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the displayed information and procedures to perform when you want
to manage 1626 LM protection.
Contents
Protection Displayed Information 15-14
Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection 15-17
Controlling Protection 15-18
Protection Management Managing ProtectionOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
15-13
Protection Displayed Information
Table 15-1, “Protection Parameters” (p. 15-14) describes the information displayed for
protection.
Table 15-1 Protection Parameters
Parameters Description Possible Values
Prot. State Indicates the protection state. Normal P
Protection path is active. �o alarms.
Normal I
Main path is active. �o alarms.
Auto P
Protection path is active. Alarms are
raised on the main path.
Auto I
Main path is active. Alarms are raised
on the protection path.
Lockout I
The traffic is locked onto the main
path.
The protection is disabled.
Forced P
The traffic is forced onto the protection
path. �o alarms.
SNCP For future use. �one.
State Indicates the state of the cross
connection.
A
Active cross connection.
Dir. Indicates the cross connection
direction
Uni
The connection is unidirectional.
Bi
The connection is bidirectional.
Input This entity corresponds to the main
or protected channel.
• In OS�CP context: it is given
by the TP and the physical
OCPU port connected to the
main board.
• In OMSP context: it is given
by the TP and the physical port
location of the main board.
Sequence giving the following
information:
• rack#
• subrack#
• slot#
• port#
• Termination Point identifier
Protection Management Managing ProtectionProtection Displayed Information
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-14 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 15-1 Protection Parameters (continued)
Parameters Description Possible Values
Protecting
Input
This entity corresponds to the spare
or protected channel.
• In OS�CP context: it is given
by the TP and the physical
OCPU port connected to the
spare transponder board.
• In OMSP context: it is given
by the TP and the physical port
location of the spare amplifier
board.
Sequence giving the following
information:
• rack#
• subrack#
• slot#
• port#
• Termination Point identifier
Output Depending on the type of
protection, this entity may
represents one of the following:
• In OS�CP context: represents
the OCPU board which routes
the signal to the User-Client
network. It is given by the TP
and the physical port location
of the related OCPU board.
• In OMSP context: points to a
port of the “client” board (the
line input port).
Sequence giving the following
information:
• rack#
• subrack#
• slot#
• port#
• Termination Point identifier
Revertive A protection characteristic:
• Revertive protection refers to a
mechanism where the transport
and selection of the normal
traffic signal (service) always
returns to (or remains on) the
working transport entity if the
switch requests are terminated;
i.e., when the working
transport entity has recovered
from the defect or the external
request is cleared.
• �on revertive protection refers
to a mechanism, where the
transport and selection of the
normal traffic signal does not
return to the working transport
entity if the switch requests are
terminated.
• Checked
The protection is revertive.
Revertive protection refers to
OS�CP protection for User-Client
signals. Such protection type is
supported by 40 Gbps transponders
and TRBD1191, 10 Gbps
transponder only.
• Unchecked
The protection is not revertive.
Protection Management Managing ProtectionProtection Displayed Information
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
15-15
Table 15-1 Protection Parameters (continued)
Parameters Description Possible Values
WRT Wait to Restore Time.
A period of time that must elapse
before a transport entity that has
recovered from a Signal Fail (SF)
or Signal Degrade (SD) condition
can be used again to transport the
normal traffic signal and/or to
select the normal traffic signal
from.
0 to 60,000 seconds
HOT Hold Off Time.
A delay that prevents an
autonomous switch of a protected
channel to the protecting path for
the configured time following
identification that an autonomous
protection switch is required.
0 to 10,000 milliseconds
See Also
• “Protection Principles” (p. 15-3)
• “Recommended Board Location” (p. 15-10)
• “Protection Displayed Information” (p. 15-14)
• “Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection” (p. 15-17)
• “Controlling Protection” (p. 15-18)
Protection Management Managing ProtectionProtection Displayed Information
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-16 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection
Purpose
Use this procedure to identify cross connections dedicated to protection purposes.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to recognize cross connections dedicated to protection
To recognize cross connection dedicated to protection, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Cross Connection Management.
Result:The Cross Connection Management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Search to display cross connections.
Result:The existing cross connections are displayed in the display area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the cross connections dedicated to protection with the Protecting Input column.
Any filled cell is related to a protection mechanism.
See Also
• “Protection Principles” (p. 15-3)
• “Recommended Board Location” (p. 15-10)
• “The Protection Activation Process” (p. 15-11)
• “Protection Displayed Information” (p. 15-14)
• “Controlling Protection” (p. 15-18)
Protection Management Managing ProtectionRecognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
15-17
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Controlling Protection
Purpose
Use this procedure to control 1626 LM protection.
Before you begin
Protection is implemented on the 1626 LM.
How to control protection
To control protection, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Cross Connection Management.
Result:The Cross Connection Management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Search to display cross connections.
Result:The existing cross connections are displayed in the display area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select a relevant row and click Protect...
Result:The Protection Actions window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
• To force the traffic onto the protecting board, go to Step 5.
• To lock the traffic onto the main transponder board, go to Step 6.
• To cancel a force action, go to Step 7.
• To cancel a lock action, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To force the traffic on the protecting board:
1. Click Protecting related to Force To: item.
2. Click OK to finish.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 To lock the traffic on the main board:
1. Click Invoke related to Lock Out: item.
2. Click OK to finish.
Protection Management Managing ProtectionControlling Protection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-18 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To cancel a lock action:
1. Click Release related to Force To: item.
2. Click OK to finish.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 To cancel a force action:
1. Click Release related to Lock Out: item.
2. Click OK to finish.
See Also
• “Protection Principles” (p. 15-3)
• “Recommended Board Location” (p. 15-10)
• “The Protection Activation Process” (p. 15-11)
• “Protection Displayed Information” (p. 15-14)
• “Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection” (p. 15-17)
Protection Management Managing ProtectionControlling Protection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
15-19
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 16Monitoring Procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedure to perform when you want to display:
• Instantaneous measurements,
• Abnormal condition list,
• Event logs,
• Channel margin states,
• Power level per channel frequency.
Contents
Displaying Instantaneous Measurements 16-2
Displaying the Abnormal Condition List 16-6
Displaying Event Logs 16-7
Displaying the Channel margin 16-8
Displaying Power Level per Channel Frequency 16-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
16-1
Displaying Instantaneous Measurements
Purpose
Use this procedure to display instantaneous measurements.
Good to know
The following table list the main instantaneous measurements by boards.
Board Measurement Measured for...
ESCT Temperature whole board
BMDX
CMDX
Temperature whole board
Reception Power• Each Mux Inputs
• Demux Input
• Mux Output
OMDX Temperature whole board
Reception Power• WDM Line Input
• Extra Input
• Each Mux Inputs
• Expansion Input
(OMDX8100_L1_x only)
Transmission Power WDM Line Output
ALCT Temperature whole board
Transmission Power WDM Line Output
OSCU Temperature whole board
LOFA Theoretical Flatness Constant whole board
Temperature whole board
Reception Power External Pump Input Port
(when applicable)
VOAAttenuation whole board
Transmission Power 1rst and 2nd Stage Output
Reception Power 1rst and 2nd Stage Input
EMPM Temperature whole board
• Pump bias current
• Laser temperature
Laser Module
Pump Power EMPM Output
Monitoring Procedures Displaying Instantaneous Measurements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Board Measurement Measured for...
BOFA Temperature whole board
Reception Power Gain Block Input
Transmission Power Gain Block Output
ETHC Temperature whole board
Reception Power• SFP Input
• XFP Input
Transmission Power• SFP Output
• XFP Output
Current• SFP Output
• XFP Output
TRBD 10 Gbps Temperature whole board
Reception Power• Client and WDM Line
Input
• XFP Input (when
applicable)
Transmission Power• WDM Line Output
• XFP Output (when
applicable)
Current XFP Output (when
applicable)
TRBC 10 Gbps Temperature whole board
Reception Power WDM Line Input
Transmission Power WDM Line Output
TRBD 40 Gbps Temperature whole board
Chromatic Dispersion WDM Line Input
Reception Power Client and WDM Line Input
Transmission Power WDM Line Output
Current �ot applicable
Monitoring Procedures Displaying Instantaneous Measurements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
16-3
Board Measurement Measured for...
TRBC 40 Gbps Temperature whole board
Chromatic Dispersion WDM Line Input
Reception Power• Client and WDM Line
Input
• XFP Input (when
applicable)
Transmission Power• WDM Line Output
• XFP Output (when
applicable)
Current XFP Output (when
applicable)
OADC Temperature whole board
Reception Power• Each Input ports
• Splitter Input
(OADC1230 and
OADC1300 only)
Transmission Power Coupler Output (OADC0104
only)
OCNC Temperature whole board
Reception Power Splitter Input
TDMX Temperature whole board
Reception Power WDM Line Input
Transmission Power Each channel output
WMAN Temperature whole board
Reception Power When applicable:
• WDM Line Input
• Each Wavelength
Manager Input
Transmission Power When applicable:
• WDM Line Output
• Wavelength Blocker
Output
• Each Wavelength
Selective Switch input
• Wavelength Manager
Input
Monitoring Procedures Displaying Instantaneous Measurements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Before you begin
• Equipment view window is displayed.
• Rack view window is displayed, or
• Board view window is displayed, or
How to display instantaneous measurements
To display instantaneous measurements, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Depending on the current view, select one of the following:
• Equipment > Instantaneous Measurements on > Selected Object.
• Board > Current Instantaneous Measurements
Result:The Instantaneous Measurements window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Close to finish.
Note
If the window has been opened for a certain time, click Refresh to update the
measurement values.
Monitoring Procedures Displaying Instantaneous Measurements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
16-5
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Displaying the Abnormal Condition List
Purpose
Use this procedure to display the abnormal condition list.
Good to know
The abnormal condition list provides the list of all abnormal situations.
The following lists examples of abnormal situations which are reported into the abnormal
situation list:
• An equipment which is plugged but not configured,
• A loopback on a port,
• APSD forced on or forced off on an amplifier,
• etc....
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is displayed.
How to display the abnormal condition list
To display the abnormal condition list, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Diagnosis > Abnormal Condition List
Result:The Abnormal Condition List window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select an abnormal condition and click OK.
Result:Detailed information is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Cancel to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Monitoring Procedures Displaying the Abnormal Condition List
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Displaying Event Logs
Purpose
Use this procedure to display event logs.
Good to know
The 1626 LM is keeping track of all operations or events.
You can retrieve:
• command operations which have been performed in the system,
• alarms which have been raised,
• events which have been tracked.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to display the event logs
To display event logs, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one of the following:
• Diagnosis>Command Log,
• Diagnosis>Alarm Log,
• Diagnosis>Event Log,
Result:According to your choice, a text file list all the related items.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Monitoring Procedures Displaying Event Logs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
16-7
Displaying the Channel margin
Purpose
Use this procedure to display the channel margin.
Good to know
• The channel margin formulates the available margin that a channel has before the
FEC mechanism cannot correct errors.
The channel margin is measured in dB and you can decide whether you want to
display it on a 5 or 30 seconds basis.
To quickly identify and anticipate transmission problems, each channel is displayed
with a specific color which corresponds to a specific state as explained in the
following table.
• For R-OADM and TR-OADM configurations, cross-connections must be performed.
See Also
“Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections” (p. 10-17)
Channel Margin States
Table 16-1 Channel Margin States
Channel Margin States Description
The channel has transmission errors which are corrected by the
FEC mechanism. Error rate is within acceptable range.
The channel has transmission errors which are corrected by the
FEC mechanism. Error rate is very low.
The channel has transmission errors which are not corrected by
the FEC mechanism. The FEC correction limit has been reached
or exceeded. Service is affected.
Current and previous BER values differ by more than a decade.
This indicates the channel has unstable transmission conditions.
The service may be affected.
Channel margin not correct:
• The data collection period is different from 5 or 30 sec. Ask
for a new channel margin calculation to confirm a
transmission problem.
• The number of transmission errors is too high.
The FEC correction limit has been reached or exceeded and
cannot correct errors anymore. The service is affected.
Monitoring Procedures Displaying the Channel margin
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Before you begin
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
• FEC mechanism is enabled on TRBx boards.
• For T-OADM configurations, cross-connections must be performed.
• Your configuration has at least one LOFA board.
How to display the channel margin
To display the channel margin, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Diagnosis > Counters
Result:The Digital Counters window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Choose OTS and Counters area, select an OTS port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click one of the following radio buttons:
• Near End 30s Channel Margin
• Near End 5s Channel Margin
Result:Click Apply.
Channel identifiers and associated channel margins are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Close to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Monitoring Procedures Displaying the Channel margin
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
16-9
Displaying Power Level per Channel Frequency
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to monitor and to display the channel power per port.
Spectrum Acquisition
To display measured power level (dBm) per channel frequency, you must use the
Spectrum Acquisition option that Board option provides.
You can only display power level per channel frequency for WMA� boards.
Power levels are displayed as bar charts.
Power Measure
OnWMA�1100 boards, power measure is performed on:
• Input port and
• Output port.
On WMA�3x, power measure is performed on:
• 3 input ports and
• 1 output port.
Displaying tabs, colored bullets and colored bars
Power measures by channel are displayed in tabs. One tab per port displays the measured
power spectrum. If the bullet associated to a tab is:
• Red: there is at least one channel which measured power is less than the minimum
configured value.
• Green: there is no control to perform. All the measures are compliant with the
configuration.
The same applies for graphical bars which represent graphically the power measure for
each channel.
Before you begin
Remind that this procedure applies only on WMA� boards.
How to display measured power level per channel frequency
To display measured power level (dBm) per channel frequency, perform the following
steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Subrack Viewwindow, double click a WMA� board.
Monitoring Procedures Displaying Power Level per Channel Frequency
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Result:The WMAN Board View window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From Boardmenu, select Spectrum Acquisition.
Result:The Spectrum Acquisition window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on the required tab to display power level per channel frequency associated to one
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Refresh to launch a new power level acquisition.
�ote: To display up to date power levels, you must click Refresh when you navigate
from one tab to another.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Place the cursor on a bar to display the measured values.
At the limit of the bar, you can display the following:
• OVER MAX: when the measured value exceeds the maximum configured value.
• BELOW MIN: when the measured value is less than the configured value.
• INVALID: when a problem has occurred.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Monitoring Procedures Displaying Power Level per Channel Frequency
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
16-11
17 17Performance Monitoring
Overview
Purpose
Quality of service delivered by the 1626 LM is directly related to your capacity to
respond to performance issues of your system.
In addition to equipment and transmission alarms, you have at your disposal specific
alarms to warn you on performance degradation of your transmission process.
This chapter describes the performance monitoring means and procedures to perform
when you want to monitor your system.
Contents
About Performance Management 17-3
Performance Counters 17-4
Performance Monitoring Mechanism 17-7
Counter Thresholds 17-8
Possible Counter Threshold Values 17-9
Managing Counter Threshold Tables 17-11
Displaying Counter Threshold Tables 17-12
Modifying Counter Threshold Tables 17-13
Managing Performance Monitoring 17-14
Starting Performance Monitoring (PM) 17-15
Resetting Counter Values 17-17
Refreshing Counter Values 17-18
Stopping Performance Monitoring 17-19
Creating a Trail Monitor (TM) 17-20
Deleting a Trail Monitor (TM) 17-21
Consulting Performance Data 17-22
Performance Current Data Displayed Information 17-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-1
Performance History Data Displayed Information 17-24
Consulting Performance Current Data 17-25
Consulting Performance History Data 17-26
Refreshing Current Counter Values 17-27
Refreshing History Counter Values 17-28
Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique Entry Point 17-29
Understanding the PM Overview Window 17-30
Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM Overview Window 17-31
Performance Monitoring Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
About Performance Management
Overview
Purpose
Performance monitoring increments performance counters for the following protocols and
correction methods:
• SDH/ RS - Layer 1,
• Ethernet 1 Gbps - Layer 1 and Layer 2 (MAC),
• Ethernet 10 Gbps - Layer 1 and Layer 2 (MAC),
• FEC/OCH,
• ODU2.
Contents
Performance Counters 17-4
Performance Monitoring Mechanism 17-7
Counter Thresholds 17-8
Possible Counter Threshold Values 17-9
Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-3
Performance Counters
There are two types of performance counters:
• Time counters
Time counters count how many seconds an error is present in the system for a given
period,
• Error counters
Error counters count the number of errors reported for a given period.
• Frame counters (Ethernet Layer 2 specific)
Frame counters count the number of received, emitted, lost, errored frames:
– since ETHC board provisioning,
– for a given period of time.
The following table describes the counters for each monitored layer.
Table 17-1 Performance Counters
Monitored
Protocols / Error
Correction
Method
Counters Description
SDH/RS ES Erroneous Seconds
ES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of:
• B1 code violation, or
• SDH/RS defects.
SES Severely Erroneous Seconds
SES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of:
• more than 2400 B1 code violations per second, or
• SDH/RS defects.
In the meantime, ES is still incremented.
BBE Background Block Errors
BBE counts the number of B1 code violations excluding those taken into
account by SES counter.
UAS UnAvailable Seconds
UAS counts the number of seconds of UnAvailable Time (UAT) during a
monitoring period. UAT period starts when 10 consecutive SES are reported.
Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementPerformance Counters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 17-1 Performance Counters (continued)
Monitored
Protocols / Error
Correction
Method
Counters Description
Ethernet - Layer 1
(1 and 10 Gbps)
ES Erroneous Seconds
ES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of:
• ICG (Invalid Code Group) for Ethernet 1 Gbps,
• HCV (Header Code Violation) for Ethernet 10 Gbps,
• Ethernet defects.
SES Severely Erroneous Seconds
SES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of:
• more than 10,000 ICG per second for Ethernet 1 Gbps
• more than 255 HCV per second for Ethernet 10 Gbps,
• at least one Ethernet defect.
In the meantime, ES is still incremented.
BBE Background Block Errors
BBE counts the number of:
• ICG excluding those counted by SES counter for Ethernet 1 Gbps,
• HCV excluding those counted by SES counter for Ethernet 10 Gbps.
UAS UnAvailable Seconds
UAS counts the number of seconds of UnAvailable Time (UAT) during a
monitoring period. UAT period starts when 10 consecutive SES are reported.
Ethernet - Layer 2
(1 Gbps)
TRCF Total Received Correct Frames
TRCF counts the number of valid frames received by each Ethernet port.
TRCF sums the number of received unicast, multicast and broadcast frames.
TRCO Total Received Correct Octets
TRCO counts the number of valid bytes received by each Ethernet port.
TRSEF Total Received Service Errored Frames
TRSEF counts the number of errored frames received by each Ethernet port.
TTF Total Transmitted Frames
TTF counts the number of frames transmitted by each Ethernet port.
TTF sums the number of transmitted unicast, multicast and broadcast
frames.
TTO Total Transmitted Octets
TTO counts the number of bytes transmitted by each Ethernet port.
TDF Total Dropped Frames
TDF counts the number of frames dropped by each Ethernet port.
Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementPerformance Counters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-5
Table 17-1 Performance Counters (continued)
Monitored
Protocols / Error
Correction
Method
Counters Description
FEC/OCH SCS Severely Corrected Seconds
SCS counts the number of seconds spent to correct errors just before the
FEC correction limit.
SCS integrates also the immediate period after the FEC correction limit
where the errors are not corrected.
SUS Severely Uncorrected Seconds
SUS counts the number of seconds of presence of FEC/OCH layer defects in
the system.
BEC Background Errors Corrected
BEC counts the number of corrected errors excluding those taken into
account by SCS counter.
UAS UnAvailable Seconds
UAS counts the number of seconds of UnAvailable Time (UAT) during a
monitoring period. UAT period starts when 10 consecutive SUS are reported.
BBU Background Block Uncorrected
BBU counts the number of uncorrected blocks, excluding those taken into
account by SUS counter.
ODU2 SES Severely Erroneous Seconds
SES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of more than
12,303 errored ODU frames (15% of ODU frames).
NEUAS Near End UnAvailable Seconds
�EUAS counts the number of seconds of UnAvailable Time (UAT) during a
monitoring period. UAT period starts when 10 consecutive SES are reported.
This counter is similar to the UAS counter refering to other layers.
BBE Background Block Errors
BBE counts the number of Bip-8 code violations excluding those taken into
account by SES counter.
See Also
• “Performance Monitoring Mechanism” (p. 17-7)
• “Counter Thresholds” (p. 17-8)
• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)
• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)
• “Managing Performance Monitoring” (p. 17-14)
Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementPerformance Counters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
• “Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)
• “Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)
Performance Monitoring Mechanism
Performance monitoring is based on counter value collection which triggers every 15
minutes from 00:00 UTC for a 24 hours period.
To be able to use counter data, you must start the performance monitoring mechanism on
the required termination point.
During the start operation, you specify:
• If you want to save the counter values every 15 minutes and/or every 24 hours. At the
end of the defined period, counter values are logged into a history file. Counter values
are then reset to 0, to increment again for a new period.
• If you want to use thresholds to raise a TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm) and its
related PM-AS (Performance Monitoring - Alarm Synthesis).
If not, performance monitoring will work and counters will increment on the selected
period basis, but no alarm will be raised.
You can modify your initial settings during performance monitoring execution.
See Also
• “Performance Monitoring Mechanism” (p. 17-7)
• “Counter Thresholds” (p. 17-8)
• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)
• “Possible Counter Threshold Values” (p. 17-9)
• “Managing Performance Monitoring” (p. 17-14)
• “Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)
• “Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)
Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementPerformance Counters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-7
Counter Thresholds
For each of the monitored layers, you manage counter threshold values via 2 tables:
• threshold table related to 15 minutes period,
• threshold table related to 24 hours period.
For the threshold table related to 15 minutes period, each counter has:
• an alarm triggering threshold value, and
• an alarm clearing threshold value.
In the 1626 LM context:
• the alarm triggering threshold value is called Value Up,
• the alarm clearing threshold value is called Value Down.
When Value Up is reached or exceeded, a TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm) is raised and
triggers a PM-AS (Performance Monitoring - Alarm Synthesis) with a severity level. You
can configure the severity of the raised alarms.
The alarms are cleared as soon as the Value Down is reached.
Figure 17-1, “CA/PM-AS Raise and Clear Logic” (p. 17-8) illustrates TCA/PM-AS raise
and clear logic.
See Also
• “Performance Monitoring Mechanism” (p. 17-7)
• “Counter Thresholds” (p. 17-8)
• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)
Figure 17-1 CA/PM-AS Raise and Clear Logic
Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementCounter Thresholds
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
• “Possible Counter Threshold Values” (p. 17-9)
• “Managing Performance Monitoring” (p. 17-14)
• “Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)
• “Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)
Possible Counter Threshold Values
The following table describes counter threshold table value for 15 minutes period.
Table 17-2 15 minutes Counter Thresholds
Threshold Table Counters Default Threshold Values Threshold Value Range
3 - RS_15m BBE Value Up: 2400
Value Down: 200
1 to 2,159,100
ES Value Up: 50
Value Down: 5
1 to 900
SES Value Up: 10
Value Down: 0
1 to 900
5 - 8B_10B_15m BBE Value Up: 11250
Value Down: 90
1 to 2,159,100
ES Value Up: 50
Value Down: 5
1 to 900
SES Value Up: 10
Value Down: 0
1 to 900
7 - 64B_66B_15m BBE Value Up: 426
Value Down: 3
1 to 2,159,100
ES Value Up: 50
Value Down: 5
1 to 900
SES Value Up: 10
Value Down: 0
1 to 900
9 - OCH_15m BBU Value Up: 1
Value Down: 0
1 to (231 - 1)
BEC Value Up: 213
Value Down: 8
1 to 235,814,400
SUS Value Up: 10
Value Down: 0
1 to 900
SCS Value Up: 10
Value Down: 0
1 to 900
Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementCounter Thresholds
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-9
Table 17-2 15 minutes Counter Thresholds (continued)
Threshold Table Counters Default Threshold Values Threshold Value Range
11 - ODU_15m BBE Value Up: 738
Value Down: 6
1 to 44,481,600
SES Value Up: 900
Value Down: 0
1 to 900
The following table describes counter threshold table value for 24 hours period.
Table 17-3 24 hours Counter Thresholds
Threshold Table Counters Default Threshold Values Threshold Value Range
2 - RS_24h BBE 36000 1 to 207,273,600
ES 150 1 to 86,400
SES 15 1 to 86,400
4 - 8B_10B_24h BBE 1,080,000 1 to 207,273,600
ES 150 1 to 86,400
SES 15 1 to 86,400
6 - 64B_66B_24h BBE 40,909 1 to 207,273,600
ES 150 1 to 86,400
SES 15 1 to 86,400
8 - OCH_24h BBU 1 1 to (231 - 1)
BEC 218 1 to (231 - 1)
SUS 300 1 to 86,400
SCS 300 1 to 86,400
11 - ODU_24h BBE 70870 1 to (231 - 1)
SES 1 1 to 86,400
See Also
• “Performance Monitoring Mechanism” (p. 17-7)
• “Counter Thresholds” (p. 17-8)
• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)
• “Possible Counter Threshold Values” (p. 17-9)
• “Managing Performance Monitoring” (p. 17-14)
• “Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)
• “Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)
Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementPossible Counter Threshold Values
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Managing Counter Threshold Tables
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to manage counter
threshold tables.
Contents
Displaying Counter Threshold Tables 17-12
Modifying Counter Threshold Tables 17-13
Performance Monitoring Managing Counter Threshold TablesOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-11
Displaying Counter Threshold Tables
Purpose
Use this procedure to display counter threshold tables.
Before you begin
The 162- LM GUI is started.
How to display counter threshold tables
To display counter threshold tables, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Performance>Threshold Tables.
Result:The PM Threshold Table Select window is displayed and displays the list of
threshold tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the list, select a table and click Display...
Result:The PM Threshold Table Display windows appears and displays the threshold
values and associated alarm severity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Close to finish.
See Also
• “Performance Monitoring Mechanism” (p. 17-7)
• “Counter Thresholds” (p. 17-8)
• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)
• “Possible Counter Threshold Values” (p. 17-9)
• “Managing Performance Monitoring” (p. 17-14)
• “Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)
• “Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)
Performance Monitoring Managing Counter Threshold TablesDisplaying Counter Threshold Tables
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-12 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modifying Counter Threshold Tables
Purpose
Use this procedure to modify counter threshold tables.
Before you begin
�ote: The following is not applicable for the current release:
• Monitored Entity Types area of PM Threshold Table Modify window.
• Create..., Attach and Delete buttons of PM Threshold Table Select window.
How to modify counter threshold tables
To modify counter threshold tables, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Performance>Threshold Tables menu.
Result:The PM Threshold Table Select window is displayed and displays the list of
threshold tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the list, select a table and click Modify...
Result:The PM Threshold Table Modify windows appears and displays the threshold
values and associated alarm severity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Modify the relevant field for the required counter and click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Close to finish.
See Also
• “Performance Monitoring Mechanism” (p. 17-7)
• “Counter Thresholds” (p. 17-8)
• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)
• “Possible Counter Threshold Values” (p. 17-9)
• “Managing Performance Monitoring” (p. 17-14)
• “Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)
• “Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)
Performance Monitoring Managing Counter Threshold TablesModifying Counter Threshold Tables
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-13
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing Performance Monitoring
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to manage performance
monitoring.
Contents
Starting Performance Monitoring (PM) 17-15
Resetting Counter Values 17-17
Refreshing Counter Values 17-18
Stopping Performance Monitoring 17-19
Creating a Trail Monitor (TM) 17-20
Deleting a Trail Monitor (TM) 17-21
Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-14 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Starting Performance Monitoring (PM)
Purpose
Use this procedure to start performance monitoring.
Before you begin
You must comply if you comply with the following:
To start PM onlayers ...
Select board type ... And check that ...
SDH/RS TRBx TM (Trail Monitor) on ODU1 or ODU2
block is created.
ETHC RSTTP block is available.
Ethernet 1 Gbps 2*GE_FC TM on OCHgdc block is created.
ETHC OCHgdc block is available.
Ethernet 10
Gbps
TRBD1191 TM on ODU2 block is created.
FEC/OCH TRBx OCH block is available.
• The Transmission View window of the required board is displayed.
• The relevant transmission block is selected.
How to start performance monitoring
To start performance monitoring, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance > Configure
Performance Monitoring.
Result:The PM Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select NE15m or NE24h tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Tick Create Current Data check box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If you want to start performance monitoring without performance alarms, perform the
following, else go to step Step 5.
1. From the Threshold table list, select No table and click Apply.
2. Go to step Step 6.
Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringStarting Performance Monitoring (PM)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-15
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If you want to start performance monitoring with performance alarms, perform the
following:
1. From the Threshold table list, select Default table and click Attach.
2. Go to step Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If necessary, select the other tab and perform the procedure from step Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Close to finish.
See Also
• “About Performance Management” (p. 17-3)
• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)
• “Possible Counter Threshold Values” (p. 17-9)
• “Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)
• “Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)
Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringStarting Performance Monitoring (PM)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-16 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resetting Counter Values
Purpose
Use this procedure to reset counter values.
Good to know
• UAS counter reset is not applicable.
• Layer 2 counter reset is not applicable.
Before you begin
• The Transmission View window of the required board is displayed.
• The monitored transmission block (P) is selected.
How to reset counter values
To reset counter values, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Display Current
Data....
Result:The PM Current Data window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Reset.
Result:The counter values are reset. They increment again until the end of the current
period.
See Also
• “About Performance Management” (p. 17-3)
• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)
• “Possible Counter Threshold Values” (p. 17-9)
• “Managing Performance Monitoring” (p. 17-14)
• “Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)
• “Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)
Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringResetting Counter Values
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-17
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refreshing Counter Values
Purpose
Use this procedure to refresh counter values.
Before you begin
• The Transmission View window of the required board is displayed.
• The monitored transmission block (P) is selected.
How to refresh counter values
To refresh counter values, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Display Current
Data....
Result:The PM Current Data window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Refresh.
Result:The counter values are refreshed.
Wait at least 20 seconds between 2 refresh actions.
See Also
• “About Performance Management” (p. 17-3)
• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)
• “Possible Counter Threshold Values” (p. 17-9)
• “Managing Performance Monitoring” (p. 17-14)
• “Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)
• “Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)
Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringRefreshing Counter Values
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-18 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stopping Performance Monitoring
Purpose
Use this procedure to stop performance monitoring.
Before you begin
• The Transmission View window of the required board is displayed.
• The monitored transmission block (P) is selected.
How to stop performance monitoring
To stop performance monitoring, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Configure
Performance Monitoring.
Result:The PM Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select NE15m or NE24h tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Untick Create Current Data check box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From the Threshold table list, select No table and click Apply.
See Also
• “About Performance Management” (p. 17-3)
• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)
• “Possible Counter Threshold Values” (p. 17-9)
• “Managing Performance Monitoring” (p. 17-14)
• “Consulting Performance Current Data” (p. 17-25)
• “Consulting Performance History Data” (p. 17-26)
Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringStopping Performance Monitoring
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-19
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating a Trail Monitor (TM)
Purpose
Use this procedure to create a trail monitor.
Reminder
You can create a TM on transmission blocks ...to start PM on layers...
ODU1 and ODU2 (TRBx) SDH/RS
ODU2 (TRBD1191) Ethernet 10 Gbps
OCHgdc (2*GE_FC) Ethernet 1 Gbps
OCH (TRBx) FEC/OCH
Before you begin
• The Transmission View window of the required board is displayed.
• The relevant transmission block is selected.
How to create a TM
To create a TM, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Trail Monitor > Create.
Result:The Transmission View window is updated and the TM representation is
displayed.
See Also
• “About Performance Management” (p. 17-3)
• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)
• “Possible Counter Threshold Values” (p. 17-9)
• “Managing Performance Monitoring” (p. 17-14)
• “Consulting Performance Current Data” (p. 17-25)
• “Consulting Performance History Data” (p. 17-26)
Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringCreating a Trail Monitor (TM)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-20 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deleting a Trail Monitor (TM)
Purpose
Use this procedure to delete a trail monitor
Before you begin
• The Transmission View window of the required board is displayed.
• The monitored transmission block (P) is selected.
How to delete a TM
To delete a TM, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Trail Monitor > Delete.
Result:The Transmission View window is updated and the TM representation
disappears.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringDeleting a Trail Monitor (TM)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-21
Consulting Performance Data
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to consult performance
data.
Contents
Performance Current Data Displayed Information 17-23
Performance History Data Displayed Information 17-24
Consulting Performance Current Data 17-25
Consulting Performance History Data 17-26
Refreshing Current Counter Values 17-27
Refreshing History Counter Values 17-28
Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-22 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Performance Current Data Displayed Information
Each counter values saving period has a specific tab which title is:
• Pm15minUnidirect: for 15 minutes counter values saving period,
• Pm24hUnidirect: for 24 hours counter values saving period.
�ote: For ETHC layer 2 counters, the counter value is saved since the ETHC board
provisioning and not for a 15 minutes or a 24 hours period.
The following table describes the displayed current data parameters.
Table 17-4 Current Data Parameters
Parameters Description Possible Values
Administrative
State
Displays the administrative state of the PM
process.
Unlocked
The PM process is running normally.
Measurement points are collecting data.
Locked
The PM process is stopped.
Data collection is suspended
Operational State Displays the operational state of the PM
process.
Enabled
PM process started. Measurement points
are initialized for data collection.
Disabled
PM process not started. Measurement
points are not initialized.
Suspect Data Informs if the displayed counter values are
significant or not for a given period.
Yes
The counter value collection has been
stopped. The counter values are not
significant for the given period.
No
The counter value collection has ended
correctly for the given period. The counter
values are significant.
Threshold Table Displays the name of the threshold table. The name of the threshold table.
Current Problem
List
Lists the counters which threshold has
been reached or exceeded.
List of counters.
Elapsed Time Displays the elapsed time from the
beginning of a given period of from a
reset.
HH:MM:SS.
Counter Values Shows the counter values at the time of
display.
Counter values.
Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataPerformance Current Data Displayed Information
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-23
See Also
“Consulting Performance Current Data” (p. 17-25)
Performance History Data Displayed Information
Each counter values saving period has a specific tab which title is:
• Pm15minUnidirect: for 15 minutes counter values saving period,
• Pm24hUnidirect: for 24 hours counter values saving period.
�ote: For ETHC layer 2 counters, the counter value is saved for a 15 minutes period
only.
The following table describes the displayed history data parameters.
Table 17-5 History Data Parameters
Parameters Description Possible Values
Interval End Time Displays the end time of a given period. DD.MM.YYYYHH:MM:SS
Counter values Shows the counter values at the time of
display.
Counter values.
Elapsed Time Displays the elapsed time from the
beginning of a given period of from a
reset.
HH:M�:SEC.
Suspect Data Informs if the displayed counter values are
significant or not for a given period.
Yes
The counter value collection has been
stopped. The counter values are not
significant for the given period.
No
The counter value collection has ended
correctly for the given period. The counter
values are significant.
See Also
“Refreshing Current Counter Values” (p. 17-27)
Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataPerformance Current Data Displayed Information
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-24 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Consulting Performance Current Data
Purpose
Use this procedure to consult performance current data
Before you begin
• The Transmission View window of the required board is displayed.
• The monitored transmission block (P) is selected.
How to consult current performance data
To consult performance current data, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Display Current
Data....
Result:The PM Current Data window is displayed.
See Also
“Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)
Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataConsulting Performance Current Data
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-25
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Consulting Performance History Data
Purpose
use this procedure to consult performance history data.
Before you begin
• The Transmission View window of the required board is displayed.
• The monitored transmission block (P) is selected.
How to consult performance history data
To consult performance history data, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Display History
Data....
Result:The PM History Data window is displayed.
See Also
“Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)
Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataConsulting Performance History Data
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-26 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refreshing Current Counter Values
Purpose
Use this procedure to refresh current counter values.
Before you begin
• The Transmission View window of the required board is displayed.
• The monitored transmission block (P) is selected.
How to refresh current counter values
To refresh current counter values, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Display History
Data....
Result:The PM History Data window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Refresh.
Result:The counter values are refreshed.
Wait at least 20 seconds between 2 refresh actions.
See Also
“Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)
Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataRefreshing Current Counter Values
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-27
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refreshing History Counter Values
Purpose
Use this procedure to refresh history counter values.
Before you begin
• The Transmission View window of the required board is displayed.
• The monitored transmission block (P) is selected.
How to refresh history counter values
To refresh history counter values, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Display History
Data....
Result:The PM History Data window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Refresh.
Result:The counter values are refreshed.
Wait at least 20 seconds between 2 refresh actions.
See Also
“Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)
Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataRefreshing History Counter Values
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-28 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing Performance Monitoring From a UniqueEntry Point
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how you can manage Performance Monitoring from a unique entry
point thanks to the PM Overview window.
Contents
Understanding the PM Overview Window 17-30
Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM Overview Window 17-31
Performance Monitoring Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique EntryPoint
Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-29
Understanding the PM Overview Window
The PM Overview Window
The PM Overview window enables you to collect and display the required TP
(Termination Points) on which you want to perform one of the following:
• To configure Performance Monitoring.
• To display current or history data.
• To cancel TP display.
• To access to a selected TP transmission view.
Benefit of PM Overview window
From the PM Overview window, you can basically perform all the Performance
Monitoring procedures without having to access one by one, the transmission views of all
the related monitored entities.
�ote: For information, the unitary Performance Monitoring procedures are accessible
at the following place:
• “Starting Performance Monitoring (PM)” (p. 17-15)
• “Consulting Performance Data” (p. 17-22)
PM Overview Searching Criteria
The following table describes the searching criteria you can use.
To be completed. Description of search criteria.
PM Overview Possible Tasks
To be completed. Description of each buttons.
See Also
• “Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM Overview Window” (p. 17-31)
Performance Monitoring Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique EntryPoint
Understanding the PM Overview Window...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-30 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM OverviewWindow
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to manage Performance Monitoring from a unique
entry point rather that having to access one by one, the transmission views of all the
related monitored entities.
Before you begin
To be able to start PMon layers ...
Check that ...
SDH/RS TM (Trail Monitor) on ODU1 or ODU2 block is created.
RSTTP block is available.
Ethernet 1 Gbps TM on OCHgdc block is created.
OCHgdc block is available.
Ethernet 10 Gbps TM on ODU2 block is created.
FEC/OCH OCH block is available.
To know how to create a Trail Monitor, refer to “Creating a Trail Monitor (TM)”
(p. 17-20)
How to manage performance Monitoring from the PM Overview window
To manage performance monitoring from the PM Overview window, perform the
following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Performance>PM Overview...
Result:The PM Overview window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If necessary, complete the search criteria.
To know details about search criteria, refer to “PM Overview Searching Criteria”
(p. 17-30)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the main displaying area, select the node an click Add TP...
Result:The TP Search for PM Overview window is displayed.
For any details about TP Search window, refer to “Describing and Using the Searchfor Termination Point Input Windows” (p. 3-31)
Performance Monitoring Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique EntryPoint
Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM OverviewWindow
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
17-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From Equipment area, select the relevant entry.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If necessary, from TP Search Criteria area, set the relevant search criteria.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Search.
Result:The system retrieves and displays the TP in Termination Points area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select one, several or all TP and click OK.
Result:
• The TP Search for PM Overview disappears.
• The PM Overview window is displayed and displays the selected TPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select one TP and apply one of the following tasks:
• Config PM... to configure and start Performance Monitoring on the select TP.
• Current Data to display current performance data.
• History Data to display performance history data.
• Delete to delete the displayed TP from the main displaying area.
• Delete all to delete all the displayed TP from the main displaying area.
• Port View... to display the transmission view of the selected TP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If necessary repeat action Step 8 as many times you need to configure/reconfigure or to
display Performance Monitoring on selected TPs.
See Also
• “The PM Overview Window” (p. 17-30)
• “Starting Performance Monitoring (PM)” (p. 17-15)
• “Consulting Performance Data” (p. 17-22)
Performance Monitoring Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique EntryPoint
Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM OverviewWindow
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-32 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 18System Information
Collection and
Exportation
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures to follow when you want to collect or export
system information.
Contents
Remote Inventory Displayed Information 18-2
Uploading the System Remote Inventory 18-3
Capturing the System Components Remote Inventory Information 18-4
Exporting System Configuration to an XML File 18-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
18-1
Remote Inventory Displayed Information
The following table describes the remote inventory displayed information.
Table 18-1 Remote Inventory Displayed Information
Parameters Description
Company Displays the manufacturer of the unit
Unit Type Displays the unit acronym
Unit Part Number Displays the manufacturer product part number. This number is printed on
labels or on unit front coverplate.
Software part Number Displays the related software identifier
CLEI Code Displays the Common Language Equipment Identification code according to
Bellcore specification (TRS-ISD-325).
Manufacturing Plant Displays the manufacturing site
Serial Number Displays the product serial number. Compliant with �R 130 standard.
Date Identifier Displays a sequence of 2 digits identifiers which indicate a specific date in the
manufacturing and order flow process. It is associated with a date.
00:Manufacturing at the final testing date
01: Production order date
02:Manufacturing date at the unit lot
03: Shipment date to customer
04: Customer order date
Date (YYMMDD) Displays the date related to the Date identifier.
System Information Collection and Exportation Remote Inventory Displayed Information
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Uploading the System Remote Inventory
Purpose
use this procedure to upload the system remote inventory.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to upload the system remote inventory
To upload the system remote inventory, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Supervision>Upload Remote Inventory.
Result:The Question dialog box appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click OK.
Result:The upload starts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Wait until the Remote inventory upload Completed message is displayed and
click OK.
Note
The system remote inventory data are stored on the Craft Terminal PC.
System Information Collection and Exportation Uploading the System Remote Inventory
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
18-3
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Capturing the System Components Remote InventoryInformation
Purpose
Use this procedure to capture the system components remote inventory information.
Before you begin
The Equipment view window is displayed.
How to capture the system components remote inventory information
To capture system components remote inventory information, perform the following
steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Equipment>Remote Inventory.
• To capture rack or subrack level remote inventory information, go to Step 2.
• To capture board level remote inventory information, go to Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To capture rack and subrack level remote inventory information, perform the following
sequence:
1. Click on the required rack.
2. Select Equipment>Remote Inventory.
3. Click Rack Level or subrack Level.
The Confirmation dialog box appears.
4. Click OK to validate your choice.
The upload starts.
5. From the display window, you can print or save the rack or subrack remote inventory
data.
There is no error message to indicate that there is no printer connected to the Craft
terminal PC.
6. End of rack or subrack remote inventory information capture. Go to End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To capture board level remote inventory information, perform the following sequence:
1. Click on a board.
2. Select Equipment>Remote Inventory.
3. Select Board Level.
The Confirmation dialog box appears.
4. Click OK to validate your choice.
The upload starts.
The board remote inventory data are displayed.
System Information Collection and Exportation Capturing the System Components Remote InventoryInformation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
System Information Collection and Exportation Capturing the System Components Remote InventoryInformation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
18-5
Exporting System Configuration to an XML File
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to export system configuration information to an xml
file.
Before you begin
The configuration of the node is complete.
How to export the system configuration to an xml file
To export the system configuration to an xml file, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Export Configuration menu.
Result:The Export Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From theExport Configuration window, you can check one or several check boxes
corresponding to the type of information you want to export.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Browse to select the location where you want to save the xml file.
Result:The Export to XML file window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select a drive and enter a file name into Choise.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Apply.
Result:Export starts. When finished, Information box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click OK.
Result:The Information box disappears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Cancel to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
System Information Collection and Exportation Exporting System Configuration to an XML File
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
19 19Alarm Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter:
• gives an overview on the 1626 LM alarm organization,
• describes the parameters and procedures to follow to manage the alarm severity
profiles,
• describes the parameters and procedures to follow to manage the alarm threshold
tables.
Contents
About Alarms 19-3
Alarm Types 19-4
Alarm Severity Indicators 19-5
Operation Domain Alarm Indicators 19-7
Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles 19-8
Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles) 19-10
Displaying ASAP Detailed Information 19-11
Creating an ASAP 19-12
Modifying an ASAP 19-14
Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity 19-16
Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities 19-18
De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities 19-20
Deleting ASAPs 19-22
Managing Alarm Threshold Tables 19-23
Alarm Threshold Parameters 19-24
Displaying Board Alarm Threshold 19-27
Creating Alarm Threshold Tables 19-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-1
Assigning an Alarm Threshold to a Board 19-30
Modifying Alarm Threshold Tables 19-31
Deleting Alarm Threshold Tables 19-33
Managing Auto Discovery Alarm 19-34
Enabling/Disabling Auto Discovery Alarm 19-35
Alarm Management Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
About Alarms
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the 1626 LM alarm system.
Contents
Alarm Types 19-4
Alarm Severity Indicators 19-5
Operation Domain Alarm Indicators 19-7
Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles 19-8
Alarm Management About AlarmsOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-3
Alarm Types
The 1626 LM supports the following alarm types:
• Equipment alarms
• Transmission alarms
• Housekeeping alarm
• Processing alarm
• Auto Discovery alarm
Equipment Alarms
These alarms report faults that are raised by a specific 1626 LM hardware component.
Equipment alarms warn of:
• 1626 LM internal fiber cable connection problem
• 1626 LM internal fiber break
• 1626 LM board failure
Transmission Alarms
These alarms report communication faults between a 1626 LM and remote network
equipment.
Transmission alarms warn of:
• Fiber cable break
• Line problems within the network
• Bad transmission quality
• Problems on remote network equipment
Housekeeping Alarm
There is one alarm only, which relates to the environmental issues. This alarm is raised
after external output points configuration.
Processing Alarm
This alarm relates to configuration data corruption. This alarm is raised when the database
integrity test reports a failure.
Auto Discovery Alarm
This alarm relates to the ability of the 1626 LM to report to the network manager that:
• a new 1626 LM has been introduced in the network, or
• existing 1626 LM communication addresses have been modified.
Alarm Management About AlarmsAlarm Types
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alarm Severity Indicators
The 1626 LM tracks and reports faults. If a fault occurs, an alarm is generated.
You can identify very quickly if alarms have been reported with the alarm severity
indicators located at the top left of the GUI.
According to the severity level, Alarm indicators display different shapes and colors:
When there are no raised alarms, indicators are just rectangles, without any numbers as
illustrated the following figure.
When there are raised alarms, indicators display a circle with a figure for the number of
alarms corresponding to the severity level. The following figure gives an example of
alarm indicators displaying raised alarms.
Alarm severity levels are defined as mentioned in the following table.
Table 19-1 Alarm Severity Levels
Severity
Levels
Colors Description
CRITICAL (CRI) Red A service-affecting condition has occurred and immediate
corrective action is required.
MAJOR (MAJ) Orange A service-affecting condition has developed and urgent corrective
action is required.
MINOR (MIN) Yellow A non-service-affecting fault condition has occurred, and you need
to take corrective action to prevent a more serious fault (for
example, one affecting the service).
WARNING (WNG) Cyan Detection of a potential or impending service-affecting fault,
before any significant effects have been felt.
INDETERMINATE
(IND)
White The severity level cannot be determined.
Figure 19-1 Alarm Severity Indicators / No Raised Alarms
Figure 19-2 Alarm Severity Indicators / Raised Alarms
Alarm Management About AlarmsAlarm Severity Indicators
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-5
�ote: The five alarm severity indicators are greyed-out when the alarm notification
has been inhibited. The indicators keep the information they had just before the inhibit
action.
Alarm Management About AlarmsAlarm Severity Indicators
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Operation Domain Alarm Indicators
To spot very quickly the operation domains which are impacted by alarms, you can use
the operation domain alarm indicators located at the top right of the GUI. With these
indicators, you know if alarms are related to:
• External Points
• Equipments
• Transmissions
According to the severity level, alarms domain indicators display different shapes and
colors:
• When there are no raised alarms, indicators are just rectangles, without any numbers.
• When there are raised alarms, indicators display a circle with a figure for the number
of alarms corresponding to the operation domain. The following figure gives an
example of operation domain alarm indicators displaying raised and no raised alarms.
The severity level conventions are the same as for alarm severity indicators.
Figure 19-3 Operation Domain Alarm Indicators
Alarm Management About AlarmsOperation Domain Alarm Indicators
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-7
Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles
Each managed entity is assigned with a default alarm severity level via a profile which is
called ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profile).
An ASAP maps an alarm to a severity level for:
• service-affecting context (SA)
• non-service-affecting context (NSA).
The system determines automatically SA or NSA context depending on the implication of
the managed entity in the transmission process. If the managed entity participates in the
transmission process, it will be considered as part of a service-affecting context (SA).
By default the 1626 LM is delivered with 4 system ASAP which can not be updated.
The 4 system ASAP are described in the following table.
Table 19-2 System ASAP
ASAP Description
PRIMARY_ALARMS The ASAP which defines the SA and �SA severity levels for:
• transmission alarms (excepted for AIS and SSF alarms),
• equipment alarms.
This is the ASAP which is basically assigned to almost all
managed entities.
ALL_ALARMS The ASAP which defines the SA and �SA severity levels for:
• all transmission alarms,
• all equipment alarms
PATH_ALARMS The ASAP which defines the SA and �SA severity levels for:
• transmission alarms (excepted for AIS alarm),
• equipment alarms.
When the Remote Manager takes control of 1626 LM, all
managed entities are assigned with ALL_ALARMSASP.
NO_ALARMS The ASAP which inhibits all alarms.
This ASAP is very useful at 1626 LM installation.
Alarm Management About AlarmsConfiguring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
System ASAP
To be able to create a specific ASAP and to assign it to a managed entity, you must:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one of the default ASAP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clone the selected ASAP and save it with a specific name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Assign the relevant SA and �SA severity levels for each required alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Assign the ASAP to the adequate managed entities.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 End.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Management About AlarmsConfiguring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-9
Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity AssignmentProfiles)
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the parameters and procedure to perform when you want to manage
alarm severity assignment profiles.
Contents
Displaying ASAP Detailed Information 19-11
Creating an ASAP 19-12
Modifying an ASAP 19-14
Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity 19-16
Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities 19-18
De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities 19-20
Deleting ASAPs 19-22
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Displaying ASAP Detailed Information
Purpose
Use this procedure to display ASAP detailed information.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to display ASAP detailed information
To display ASAP detailed information, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Alarm Severities
Result:The ASAPs management window is displayed and lists the existing ASAP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the list, select one ASAP and click Detail.
Result:The ASAP Edition window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the Probable Causes Families area, check one or several alarm families.
Result:Alarms are displayed in the Probable Cause Names list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From the list, select an alarm.
Result: Severity levels of Service Affecting alarms and �on Service Affecting alarms
are displayed. Service Independent value must be Not Used.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If necessary, repeat step Step 4 to display other alarm severity levels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Cancel.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Displaying ASAP Detailed Information
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-11
Creating an ASAP
Purpose
Use this procedure to create an ASAP.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is displayed.
How to create an ASP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Alarm Severities
Result:The ASAPs management window is displayed and lists the existing ASAP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the list, select a default ASAP and click Clone.
Result:The ASAP Edition window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In ASAP Identifier field, enter a name for the new ASAP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From the Probable Causes Families area, check one or several alarm families to include
in the newASAP.
Result:Alarms are displayed in the Probable Cause �ames list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 From the list, select an alarm.
Result:Current severity levels of Service Affecting alarms and �on Service Affecting
alarms are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In Service Affecting list, click on the required severity level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 In Non Service Affecting list, click on the required severity level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Repeat from Step 5 until all alarm severity levels are assigned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click OK.
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Creating an ASAP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-12 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Result:The new ASAP is displayed in ASAPs management window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click Close.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Creating an ASAP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-13
Modifying an ASAP
Purpose
Use this procedure to modify an ASAP
Before you begin
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
• The ASAP to modify is not a default ASAP.
How to modify an ASAP
To modify an ASAP, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Alarm Severities
Result:The ASAPs management window is displayed and lists the existing ASAP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the list, select an ASAP and click Modify.
Result:The ASAP Edition window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the Probable Causes Families area, check one or several alarm families.
Result:Alarms are displayed in the Probable Cause �ames list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From the list, select an alarm.
Result:Current severity levels of Service Affecting alarms and �on Service Affecting
alarms are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In Service Affecting list, click on the required severity level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In Non Service Affecting list, click on the required severity level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Repeat from step Step 5 until all alarm severity levels are modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 The modified ASAP is displayed in ASAPs management window.
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Modifying an ASAP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-14 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click Close.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Modifying an ASAP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-15
Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity
Purpose
Use this procedure to assign an ASAP to a managed entity.
Before you begin
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
• Amanaged entity is selected.
How to assign an ASAP to a managed entity
To assign an ASAP to a managed entity, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration > Set Alarms Severities...
Result:The Set ASAP window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the List of ASAPs area, select the required ASAP. Otherwise go to step Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To assign the selected ASAP to a selected managed entity, perform the following.
Otherwise go to step Step 4.
1. In the Apply To area, check that Selected object only radio button is selected.
2. Click OK to finish. Go to End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To assign the selected ASAP to a selected managed entity and its subordinates, perform
the following. Otherwise go to step Step 6.
1. In the Apply To area, check that Selected object and subordinates radio button is
selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK to finish. Go to step End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 To assign the selected ASAP to all managed entities of the 1626 LM, perform the
following. Otherwise go to step Step 7.
1. Select Network element radio button.
2. Select All classes radio button.
3. Click OK to finish. Go to End.
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-16 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To assign the selected ASAP to specific types of managed entities, perform the following.
1. Select Network element radio button.
2. Select Specific classes radio button.
3. In the activated list, select one of several classes with Up or Down arrow keys
4. Click OK to finish.
See Also
“Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities” (p. 19-18)
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-17
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities
Purpose
“Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity” (p. 19-16) explains how to assign an ASAP
once a specific TP or equipment has been previously selected. In this context, it means
that you must access and select each TP or equipment prior to execute the referenced
procedure. This can be very painful when your configuration involves a lot of boards.
The way to assign an ASAP to multiple managed entities is described in the following
procedure.
�ote: To make the procedure easier to read, only TP selection will be described.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to assign an ASAP to multiple managed entities
To assign an ASAP to multiple managed entities, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Set Alarm>Severities...
Result:The Set ASAP window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From List of ASAPs area, select the ASAP to assign.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click TP List...
Result:The Clipboard - Set ASAP window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From Add Object area, click Add TP...
Result:The TP Search / Clipboard - Set ASAP window is displayed.
For any details about TP Search / Clipboard - Set ASAP window window, refer to“Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point Input Windows” (p. 3-31)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 From the Equipment area, select the relevant entity to search for TPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Search.
Result:The related TPs are displayed in Termination Points area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select one, several or all TPs and click OK.
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-18 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Result:
• Once the selected TPs have been taken into account, the TP Search / Clipboard -
Set ASAP window disapears.
• The selected TPs are displayed in Clipboard - Set ASAP window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click Start.
Result:The selected TPs are progressively flagged Pending, then OK. The selected
ASAP is then assigned to the selected TPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Close to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-19
De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to de-assign an ASAP from a set of managed entities.
De-assigning an ASAP comes to replace the current ASAP by another one. Once the
ASAP is de-assigned, it is considered as not being in use, and can be deleted.
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to de-assign an ASAP from managed entities
To de-assign an ASAP from managed entities, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Set Alarm>Severities...
Result:The Set ASAP window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From List of ASAPs area, select a new ASAP to assign in place of the current one.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click TP List...
Result:The Clipboard - Set ASAP window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From Add Object area, click Add TP...
Result:The TP Search / Clipboard - Set ASAP window is displayed.
For any details about TP Search / Clipboard - Set ASAP window window, refer to“Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point Input Windows” (p. 3-31)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 From the Equipment area, select the relevant entity to search for TPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 From the ASAP Search area, select the ASAP value that is currently assigned.
This filter will retrieve the TPs which are assigned with the current ASAP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Search.
Result:The related TPs are displayed in Termination Points area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select the TPs, and click OK.
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-20 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Result:
• Once the selected TPs have been taken into account, the TP Search / Clipboard -
Set ASAP window disapears.
• The selected TPs are displayed in Clipboard - Set ASAP window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Start.
Result:The selected TPs are progressively flagged Pending, then OK. The new
selected ASAP is then assigned to the selected TPs and replaces the current one.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click Close to finish.
See Also
“Deleting ASAPs” (p. 19-22)
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-21
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deleting ASAPs
Purpose
Use this procedure to delete ASAPs
Before you begin
• The 1626 LM GUI is started.
• The ASAP to delete is not a default ASAP.
• The ASAP to delete is not in use.
Refer to “De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities” (p. 19-20)
How to delete ASAPs
To delete ASAPs, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Alarm Severities
Result:The ASAPs management window is displayed and lists the existing ASAP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the list, select one ASAP and click Delete.
Result:The ASAP disappears from the list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Close to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Deleting ASAPs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-22 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Managing Alarm Threshold Tables
Overview
Purpose
An alarm threshold defines the triggering point of the following alarms:
• IPL (Input Power Loss)
• LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section)
• OPL (Output Power Loss)
• UE (Uncorrected Error)
Alarm threshold configuration apply for the following boards:
• BMDX
• CMDX
• OMDX
• LOFA
• WMA�
• TDMX
• TRBD and TRBC
Each of theses boards are assigned with a default threshold table which holds the alarm
threshold values.
To be able to create a specific threshold table and to assign it to a board, you must:
1. Select one of the default threshold table.
2. Clone the selected table and save it with a specific name.
3. Assign the threshold table to the required board.
4. End.
You can create until 14 alarm threshold tables for the 1626 LM node.
This topic describes the parameters and procedures to follow when you want to manage
alarm threshold tables.
Contents
Alarm Threshold Parameters 19-24
Displaying Board Alarm Threshold 19-27
Creating Alarm Threshold Tables 19-28
Assigning an Alarm Threshold to a Board 19-30
Modifying Alarm Threshold Tables 19-31
Deleting Alarm Threshold Tables 19-33
Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-23
Alarm Threshold Parameters
The following tables give the alarm threshold values for the following boards:
• BMDX
• CMDX
• OMDX
• LOFA
• WMA�3174
• WMA�1100
• TDMX
• TRBD and TRBC
Table 19-3 BMDX Alarm Thresholds
BMDX
Alarm Threshold - Port
Default Value Range Step
IPL/LOMS at Demux input port -2 dBm -2 dBm to +24
dBm
1 dB
IPL at Mux input ports (1 -> 12) -32 dBm -32 dBm to +19
dBm
1 dB
Table 19-4 CMDX Alarm Thresholds
CMDX
Alarm Threshold - Port
Default Value Range Step
IPL/LOMS at Demux input port -20 dBm -35 dBm to +15
dBm
1 dB
IPL at Mux input ports (1 -> 8) -30 dBm -30 dBm to +15
dBm
1 dB
Table 19-5 OMDX Alarm Thresholds
OMDX
Alarm Threshold - Port
Default Value Range Step
• IPL/LOMS at ODX line input port
• IPL at Mux input ports (1 -> 8)
• IPL at OMX extra port
• IPL at OMX expansion port (for L1X
model only)
• OPL at OMX line output port
-38 dBm -40 dBm to +23
dBm
1 dB
Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesAlarm Threshold Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-24 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Table 19-6 LOFA Alarm Thresholds
LOFA
Alarm Threshold - Port
Default Value Range Step
IPL/LOMS at first stage input (for
LOFA11x0)
-35 dBm -40 dBm to +5
dBm
1 dB
IPL/LOMS at first stage input (for
LOFA11x1)
-38 dBm -38 dBm to +5
dBm
1 dB
Table 19-7 WMAN3174 Alarm Thresholds
WMAN3174
Alarm Threshold - Port
Default Value Range Step
IPL at wavelength manager input (Add &
Drop and Express)
-30 dBm -30 dBm to +14
dBm
1 dB
IPL at wavelength selective switch input -30 dBm -30 dBm to +14
dBm
1 dB
OPL at line output -30 dBm -30 dBm to +14
dBm
1 dB
Table 19-8 WMAN1100 Alarm Thresholds
WMAN1100
Alarm Threshold - Port
Default Value Range Step
IPL at line input -6 dBm -10 dBm to +20
dBm
1 dB
OPL at wavelength blocker output -12 dBm -24 dBm to +9
dBm
1 dB
OPL at line output -14 dBm -25 dBm to +7
dBm
1 dB
Table 19-9 TDMX Alarm Thresholds
TDMX
Alarm Threshold - Port
Default Value Range Step
IPL at line input -24 dBm -30 dBm to +14
dBm
1 dB
OPL at channel output -24 dBm -30 dBm to +14
dBm
1 dB
Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesAlarm Threshold Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-25
Table 19-10 TRBD and TRBC Alarm Threshold
TRBD and TRBC
Alarm Threshold
Default Value Range Step
FEC Module Uncorrected Errors (High
Threshold) (In Blocks)
10,499,451 1 to 10,499,451
Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesAlarm Threshold Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-26 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Displaying Board Alarm Threshold
Purpose
Use this procedure to display board alarm thresholds.
Before you begin
The required board view is displayed.
How to display board alarm threshold
To display board alarm thresholds, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board>Alarm Threshold Configuration
Result:The Alarm Threshold Configuration window is displayed and lists the
existing alarm threshold tables for the selected board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click View.
Result:The Alarm Threshold view window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Cancel to close the window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Close to finish.
See Also
“Alarm Threshold Parameters” (p. 19-24)
Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesDisplaying Board Alarm Threshold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-27
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating Alarm Threshold Tables
Purpose
Use this procedure to create alarm threshold tables.
Before you begin
The required board view is displayed.
How to create alarm threshold tables
To create alarm threshold tables, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board>Alarm Threshold Configuration
Result:The Alarm Threshold Configuration window is displayed and lists the
existing alarm threshold tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click Clone.
Result:The Alarm threshold table cloning window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In Table name field, enter a name for the new alarm threshold table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 For each of the thresholds, select the required value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Clone.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 The new alarm threshold table appears in the Threshold Table list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 From the list, select the new table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 The new table is assigned to the selected board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click Close to finish.
Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesCreating Alarm Threshold Tables
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-28 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
“Alarm Threshold Parameters” (p. 19-24)
Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesCreating Alarm Threshold Tables
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-29
Assigning an Alarm Threshold to a Board
Purpose
Use this procedure to assign an alarm threshold to a board.
Before you begin
The required board view is displayed.
How to assign an alarm threshold to a board
To assign an alarm threshold to a board, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board>Alarm Threshold Configuration
Result:The Alarm Threshold Configuration window is displayed and lists the
existing alarm threshold tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click Apply.
Result:The selected table is assigned to the selected board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Close to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesAssigning an Alarm Threshold to a Board
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-30 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Modifying Alarm Threshold Tables
Purpose
Use this procedure to modify alarm threshold tables,
Before you begin
The required board view is displayed.
How to modify alarm threshold tables
To modify alarm threshold tables, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board>Alarm Threshold Configuration
Result:The Alarm Threshold Configuration window is displayed and lists the
existing alarm threshold tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click Modify.
Result:The Alarm threshold table modification window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If necessary, in Table name field, enter a new for the threshold table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 For the required thresholds, select a new value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Apply.
Result:The new alarm threshold table appears in the Threshold Table list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 From the list, select the new table.
Result:Click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 The modified table is assigned to the selected board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click Close to finish.
Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesModifying Alarm Threshold Tables
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-31
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
“Alarm Threshold Parameters” (p. 19-24)
Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesModifying Alarm Threshold Tables
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-32 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Deleting Alarm Threshold Tables
Purpose
Use this procedure to delete alarm threshold tables.
Before you begin
• The required board view is displayed.
• The alarm threshold table to delete is not a default one.
• The alarm threshold table to delete is not the current assigned table.
How to delete alarm threshold tables
To delete alarm threshold tables, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Board>Alarm Threshold Configuration
Result:The Alarm Threshold Configuration window is displayed and lists the
existing alarm threshold tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Delete to confirm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Close to finish.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesDeleting Alarm Threshold Tables
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-33
Managing Auto Discovery Alarm
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manage the ability to report to the network manager that:
• a new 1626 LM has been introduced in the network, or
• existing 1626 LM communication addresses have been modified.
Contents
Enabling/Disabling Auto Discovery Alarm 19-35
Alarm Management Managing Auto Discovery AlarmOverview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-34 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Enabling/Disabling Auto Discovery Alarm
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to enable/disable the 1626 LM to report to the network
manager that:
• a new 1626 LM has been introduced in the network, or
• existing 1626 LM communication addresses have been modified.
Before you begin
1626 LM GUI is started.
How to enable/disable Auto Discovery alarm
To enable/disable Auto Discovery alarm, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Configuration>Management>Auto Discovery.
Result: Network Element - Auto Discovery window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
From the drop-down list, select one of the following:
• Enable: to enable the network manager to be warned of 1626 LM introduction or
network addresses modifications.
• Disable: to disable the auto discovery alarm to be reported to the network manager.
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Management Managing Auto Discovery AlarmEnabling/Disabling Auto Discovery Alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
19-35
20 20Equipment Alarms
Overview
Purpose
This topic gives a description of the alarms raised from the hardware components and the
required actions to perform to clear the raised alarms.
Contents
AUP (Auxiliary Unit Problem) 20-3
COCE (Configuration Or Customization Error) 20-4
EQPT (Equipment Malfunction) 20-5
HT (High Temperature) 20-6
HVCSP (Heating or ventilation or Cooling System Problem) 20-7
IPD (Input Power Degraded) 20-8
IPL (Input Power Loss) 20-9
LA� (LA�Alarm) 20-10
OCCO (Optical Connector Cover Open) 20-11
OPD (Output Power Degraded) 20-12
OPL (Output Power Loss) 20-13
PD (Performance Degraded) 20-14
PP (Power Problem) 20-15
RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing) 20-16
RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem) 20-17
RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch) 20-18
RUU (Replaceable Unit Unknown) 20-19
SCP (Serial Communication Problem) 20-20
TD (Transmitter Degraded) 20-21
TF (Transmitter Failure) 20-22
TOOR (Temperature Out Of Range) 20-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-1
UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present) 20-24
UDCL (User Data Channel Loss) 20-25
VM (Version Mismatch) 20-26
WD (Wavelength Deviation) 20-27
Equipment Alarms Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
AUP (Auxiliary Unit Problem)
AUP (Auxiliary Unit Problem)
Description The WMA� optical channel monitor does not work
properly.
Probable Cause The channel supervision is not accurate at board level.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes, when appropriate regarding operations.
Actions Replace the board after route reconfiguration.
Equipment Alarms AUP (Auxiliary Unit Problem)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-3
COCE (Configuration Or Customization Error)
COCE (Configuration Or Customization Error)
Description• ALCT or LOFA cases
Indicates that ALCT or LOFA boards are working
out of acceptable range of value regarding laser
output power and optical attenuation.
• TR-OADM configuration case
Indicates that transponder laser state is not
compatible with channel state.
COCE is an indication to inform that these devices are
currently not used as they have been designed for typical
use.
COCE does not necessarily imply any malfunction or
failure.
Probable Cause COCE alarm may be raised:
• following particular tuning due to specific
configuration,
• in a TR-OADM configuration, when a transponder
laser is on and the channel state is Express.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes
Actions 1. Escalate the problem to your performance
optimization support team to determine if a
corrective action must be done.
2. To clear the alarm, increase or decrease the values of
output power and optical attenuation accordingly.
3. If the problem persists, contact Alcatel-Lucent
Support Team.
4. End.
Equipment Alarms COCE (Configuration Or Customization Error)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
EQPT (Equipment Malfunction)
EQPT (Equipment Malfunction)
Description WMA� failure for a specific channel.
Probable Cause Hardware failure of one component of the WMA�
board.
Related Alarms URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes, when appropriate regarding operations.
Actions Replace the board after route reconfiguration.
Equipment Alarms EQPT (Equipment Malfunction)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-5
HT (High Temperature)
HT (High Temperature)
Description Board temperature is greater than 50°C.
Probable Cause• Room air conditioning system does not work
properly.
• At least one of the 3 related fans has failed.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes
Actions 1. Verify if the room air conditioning system works
properly.
2. If necessary and according to your procedures, clean
or replace the dust filter.
3. If necessary, replace the faulty fans.
4. If necessary, replace the board.
5. End.
Equipment Alarms HT (High Temperature)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
HVCSP (Heating or ventilation or Cooling System Problem)
HVCSP (Heating or ventilation or Cooling System Problem)
Description A temperature problem has occurred on a LOFA or a fan
board.
Probable Cause• The gain block of a LOFA board recently plugged
has not reached the correct temperature.
• The fan dust filters are dirty.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes
Actions For LOFA board:
1. If the board has been plugged recently, wait until the
gain block is fully operational.
2. If the board has been plugged for a certain time,
verify:
• if the room air conditioning system works
properly.
• if the dust filters are clean.
3. If necessary, replace the LOFA board.
4. End.
For fan board:
1. Verify:
2. if the room air conditioning system works properly.
• if the dust filters are clean.
• If necessary, replace the fan board.
3. End.
Equipment Alarms HVCSP (Heating or ventilation or Cooling System Problem)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-7
IPD (Input Power Degraded)
IPD (Input Power Degraded)
Description Depending on the board which has raised the alarm.
• A transponder has detected a degraded incoming
signal from a client transmitter.
• ALOFA has detected a degraded incoming signal at
stage input.
Probable Cause• A problem occurred on the client transmitter or
along the fiber path between the client node and the
1626 LM.
• The input power at LOFA stage input is lower than
the minimum acceptable value for the given
configuration.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Depending on the fault location.
Actions For transponders:
1. Contact the relevant operation team to check the
client transmitter.
2. Check the client fiber connection at the transponder.
3. Check the fiber path between the client node and the
1626 LM.
4. End.
For LOFA:
1. Check the mechanical aspect of the fiber
(Connection at stage input and fiber aspect)
2. If the alarm persists, tune the amplification level.
This operation may require Alcatel-Lucent Technical
Support intervention.
Equipment Alarms IPD (Input Power Degraded)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
IPL (Input Power Loss)
IPL (Input Power Loss)
Description Optical power loss at input port.
For TRBx boards: can be raised at VOA input, excepted
for TRBD1191 MLSE.
For WMAN boards: can be raised for a single express
channel.
Probable Cause• The fiber may be unplugged
• The fiber between the impacted board and the
previous transmission device may be broken.
• The transmitter of the previous transmission device
may be in failure.
• The VOA does not detect any input signal.
• One express channel is not in service in the network.
Related Alarms LOS (Loss Of Signal)
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Check the fiber connection.
2. Check the fiber path from the previous transmission
device.
3. Check the transmitter of the previous transmission
device.
4. If applicable, verify the connection between:
• the TRBx output and the VOA input
• the BOFA output and the VOA input
5. End.
Equipment Alarms IPL (Input Power Loss)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-9
LAN (LAN Alarm)
LAN (Local Area Network Alarm)
Description The LA� link between the 1626 LM and its network
manager is lost.
Probable Cause The relevant cable is disconnected or broken.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. In the master subrack, on the ESCT-EC board, check
the cable which supports the management traffic.
2. End.
Equipment Alarms LAN (LAN Alarm)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
OCCO (Optical Connector Cover Open)
OCCO (Optical Connector Cover Open)
Description The front cover has been removed.
For safety reason, the laser of the following boards is
automatically shutdown:
• for EMPM boards, the laser is shutdown
immediately.
• For LOFA boards:
– the laser is shutdown immediately if the cover
disable status is Cover_Enable.
– the laser is shutdown after a 5 minutes timer if
the cover disable status is Cover_Disable.
Probable Cause The front panel safety cover has been removed.
Related Alarms URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) at LOFA
shutdown.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Replace the front panel safety cover to restart the
LOFA board.
2. End.
Equipment Alarms OCCO (Optical Connector Cover Open)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-11
OPD (Output Power Degraded)
OPD (Output Power Degraded)
Description The output power of TRBD, WMA� or ALCT boards is
not the configured one.
Probable Cause The requested power or attenuation settings cannot
apply because out of acceptable range.
Related Alarms Related equipment alarm(s) may be raised if hardware
problem.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Depending on the context.
Actions Perform one of the following actions:
• Check board configuration to determine if the
power or attenuation setting is compliant with board
acceptable range.
• Check if other equipment alarms have raised to
determine if the problem is related to an hardware
failure. In this case, replace the equipment.
Equipment Alarms OPD (Output Power Degraded)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-12 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
OPL (Output Power Loss)
OPL (Output Power Loss)
Description Optical power at output port is less than the minimum
value.
Probable Cause If the board is a/an
...
Then ...
OMDX-MUX,
CMDX 1052,
WMA�, TDMX,
OADC, OC�C
• The optical output power is
less than the configured
threshold value.
• The equipment may have an
hardware failure.
LOFA• The first or second stage
optical output power is less
than the configured
threshold value.
• The equipment may have an
hardware failure.
OSCU The laser may be out of service.
Related Alarms Related equipment alarm(s) may be raised if hardware
problem.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Depending on board type.
Actions If the board is a/an
...
Then ...
OMDX-MUX,
CMDX 1052,
WMA�, TDMX,
OADC, OC�C
1. Adjust the threshold values
2. If the alarm persists, check
the complete upstream path.
3. If related equipment alarms,
replace the equipment.
4. End.
LOFA 1. Depending on the amplifier
stage, check first or second
stage APSD status.
2. End.
OSCU 1. Replace the board.
2. End.
Equipment Alarms OPL (Output Power Loss)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-13
PD (Performance Degraded)
PD (Performance Degraded)
Description• General case
Board initialization is in progress. During this phase,
the board is not fully operational.
• WMA� and TDMX case
WMA� and TDMX boards cannot work properly
with the correct required output power value.
Probable Cause• General case
Board initialization.
• WMA� and TDMX case
probable cause may be one of the following:
– Incompatibility between channel power at board
input and required output set point value.
– Wrong setup of board.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required �o.
Actions• General case
Wait until the end of initialization and check that the
alarm is cleared
• WMA� and TDMX case
– Check input power if applicable.
– Check if specific configuration parameters are
compliant with commissioning rules.
Equipment Alarms PD (Performance Degraded)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-14 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
PP (Power Problem)
PP (Power Problem)
Description Power supply unit is not provided with the right voltage.
Probable Cause• The public power supply network has a problem.
• The connection is faulty.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Contact the public power supplier to check if there is
any problem in delivering the voltage.
2. Check the connection between the power supply unit
and the power supplier.
3. End.
Equipment Alarms PP (Power Problem)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-15
RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing)
RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing)
Description A declared equipment other than ESCT is missing in a
slot.
Probable Cause See Description.
Related Alarms URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Plug the relevant board in the empty slot.
2. End.
Equipment Alarms RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-16 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem)
RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem)
Description An hardware component has failed. This may be impact
the traffic.
Does not apply to SFP/XFP modules, nor to ESCT
boards.
Probable Cause Hardware failure.
Related Alarms URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Replace the board.
2. End.
Equipment Alarms RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-17
RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch)
RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch)
Description An equipment which is plugged into the slot has a type
which is different from the declaration.
Probable Cause Mismatch between board declaration and board
plugging.
Related Alarms URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. If the declaration corresponds to your configuration,
change the equipment.
2. If the equipment type corresponds to your
configuration, modify the declaration.
3. End.
Equipment Alarms RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-18 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
RUU (Replaceable Unit Unknown)
RUU (Replaceable Unit Unknown)
Description Warning which indicates that the equipment which is
plugged into a slot is not an Alcatel part.
Probable Cause See Description.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Plug the Alcatel-Lucent equipment which is
validated for this purpose. Use of any other
equipment is not certified.
2. End.
Equipment Alarms RUU (Replaceable Unit Unknown)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-19
SCP (Serial Communication Problem)
SCP (Serial Communication Problem)
Description The master shelf, managed by the ESCT-SC, cannot
communicate with secondary shelf, managed by
ESCT-EC.
Probable Cause• The ESCT-SC cannot manage the related subrack.
• The ESCT-SC cannot report management
information to ESCT-EC.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Check the connection between master shelf and
secondary shelf.
2. Unplug the ESCT-SC and plug it again to restart the
board.
3. Check that SC LED of ESCT-SC is green.
4. If the problem persists, contact Alcatel-Lucent
Support team.
5. End.
Equipment Alarms SCP (Serial Communication Problem)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-20 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
TD (Transmitter Degraded)
TD (Transmitter Degraded)
Description The transmitter module is degraded.
Probable Cause• In case of board plugging
The board initialization is not complete. The alarm
should disappear once the initialization is finished.
• In case of normal operation
The transmitter module of the board is degraded.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions In case of board plugging context:
1. Wait until the end of board initialization.
2. Unplug and replug the board to re-initialize it.
3. If necessary replace the board.
4. End.
In case of normal operation:
1. Replace the board.
2. End.
Equipment Alarms TD (Transmitter Degraded)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-21
TF (Transmitter Failure)
TF (Transmitter Failure)
Description For transponders, SFP/XFP modules or ALCT boards:
the transmitter module has failed.
For amplifiers: The pump module is degraded.
Probable Cause See Description.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Replace the board.
2. End.
Equipment Alarms TF (Transmitter Failure)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-22 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
TOOR (Temperature Out Of Range)
TOOR (Temperature Out Of Range)
Description Indicates that WMA� initialization is on-going and
warm-up is on progress. In normal circumstances,
TOOR alarm is cleared automatically, and you just have
to wait. However, if TOOR alarm persists, WMA�
board may be faulty and RUP alarm is raised.
Probable Cause WMA�3x board initialization requires a certain amount
of time to be at the right operational temperature.
Related Alarms RUP (Replaceable Unit problem) if TOOR alarm is
raised for more than 40'.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes, if RUP alarm is raised.
Actions Refer to “RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem)” (p. 20-17)
Equipment Alarms TOOR (Temperature Out Of Range)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-23
UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present)
UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present)
Description An equipment is plugged into a slot without any
declaration.
Probable Cause See Description.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required �o.
Actions Perform the relevant declaration.
Equipment Alarms UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-24 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
UDCL (User Data Channel Loss)
UDCL (User Data Channel Loss)
Description A transponder has detected a loss of signal from UDC
port.
Probable Cause There is no equipment connected to UDC port.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes, if UDC port is used
Actions If UDC port is not used:
1. Filter the alarm to clear it automatically.
2. End.
If UDC port is used:
1. Check the equipment connection to the port.
2. End.
Equipment Alarms UDCL (User Data Channel Loss)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-25
VM (Version Mismatch)
VM (Version Mismatch)
Description Awrong software version has been downloaded to the
ESCT-SC board.
Probable Cause See Description.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Unplug the ESCT-SC and plug it again to
re-initialize the board.
2. End.
Equipment Alarms VM (Version Mismatch)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-26 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
WD (Wavelength Deviation)
WD (Wavelength Deviation)
Description The wavelength is out of range.
Probable Cause• In case of board plugging:
The board initialization is not complete. The alarm
should disappear when initialization is complete.
• In case of normal operations:
The optical module is failed and cannot align the
wavelength with the configured value.
Related Alarms URU (underlying Resource Unavailable)
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Check the board.
2. If necessary, replace the board.
3. End.
Equipment Alarms WD (Wavelength Deviation)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
20-27
21 21Transmission Alarms
Overview
Purpose
This topic gives a description of the alarms raised during the transmission process and the
required actions to perform to clear the raised alarms.
Contents
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) 21-2
CSF (Communication Subsystem Failure) 21-3
LBER (Low Bit Error Rate) 21-4
LOF (Loss Of Frame) 21-5
LOMF (Loss Of Multi-Frame) 21-6
LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section) 21-7
LOS (Loss Of Signal) 21-8
LOSC (Loss Of Supervisory Channel) 21-9
LOSCF (Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame) 21-10
LOW (Loss Of Wavelength) 21-11
LTCER (Low Threshold Corrected Error) 21-12
otnTIM (Optical Transport �etwork Trace Identifier Mismatch) 21-13
SSF (Server Signal Failure) 21-14
SSF- i (Server Signal Failure - ingress) 21-16
SSF- e (Server Signal Failure - egress) 21-17
TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm) 21-18
TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch) 21-19
UAT (UnAvailable Time) 21-20
UE (Uncorrected Error) 21-21
URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) 21-22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
21-1
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)
Description A remote network equipment delivers a fault indication
which is raised as an AIS.
The AIS may be raised by:
• Rs-TM, ODU and OTU blocks of TRBC or TRBD
boards or
• RSgdc block of ETHC and 2xGBE_FC boards.
Probable Cause If AIS is raised by:
• Rs-TM block: the problem is related to the SDH
network.
• ODU and OTU blocks: the problem is related to the
WDM network.
• RSgdc block: the problem is related to the Ethernet
network.
Related Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure) generated on higher
impacted layers.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes, on the equipment which has inserted the AIS.
Actions 1. Check the cabling and the path of the equipment
which has inserted the AIS.
2. Check the alarms of the equipment which has
inserted the AIS.
3. Repair or replace the faulty components.
4. End.
Transmission Alarms AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
CSF (Communication Subsystem Failure)
CSF (Communication Subsystem Failure)
Description LAPD transport problem through supervision frame.
Depending on the configuration, the supervision may be
not possible via the fiber.
CSF alarm is raised by OTS blocks.
Probable Cause• LAPD configuration problem.
• The corresponding end-point equipment may have
failed
• Fiber problem.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes
Actions 1. Check LAPD configuration consistency on both
point-to-point network equipments.
If network equipments are not reachable, you may
have to go on-site to perform the maintenance
actions.
2. Check the corresponding end-point equipment.
3. Check the fiber between the 2 end-point
equipments.
4. End.
Transmission Alarms CSF (Communication Subsystem Failure)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
21-3
LBER (Low Bit Error Rate)
LBER (Low Bit Error Rate)
Description The SDH or Ethernet signal is degraded.
10-6 LBER threshold is reached or exceeded.
LBER alarm may be raised by:
• Rs-TM block of TRBC or TRBD boards or
• RsTTP block from ETHC and 2xGBE_FC boards.
Probable Cause A transmission device or a fiber of the SDH or Ethernet
path transmits a bad quality signal. The source of the
problem may be remote.
Related Alarms May be correlated with LTCER (Low Threshold
Corrected Error rate) alarm.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes
Actions 1. Check the previous transmission devices (client or
WDM) until you find the source of the alarm.
2. Check the fiber connection.
3. Check the transmitter of the transmission device
which is the source of the alarm.
4. End.
Transmission Alarms LBER (Low Bit Error Rate)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
LOF (Loss Of Frame)
LOF (Loss Of Frame)
Description The optical signal is received with a non conform
contents. The frame cannot be decoded.
LOF alarm may be raised by:
• OCHA, and ODU blocks of TRBC or TRBD boards
or
• OCH block of ETHC or 2xGE_FC boards.
Probable Cause• The line may have failed on a remote network
equipment.
• A remote network equipment may be faulty.
Related Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure) generated on higher
impacted layers.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Depending on the fault location.
Actions 1. Check the optical line and verify if there is not any
fiber break.
2. Check if the current 1626 LM and the remote
network equipment are configured for the same type
of communication.
3. End.
Transmission Alarms LOF (Loss Of Frame)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
21-5
LOMF (Loss Of Multi-Frame)
LOMF (Loss Of Multi-Frame)
Description The optical signal is received with a non conform
contents. The OTU multi-frame cannot be decoded.
LOMF alarm is raised by OCHA block of TRBC or
TRBD boards.
Probable Cause A remote network equipment may be faulty.
Related Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure) generated on higher
impacted layers.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Verify if the current 1626 LM and the remote
network equipment are configured for the same type
of communication.
2. End.
Transmission Alarms LOMF (Loss Of Multi-Frame)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-6 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section)
LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section)
Description Indicates that the payload signal is lost whereas the
supervision signal is received.
LOMS alarm is raised by:
• OTS block of LOFA boards for incoming WDM
signal,
• OTS block from CMDX or BMDX boards for
incoming band signal.
Probable Cause Transmitter of previous transmission device may be in
failure.
Related Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure) generated on higher
impacted layers.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Check if the transmitter of the previous transmission
device has failed.
2. End.
Transmission Alarms LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
21-7
LOS (Loss Of Signal)
LOS (Loss Of Signal)
Description For transponders, Mux/Demux, Ethernet boards: the
incoming signal is absent or misinterpreted.
For amplifiers: both payload and supervision signals are
lost.
LOS alarm may be raised by:
• OGPI block of TRBC, TRBD, CMDX, ETHC or
2xGBE_FC boards.
• OGPI block from OCPU board.
• OTS block of a LOFA board.
Probable Cause• The fiber may be unplugged,
• The fiber between the impacted board and the
previous transmission device may be broken,
• The transmitter of the previous transmission device
may be in failure.
Related Alarms• SSF (Server Signal Failure) generated on higher
impacted layers.
• IPL (Input Power Loss).
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Check the fiber connection.
2. Check the fiber between the impacted board and the
previous transmission device.
3. Check the transmitter of the previous transmission
device.
4. End.
Transmission Alarms LOS (Loss Of Signal)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-8 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
LOSC (Loss Of Supervisory Channel)
LOSC (Loss Of Supervisory Channel)
Description Indicates that the OSCU board does not receive any
supervision signal.
LOSC alarm is raised by OTS block related to the
LOFA board associated with the OSCU board.
Probable Cause A problem occurred between the impacted board and the
previous amplifier.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Check the OSCU of the related network equipment
to determine if a HW failure occurred or if a cable is
disconnected or broken.
2. Verify if the LOSC alarm disappears.
3. End.
Transmission Alarms LOSC (Loss Of Supervisory Channel)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
21-9
LOSCF (Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame)
LOSCF (Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame)
Description OSCU board receives a supervision signal but cannot
decode it.
LOSCF alarm is raised by OTS block related to the
LOFA board associated with the of OSCU board.
Probable Cause Remote WDM equipment does not send the compliant
supervision frame.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required �o.
Actions 1. Check the configuration of the 2 OSCU boards to
determine if the clock configuration is OK.
2. If the alarm persists, change the relevant OSCU
board.
3. End.
Transmission Alarms LOSCF (Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-10 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
LOW (Loss Of Wavelength)
LOW (Loss Of Wavelength)
Description Loss of a single wavelength related to express channel
at WMA� input.
LOW alarm is raised by the OCH CTP block.
Probable Cause• Transmitter of previous transmission device is in
failure, or
• One express channel is not in service in the
network.
• Configuration of express channel threshold is too
high.
Related Alarms• IPL (Input Power Loss)
• SSF (Server Signal Failure) generated on higher
impacted layers
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required �o.
Actions Perform one of the following:
1. Check previous WDM transmission devices until
you find the source of the alarm.
2. Verify the consistency between the board
configuration and the network.
3. Check if the input channel threshold is compliant.
4. End.
Transmission Alarms LOW (Loss Of Wavelength)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
21-11
LTCER (Low Threshold Corrected Error)
LTCER (Low Threshold Corrected Error)
Description Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high
correction rate (FEC).
Probable Cause• The transmitter of the previous transmission device
is degraded.
• Tuning discrepancy between transponders and
amplifiers following a modification of the number
of WDM channels.
• The fiber path between the 1626 LM and the
previous transmission device may be degraded.
Related Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure) generated on higher
impacted layers
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required �one.
Actions 1. Check the fiber connection.
2. Check the fiber between the 1626 LM and the
previous transmission device.
3. Measure the channel margin.
4. If necessary, tune the line to recover the channel
margin.
5. End.
Transmission Alarms LTCER (Low Threshold Corrected Error)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-12 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
otnTIM (Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch)
otnTIM (Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch)
Description Indicates that the received TTI is not the expected one
from a remote equipment.
otnTIM alarm is raised by:
• OTU/ODU blocks of TRBC or TRBD boards.
• OTS block of LOFA boards, if supervision is
configured (OSCU board implemented and cabled
to LOFA boards)
Probable Cause• Wrong TTI configuration.
• The fiber plugged into TRBC, TRBD or LOFA
boards handles a signal which is not expected by the
related board.
Related Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure) generated on higher
impacted layers
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Verify if the local cabling is compliant with the
cabling plan.
2. Verify if the local ODU-TTI, OTU-TTI or OTS-TTI
configuration is compliant with the configuration
plan.
3. Check ODU-TTI, OTU-TTI or OTS-TTI on the
remote WDM equipment.
4. End.
Transmission Alarms otnTIM (Optical Transport Network Trace IdentifierMismatch)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
21-13
SSF (Server Signal Failure)
SSF (Server Signal Failure)
Description Transmission problems have occurred.
SSF alarm is relevant in the context of remote network
management. In such context, SSF alarm indicates the
operator that a primary transmission alarm has been
raised.
SSF alarm can be raised by:
In case of simultaneous lower layer alarms:
• OMS, ODU, RS blocks.
In case of absence of lower layer alarms:
• OCHgdc block of ETHC and 2xGBE_FC boards,
• RsTTP, RSgdc blocks of ETHC and 2xGBE_FC
boards.
Probable Cause In case of simultaneous lower layer alarms:
The service related to the lower layer alarm is lost.
In case of absence of lower layer alarms:
• The SDH frame is not correct or does not contain
GFP framing or
• The VLA� service which is terminated by the board
is faulty.
Related Alarms In case of simultaneous lower layer alarms:
• LOS, or
• AIS, or
• LOF, or
• URU, or
• LOMS, or
• LOW, or
• LOMF, or
• TIM.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required In case of simultaneous lower layer alarms:
Refer to the lower layer alarms troubleshooting
description
In case of absence of lower layer alarms:
Depends on the diagnostic.
Transmission Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-14 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
SSF (Server Signal Failure)
Actions In case of simultaneous lower layer alarms:
Perform the necessary actions associated to the related
alarms.
In case of absence of lower layer alarms:
Based on the probable cause described above, analyze
the SSF alarm context from the network manager.
Transmission Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
21-15
SSF- i (Server Signal Failure - ingress)
SSF- i (Server Signal Failure - ingress)
Description Raised in the context of OS�CP protection, to report
that transmission problems have occurred on the client
network side.
SSF-i alarm is raised by OCPU board only.
Probable Cause 2 simultaneous SSF alarms have raised on both main
and spare boards.
Related Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure)
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required �o.
Actions Contact the relevant operation team to solve the
problem.
Transmission Alarms SSF- i (Server Signal Failure - ingress)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-16 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
SSF- e (Server Signal Failure - egress)
SSF - e (Server Signal Failure-egress)
Description Raised in the context of OS�CP protection, to report
that transmission problems have occurred at the output
of WDM network.
SSF - e alarm is raised by OCPU board only.
Probable Cause Transmission problems have occurred at the interface of
WDM network.
Related Alarms• SSF (at least on active transponder)
• Transmission alarm(s) specific to the problem.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Check the transmission alarm(s).
2. Depending on the transmission alarm, refer to
related corrective actions.
3. End.
Transmission Alarms SSF- e (Server Signal Failure - egress)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
21-17
TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm)
TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm)
Description An alarm threshold has been reached or exceeded. As a
consequence, the PM-AS (Performance Monitoring -
Alarm Surveillance) icon color is changed
PM-AS alarm is raised by:
• Rs-TM or OCHA blocks of TRBC or TRBD boards
or
• RsTTP block from ETHC or 2xGE_FC boards.
Probable Cause See Description.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required �o.
Actions 1. Analyze the relevant current and historical counters.
2. Check the previous transmission devices (client or
WDM) until you find the source of the alarm.
3. Perform the necessary actions to clear the alarm.
4. End.
Transmission Alarms TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-18 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
Description The received RS-TTI is not the expected one.
TIM alarm may be raised by:
• Rs-TM block of TRBC or TRBD boards or
• RsTTP block of Ethernet boards.
Probable Cause Wrong configuration of RS section.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required �o.
Actions For transponders:
1. Check if the current cabling is compliant with the
cabling plan.
2. Check the received RS-TTI of all previous boards or
nodes.
3. End.
For Ethernet boards:
1. Check the RS-TTI configured on the previous
remote Ethernet boards.
2. End.
Transmission Alarms TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
21-19
UAT (UnAvailable Time)
UAT (UnAvailable Time)
Description Indicates an important error rate during 10 consecutive
seconds.
Probable Cause• The transmitter of the previous transmission device
is degraded.
• Tuning discrepancy between transponders and
amplifiers following a modification of the number
of WDM channels.
• The fiber path between the 1626 LM and the
previous transmission device may be degraded.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required �o.
Actions 1. Analyze the signal degradation alarms of the
previous transmission devices.
2. End.
Transmission Alarms UAT (UnAvailable Time)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-20 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
UE (Uncorrected Error)
UE (Uncorrected Error)
Description Indicates that the FEC does not correct all the
transmission errors.
Probable Cause• The transmitter of the previous transmission device
is degraded.
• Tuning discrepancy between transponders an
amplifiers following a modification of the number
of WDM channels.
• The fiber path between the 1626 LM and the
previous transmission device may be degraded.
Related Alarms �one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required �one.
Actions 1. Check the fiber connection.
2. Check the fiber between the 1626 LM and the
previous transmission device.
3. Measure the channel margin.
4. If necessary, tune the line to recover the channel
margin.
5. End.
Transmission Alarms UE (Uncorrected Error)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
21-21
URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
Description Indicates that an �E internal failure has occurred. Can
be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.
Probable Cause See Description.
Related Alarms• SSF (Server Signal failure)
• All Equipment alarms may potentially be raised.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes.
Actions 1. Check the related alarm(s).
2. Depending on the alarm, refer to related corrective
actions.
3. End.
Transmission Alarms URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-22 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
22 22Processing Alarms
Overview
Purpose
This topic gives a description of the alarm raised when data are corrupted and the
required actions to perform to clear this alarm.
Contents
DB (Database Corrupted) 22-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
22-1
DB (Database Corrupted)
DB (Database Corrupted)
Description• The MIB (Master Information Base) is corrupted.
• The DB icon of the main window turns to color
orange.
• Traffic is not affected but �E alarms are not raised
anymore.
Probable Cause May be the result of several factors, including:
• power outages,
• interruptions or crashes during the writing of data
• etc.
Related Alarms URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required Yes, when appropriate regarding operations.
Actions 1. Restore a clean MIB (refer to “Restoring the MIB”
(p. 7-5).
2. From the main window, check if the DB icon has
been reset to non sever level.
3. If the problem persists, erase the MIB and the local
configuration (refer to Maintenance and Trouble
Clearing Guide, Database and Local Configuration
Maintenance chapter).
4. From the main window, check if the DB icon has
been reset to non severe level.
5. If the problem persists, contact Alcatel-Lucent
Support Team.
6. End.
Processing Alarms DB (Database Corrupted)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A AFI
Authority and Format Identifier
ALCT
Automatic Level ConTrol
ANTP
Alcatel �etwork Time Protocol
APE
Automatic Power Equalization
APSD
Automatic Power Shutdown
APT
Amplifier Power Tuning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B BER
Bit Error Rate
BMDX
Band Multiplexer DemultipleXer
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C CMDX
Channel Multiplexer DemultipleXer
CT
Craft Terminal
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D DAPI
Destination Address Point Identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
GL-1
DCC
Data Country Code
DSP
Domain Specific Part
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E EOL
End Of Life
ESCT
Equipment and Shelf ConTroller
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F FEC
Forward Error Correction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G GE_FC
Gigabit EThernet Fiber Channel
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I IDI
Initial Domain Identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L LAPD
Link Acces Protocol - channel D
LM
Light Manager
LOFA
Line Optical Fiber Amplifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M MIB
Management Information Base
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N NSAP
�etwork Service Access Point
NTP
�etwork Time Protocol
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
O OCH
Optical Channel
OMDX
Optical Multiplexer DemultipleXer
OMSP
Optical Multiplex Section Protection
OND
Optical �etwork Design Platform
OSC
Optical Supervisory Channel
OSI
Open System Interconnection
OSNCP
Optical Sub�etwork Connection Protection
OTS
Optical Transmission Section
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P PM
Performance Monitoring
PSUP
Power SUPply
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R R-OADM
Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer
Rx
Emission
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
S SAPI
Source Address Point Identifier
SFP
Smal Form Factor Pluggable
SNCP
Sub�etwork Connection Protection
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
GL-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T TDMX
Tunable Demultiplexer
TMN
Telecommunication Management �etwork
TR-OADM
Tunable and Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer
TRB
Tributary
Tx
Transmission
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
V VOA
Variable Optical Attenuation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
W WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WMAN
Wavelength Manager
WSS
Wavelength Selective Switch
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
X XFP
eXtended Form Factor Pluggable
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Index
A Access State, 4-5
Access State icons, 4-7
Addresses
Local area address parameters,
6-4
AIS, 21-2
Alarm Thresholds
Alarm Threshold Parameters,
19-24
Alarms
Alarm Management, 19-1
Alarm Thresholds, 19-23
Alarm Types, 19-4
Equipment Alarms, 20-1
Operation domain alarm
indicators, 3-28, 19-7
Processing Alarms, 22-1
Severity indicators, 3-26, 3-26,
19-5
Severity Profiles, 19-8
Transmission Alarms, 21-1
ASAP, 19-8
ASAPManagement, 19-10
AUP, 20-3
.............................................................
B Board View, 3-7
.............................................................
C Cabling
Exporting to XML File, 13-6
Procedures, 13-4, 13-5, 13-6
Channel Margin
Procedure, 16-8
COCE, 20-4
Configuration
Exportation, 18-2
Exporting System
Configuration to XML File,
18-6
Connectors, 13-1
Procedures, 13-2, 13-3
Counters
Thresholds, 17-8
Craft Terminal, 2-2
Starting the Craft Terminal, 4-3
Cross Connection, 12-1
Parameters, 12-8
Type of cross connections,
12-3
CSF, 21-3
CT, 2-2
.............................................................
D DB, 22-2
Domain alarm indicators, 3-28,
3-28, 19-7, 19-7
.............................................................
E EQPT, 20-5
Equipment View, 3-2
Ethernet
Configuring Ethernet interface,
6-18
Ethernet interface parameters,
6-7, 6-7
Event Logs, 16-7
Exportation
Configuration, 18-2
Exporting
Cabling Configuration, 13-6
System Configuration (to XML
file), 18-6
.............................................................
G Graphical User Interface, 3-1
GUI, 3-1
Starting the 1626 L GUI, 4-4
.............................................................
H HT, 20-6
HVCSP, 20-7
.............................................................
I Icons
Access State icons, 4-7
Indicators
Management status indicators,
3-29
IPD, 20-8
IPL, 20-9
.............................................................
L LA�, 20-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009
Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
IN-1
LBER, 21-4
LOF, 21-5
LOMF, 21-6
LOMS, 21-7
Loopback, 14-1
LOS, 21-8
LOSC, 21-9
LOSCF, 21-10
LOW, 21-11
LTCER, 21-12
.............................................................
M Management
Craft Terminal, 2-2
Monitoring
Procedures, 16-2
.............................................................
N �TP
Disabling �TP, 6-16
Identifying a �TP server, 6-15
�TP server network address
parameters, 6-6
.............................................................
O OCCO, 20-11
ontTIM, 21-13
OPD, 20-12
OPL, 20-13
.............................................................
P PD, 20-14
Performance Counters, 17-4
Performance Monitoring, 17-1
Mechanism, 17-7
PP, 20-15
Protection
Protection Parameters, 15-14
Protection Principles, 15-3
Recommended board locations,
15-10
.............................................................
R R-OADM, 10-1
�etwork Procedures /
WMA�3x74, 10-9
Unitary Procedures /
WMA1100, 10-25
Unitary Procedures /
WMA�3x74, 10-15
Remote Inventory, 18-2
Procedures, 18-3
RUM, 20-16
RUP, 20-17
RUTM, 20-18
RUU, 20-19
.............................................................
S SCP, 20-20
Severity indicators, 3-26, 19-5
Severity Profiles, 19-8
SSF, 21-14
SSF-e, 21-17
SSF-I, 21-16
Status indicators, 3-29
Supervision
Starting the 1626 LM
supervision, 4-4
.............................................................
T TCA, 21-18
TD, 20-21
TF, 20-22
TIM, 21-13, 21-19
TOOR, 20-23
TR-OADM, 10-1
�etwork Procedures /
WMA�3x74, 10-9
Unitary Procedures /
WMA1100, 10-25
Unitary Procedures /
WMA�3x74, 10-15
Transmission View, 3-15
.............................................................
U UAT, 21-20
UDCL, 20-25
UE, 21-21
UEP, 20-24
URU, 21-22
.............................................................
V View
Board View, 3-7
Equipment View, 3-2
VM, 20-26
.............................................................
W WD, 20-27
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009